Commit | Line | Data |
---|---|---|
1e7db2e9 | 1 | GNU Emacs NEWS -- history of user-visible changes. 2001-03-15 |
75d80cc6 | 2 | Copyright (C) 1999, 2000, 2001 Free Software Foundation, Inc. |
a933dad1 DL |
3 | See the end for copying conditions. |
4 | ||
5 | Please send Emacs bug reports to bug-gnu-emacs@gnu.org. | |
3787e12e | 6 | For older news, see the file ONEWS |
a933dad1 | 7 | |
05197f40 | 8 | \f |
251584f3 DL |
9 | * Installation Changes in Emacs 21.1 |
10 | ||
889be0a1 DL |
11 | See the INSTALL file for information on installing extra libraries and |
12 | fonts to take advantage of the new graphical features and extra | |
13 | charsets in this release. | |
14 | ||
f4988be7 GM |
15 | ** Support for GNU/Linux on IA64 machines has been added. |
16 | ||
424d8b44 DL |
17 | ** Support for LynxOS has been added. |
18 | ||
1fa28578 GM |
19 | ** `movemail' defaults to supporting POP. You can turn this off using |
20 | the --without-pop configure option, should that be necessary. | |
21 | ||
22 | ** There are new configure options associated with the support for | |
163ea954 RS |
23 | images and toolkit scrollbars. Use the --help option in `configure' |
24 | to list them. | |
6344985d | 25 | |
d5483ab1 | 26 | ** There is a new configure option `--without-xim' that instructs |
d874e913 | 27 | Emacs to not use X Input Methods (XIM), if these are available. |
5ed8d5af DL |
28 | |
29 | ** There is a new configure option `--disable-largefile' to omit | |
30 | Unix-98-style support for large files if that is available. | |
31 | ||
32 | ** You can build a 64-bit Emacs for SPARC/Solaris systems which | |
60dd7e0e | 33 | support 64-bit executables and also on Irix 6.5. This increases the |
8628686a DL |
34 | maximum buffer size. See etc/MACHINES for instructions. Changes to |
35 | build on other 64-bit systems should be straightforward modulo any | |
36 | necessary changes to unexec. | |
f4988be7 | 37 | |
d9c9b920 DL |
38 | ** Note that the MS-Windows port does not yet implement various of the |
39 | new display features described below. | |
40 | ||
e90813b8 | 41 | ** This version can be built for the Macintosh, but does not implement |
a7c13351 | 42 | all of the new display features described below. The port currently |
d69aa2e3 EZ |
43 | lacks unexec, asynchronous processes, and networking support. See the |
44 | "Emacs and the Mac OS" appendix in the Emacs manual, for the | |
45 | description of aspects specific to the Mac. | |
d9c9b920 | 46 | |
05197f40 | 47 | \f |
1fa28578 GM |
48 | * Changes in Emacs 21.1 |
49 | ||
1e7db2e9 GM |
50 | ** Emacs has a new redisplay engine. |
51 | ||
52 | The new redisplay handles characters of variable width and height. | |
53 | Italic text can be used without redisplay problems. Fonts containing | |
54 | oversized characters, i.e. characters larger than the logical height | |
55 | of a font can be used. Images of various formats can be displayed in | |
56 | the text. | |
57 | ||
58 | ** Emacs has a new face implementation. | |
59 | ||
60 | The new faces no longer fundamentally use X font names to specify the | |
61 | font. Instead, each face has several independent attributes--family, | |
62 | height, width, weight and slant--that it may or may not specify. | |
63 | These attributes can be merged from various faces, and then together | |
64 | specify a font. | |
65 | ||
66 | Faces are supported on terminals that can display color or fonts. | |
67 | These terminal capabilities are auto-detected. Details can be found | |
68 | under Lisp changes, below. | |
69 | ||
70 | ** Emacs can display faces on TTY frames. | |
71 | ||
72 | Emacs automatically detects terminals that are able to display colors. | |
73 | Faces with a weight greater than normal are displayed extra-bright, if | |
74 | the terminal supports it. Faces with a weight less than normal and | |
75 | italic faces are displayed dimmed, if the terminal supports it. | |
76 | Underlined faces are displayed underlined if possible. Other face | |
77 | attributes such as `overline', `strike-through', and `box' are ignored | |
78 | on terminals. | |
79 | ||
80 | The command-line options `-fg COLOR', `-bg COLOR', and `-rv' are now | |
81 | supported on character terminals. | |
82 | ||
83 | ** New default font is Courier 12pt under X. | |
84 | ||
85 | +++ | |
86 | ** Emacs now resizes mini-windows if appropriate. | |
87 | ||
88 | If a message is longer than one line, or minibuffer contents are | |
89 | longer than one line, Emacs can resize the minibuffer window unless it | |
90 | is on a frame of its own. You can control resizing and the maximum | |
91 | minibuffer window size by setting the following variables: | |
92 | ||
93 | - User option: max-mini-window-height | |
94 | ||
95 | Maximum height for resizing mini-windows. If a float, it specifies a | |
96 | fraction of the mini-window frame's height. If an integer, it | |
97 | specifies a number of lines. | |
98 | ||
99 | Default is 0.25. | |
100 | ||
101 | - User option: resize-mini-windows | |
102 | ||
103 | How to resize mini-windows. If nil, don't resize. If t, always | |
104 | resize to fit the size of the text. If `grow-only', let mini-windows | |
105 | grow only, until they become empty, at which point they are shrunk | |
106 | again. | |
107 | ||
108 | Default is `grow-only'. | |
109 | ||
110 | ** LessTif support. | |
111 | ||
112 | Emacs now runs with the LessTif toolkit (see | |
113 | <http://www.lesstif.org>). You will need version 0.92 or later. | |
114 | ||
115 | ** LessTif/Motif file selection dialog. | |
116 | ||
117 | When Emacs is configured to use LessTif or Motif, reading a file name | |
118 | from a menu will pop up a file selection dialog if `use-dialog-box' is | |
119 | non-nil. | |
120 | ||
121 | ** Toolkit scroll bars. | |
122 | ||
123 | Emacs now uses toolkit scroll bars if available. When configured for | |
124 | LessTif/Motif, it will use that toolkit's scroll bar. Otherwise, when | |
125 | configured for Lucid and Athena widgets, it will use the Xaw3d scroll | |
126 | bar if Xaw3d is available. You can turn off the use of toolkit scroll | |
127 | bars by specifying `--with-toolkit-scroll-bars=no' when configuring | |
128 | Emacs. | |
129 | ||
130 | When you encounter problems with the Xaw3d scroll bar, watch out how | |
131 | Xaw3d is compiled on your system. If the Makefile generated from | |
132 | Xaw3d's Imakefile contains a `-DNARROWPROTO' compiler option, and your | |
133 | Emacs system configuration file `s/your-system.h' does not contain a | |
134 | define for NARROWPROTO, you might consider adding it. Take | |
135 | `s/freebsd.h' as an example. | |
136 | ||
137 | Alternatively, if you don't have access to the Xaw3d source code, take | |
138 | a look at your system's imake configuration file, for example in the | |
139 | directory `/usr/X11R6/lib/X11/config' (paths are different on | |
140 | different systems). You will find files `*.cf' there. If your | |
141 | system's cf-file contains a line like `#define NeedWidePrototypes NO', | |
142 | add a `#define NARROWPROTO' to your Emacs system configuration file. | |
143 | ||
144 | The reason for this is that one Xaw3d function uses `double' or | |
145 | `float' function parameters depending on the setting of NARROWPROTO. | |
146 | This is not a problem when Imakefiles are used because each system's | |
147 | image configuration file contains the necessary information. Since | |
148 | Emacs doesn't use imake, this has do be done manually. | |
149 | ||
150 | +++ | |
151 | ** Automatic Hscrolling | |
152 | ||
153 | Horizontal scrolling now happens automatically if | |
154 | `automatic-hscrolling' is set (the default). This setting can be | |
155 | customized. | |
156 | ||
157 | If a window is scrolled horizontally with set-window-hscroll, or | |
158 | scroll-left/scroll-right (C-x <, C-x >), this serves as a lower bound | |
159 | for automatic horizontal scrolling. Automatic scrolling will scroll | |
160 | the text more to the left if necessary, but won't scroll the text more | |
161 | to the right than the column set with set-window-hscroll etc. | |
162 | ||
163 | +++ | |
164 | ** Tool bar support. | |
165 | ||
166 | Emacs supports a tool bar at the top of a frame under X. For details | |
167 | of how to define a tool bar, see the page describing Lisp-level | |
168 | changes. Tool-bar global minor mode controls whether or not it is | |
169 | displayed and is on by default. The appearance of the bar is improved | |
170 | if Emacs has been built with XPM image support. Otherwise monochrome | |
171 | icons will be used. | |
172 | ||
173 | To make the tool bar more useful, we need contributions of extra icons | |
174 | for specific modes (with copyright assignments). Contributions would | |
2018166d | 175 | also be useful to touch up some of the PBM icons manually. |
1e7db2e9 GM |
176 | |
177 | +++ | |
178 | ** Tooltips. | |
179 | ||
180 | Tooltips are small X windows displaying a help string at the current | |
181 | mouse position. The Lisp package `tooltip' implements them. You can | |
182 | turn them off via the user option `tooltip-mode'. | |
183 | ||
184 | Tooltips also provides support for GUD debugging. If activated, | |
185 | variable values can be displayed in tooltips by pointing at them with | |
186 | the mouse in source buffers. You can customize various aspects of the | |
187 | tooltip display in the group `tooltip'. | |
188 | ||
189 | +++ | |
190 | ** When using a windowing terminal, each Emacs window now has a cursor | |
191 | of its own. By default, when a window is selected, the cursor is | |
192 | solid; otherwise, it is hollow. The user-option | |
193 | `show-cursor-in-non-selected-windows' controls how to display the | |
194 | cursor in non-selected windows. If nil, no cursor is shown, if | |
2018166d | 195 | non-nil a hollow box cursor is shown. |
1e7db2e9 GM |
196 | |
197 | ** Fringes to the left and right of windows are used to display | |
198 | truncation marks, continuation marks, overlay arrows and alike. The | |
199 | foreground, background, and stipple of these areas can be changed by | |
200 | customizing face `fringe'. | |
201 | ||
202 | ** The mode line under X is now drawn with shadows by default. | |
203 | You can change its appearance by modifying the face `mode-line'. | |
204 | In particular, setting the `:box' attribute to nil turns off the 3D | |
205 | appearance of the mode line. (The 3D appearance makes the mode line | |
206 | occupy more space, and thus might cause the first or the last line of | |
207 | the window to be partially obscured.) | |
208 | ||
209 | The variable `mode-line-inverse-video', which was used in older | |
210 | versions of emacs to make the mode-line stand out, now defaults to nil, | |
211 | and its use is deprecated. | |
212 | ||
213 | +++ | |
214 | ** Mouse-sensitive mode line. | |
215 | ||
6b9572dc EZ |
216 | Different parts of the mode line have been made mouse-sensitive on all |
217 | systems which support the mouse. Moving the mouse to a | |
218 | mouse-sensitive part in the mode line changes the appearance of the | |
219 | mouse pointer to an arrow, and help about available mouse actions is | |
220 | displayed either in the echo area, or in the tooltip window if you | |
221 | have enabled one. | |
1e7db2e9 GM |
222 | |
223 | Currently, the following actions have been defined: | |
224 | ||
225 | - Mouse-1 on the buffer name in the mode line switches between two | |
226 | buffers. | |
227 | ||
228 | - Mouse-2 on the buffer-name switches to the next buffer, and | |
229 | M-mouse-2 switches to the previous buffer in the buffer list. | |
230 | ||
231 | - Mouse-3 on the buffer-name displays a buffer menu. | |
232 | ||
233 | - Mouse-2 on the read-only or modified status in the mode line (`%' or | |
234 | `*') toggles the status. | |
235 | ||
236 | - Mouse-3 on the mode name displays a minor-mode menu. | |
237 | ||
238 | +++ | |
239 | ** Hourglass pointer | |
240 | ||
241 | Emacs can optionally display an hourglass pointer under X. You can | |
242 | turn the display on or off by customizing group `cursor'. | |
243 | ||
244 | +++ | |
245 | ** Blinking cursor | |
246 | ||
247 | M-x blink-cursor-mode toggles a blinking cursor under X and on | |
248 | terminals having terminal capabilities `vi', `vs', and `ve'. Blinking | |
249 | and related parameters like frequency and delay can be customized in | |
250 | the group `cursor'. | |
251 | ||
252 | +++ | |
253 | ** New font-lock support mode `jit-lock-mode'. | |
254 | ||
255 | This support mode is roughly equivalent to `lazy-lock' but is | |
256 | generally faster. It supports stealth and deferred fontification. | |
257 | See the documentation of the function `jit-lock-mode' for more | |
258 | details. | |
259 | ||
260 | Font-lock uses jit-lock-mode as default support mode, so you don't | |
261 | have to do anything to activate it. | |
262 | ||
263 | +++ | |
264 | ** The default for user-option `next-line-add-newlines' has been | |
265 | changed to nil, i.e. C-n will no longer add newlines at the end of a | |
266 | buffer by default. | |
267 | ||
268 | ** The <home> and <end> keys now move to the beginning or end of the | |
269 | current line, respectively. C-<home> and C-<end> move to the | |
270 | beginning and end of the buffer. | |
271 | ||
272 | ** Emacs now checks for recursive loads of Lisp files. If the | |
273 | recursion depth exceeds `recursive-load-depth-limit', an error is | |
274 | signaled. | |
275 | ||
276 | ** When an error is signaled during the loading of the user's init | |
277 | file, Emacs now pops up the *Messages* buffer. | |
278 | ||
279 | +++ | |
280 | ** Emacs now refuses to load compiled Lisp files which weren't | |
281 | compiled with Emacs. Set `load-dangerous-libraries' to t to change | |
282 | this behavior. | |
283 | ||
284 | The reason for this change is an incompatible change in XEmacs' byte | |
285 | compiler. Files compiled with XEmacs can contain byte codes that let | |
286 | Emacs dump core. | |
287 | ||
288 | ** Toggle buttons and radio buttons in menus. | |
289 | ||
290 | When compiled with LessTif (or Motif) support, Emacs uses toolkit | |
291 | widgets for radio and toggle buttons in menus. When configured for | |
292 | Lucid, Emacs draws radio buttons and toggle buttons similar to Motif. | |
293 | ||
294 | ** The menu bar configuration has changed. The new configuration is | |
295 | more CUA-compliant. The most significant change is that Options is | |
296 | now a separate menu-bar item, with Mule and Customize as its submenus. | |
297 | ||
298 | ** Item Save Options on the Options menu allows saving options set | |
299 | using that menu. | |
300 | ||
301 | +++ | |
302 | ** Highlighting of trailing whitespace. | |
303 | ||
304 | When `show-trailing-whitespace' is non-nil, Emacs displays trailing | |
305 | whitespace in the face `trailing-whitespace'. Trailing whitespace is | |
306 | defined as spaces or tabs at the end of a line. To avoid busy | |
307 | highlighting when entering new text, trailing whitespace is not | |
308 | displayed if point is at the end of the line containing the | |
309 | whitespace. | |
310 | ||
311 | +++ | |
312 | ** C-x 5 1 runs the new command delete-other-frames which deletes | |
313 | all frames except the selected one. | |
314 | ||
315 | ** The new user-option `confirm-kill-emacs' can be customized to | |
316 | let Emacs ask for confirmation before exiting. | |
317 | ||
318 | +++ | |
319 | ** Highlighting of mouse-sensitive regions is now supported in the | |
320 | MS-DOS version of Emacs. | |
321 | ||
322 | ** The header line in an Info buffer is now displayed as an emacs | |
323 | header-line (which is like a mode-line, but at the top of the window), | |
324 | so that it remains visible even when the buffer has been scrolled. | |
325 | This behavior may be disabled by customizing the option | |
326 | `Info-use-header-line'. | |
327 | ||
328 | +++ | |
329 | ** The recommended way of using Iswitchb is via the new global minor | |
330 | mode `iswitchb-mode'. | |
331 | ||
332 | +++ | |
333 | ** Just loading the msb package doesn't switch on Msb mode anymore. | |
334 | If you have `(require 'msb)' in your .emacs, please replace it with | |
335 | `(msb-mode 1)'. | |
336 | ||
337 | ** Polish, Czech, German, and French translations of Emacs' reference card | |
338 | have been added. They are named `pl-refcard.tex', `cs-refcard.tex', | |
339 | `de-refcard.tex' and `fr-refcard.tex'. Postscript files are included. | |
340 | ||
341 | ** An `Emacs Survival Guide', etc/survival.tex, is available. | |
342 | ||
343 | ** A reference card for Dired has been added. Its name is | |
344 | `dired-ref.tex'. A French translation is available in | |
345 | `fr-drdref.tex'. | |
346 | ||
347 | +++ | |
348 | ** C-down-mouse-3 is bound differently. Now if the menu bar is not | |
349 | displayed it pops up a menu containing the items which would be on the | |
350 | menu bar. If the menu bar is displayed, it pops up the major mode | |
351 | menu or the Edit menu if there is no major mode menu. | |
352 | ||
353 | ** Variable `load-path' is no longer customizable because it contains | |
354 | a version-dependent component. | |
355 | ||
356 | ** The new user-option `delete-key-deletes-forward' can be set to | |
357 | let the Delete function key delete forward instead of backward. | |
358 | ||
359 | On window systems, the default value of this option is chosen | |
360 | according to the keyboard used. If the keyboard has both a Backspace | |
361 | key and a Delete key, and both are mapped to their usual meanings, the | |
362 | option's default value is set to t, so that Backspace can be used to | |
363 | delete backward, and Delete can be used to delete forward. | |
364 | ||
365 | If not running under a window system, setting this option accomplishes | |
366 | a similar effect by mapping C-h, which is usually generated by the | |
367 | Backspace key, to DEL, and by mapping DEL to C-d via | |
368 | `keyboard-translate'. The former functionality of C-h is available on | |
369 | the F1 key. You should probably not use this setting if you don't | |
370 | have both Backspace, Delete and F1 keys. | |
371 | ||
372 | Programmatically, you can call function | |
373 | delete-key-deletes-forward-mode to toggle the behavior of the Delete | |
374 | key. | |
375 | ||
376 | +++ | |
377 | ** C-u C-x = provides detailed information about the character at | |
378 | point in a pop-up window. | |
379 | ||
380 | +++ | |
381 | ** Emacs can now support 'wheeled' mice (such as the MS IntelliMouse) | |
382 | under XFree86. To enable this, use the `mouse-wheel-mode' command, or | |
383 | customize the variable `mouse-wheel-mode'. | |
384 | ||
385 | The variables `mouse-wheel-follow-mouse' and `mouse-wheel-scroll-amount' | |
386 | determine where and by how much buffers are scrolled. | |
387 | ||
388 | +++ | |
389 | ** Emacs' auto-save list files are now by default stored in a | |
390 | sub-directory `.emacs.d/auto-save-list/' of the user's home directory. | |
391 | (On MS-DOS, this subdirectory's name is `_emacs.d/auto-save.list/'.) | |
392 | You can customize `auto-save-list-prefix' to change this location. | |
393 | ||
394 | +++ | |
395 | ** The function `getenv' is now callable interactively. | |
396 | ||
397 | ** The many obsolete language `setup-...-environment' commands have | |
398 | been removed -- use `set-language-environment'. | |
399 | ||
1ff243e2 EZ |
400 | +++ |
401 | ** The environment variable `EMACSLOCKDIR' is no longer used on MS-Windows. | |
402 | This environment variable was used when creating lock files. Emacs on | |
403 | MS-Windows does not use this variable anymore. This change was made | |
404 | before Emacs 21.1, but wasn't documented until now. | |
405 | ||
fba448c1 DL |
406 | ** Flyspell mode has various new options. See the `flyspell' Custom |
407 | group. | |
408 | ||
75d80cc6 | 409 | ** The user option `backward-delete-char-untabify-method' controls the |
a431bf24 GM |
410 | behavior of `backward-delete-char-untabify'. The following values |
411 | are recognized: | |
412 | ||
413 | `untabify' -- turn a tab to many spaces, then delete one space; | |
414 | `hungry' -- delete all whitespace, both tabs and spaces; | |
415 | `all' -- delete all whitespace, including tabs, spaces and newlines; | |
416 | nil -- just delete one character. | |
417 | ||
b863a173 GM |
418 | Default value is `untabify'. |
419 | ||
a431bf24 | 420 | [This change was made in Emacs 20.3 but not mentioned then.] |
75d80cc6 | 421 | |
8416e94a DL |
422 | ** In Cperl mode `cperl-invalid-face' should now be a normal face |
423 | symbol, not double-quoted. | |
424 | ||
2a64f8c2 | 425 | ** Some packages are declared obsolete, to be removed in a future |
8416e94a DL |
426 | version. They are: auto-show, c-mode, hilit19, hscroll, ooutline, |
427 | rnews, rnewspost. Their implementations have been moved to | |
428 | lisp/obsolete. | |
2a64f8c2 | 429 | |
22adbe54 DL |
430 | +++ |
431 | ** The new Custom option `keyboard-coding-system' specifies a coding | |
432 | system for keyboard input. | |
433 | ||
eb1b0c74 GM |
434 | +++ |
435 | ** The new user-option `even-window-heights' can be set to nil | |
436 | to prevent `display-buffer' from evening out window heights. | |
437 | ||
7495f7ca EZ |
438 | +++ |
439 | ** The new command `msdos-set-mouse-buttons' forces Emacs to behave | |
440 | as if the mouse had a specified number of buttons. This comes handy | |
441 | with mice that don't report their number of buttons correctly. One | |
442 | example is the wheeled mice, which report 3 buttons, but clicks on the | |
443 | middle button are not passed to the MS-DOS version of Emacs. | |
444 | ||
c607d53d | 445 | ** The new command M-x delete-trailing-whitespace RET will delete the |
346598f1 | 446 | trailing whitespace within the current restriction. You can also add |
c607d53d SS |
447 | this function to `write-file-hooks' or `local-write-file-hooks'. |
448 | ||
4104194e | 449 | ** When visiting a file with M-x find-file-literally, no newlines will |
1e36ff68 DL |
450 | be added to the end of the buffer even if `require-final-newline' is |
451 | non-nil. | |
4104194e | 452 | |
c6f01e00 MB |
453 | ** auto-compression mode is no longer enabled just by loading jka-compr.el. |
454 | To control it, set `auto-compression-mode' via Custom or use the | |
455 | `auto-compression-mode' command. | |
456 | ||
4c724b32 DL |
457 | ** `browse-url-gnome-moz' is a new option for |
458 | `browse-url-browser-function', invoking Mozilla in GNOME. | |
459 | ||
b856f39c | 460 | +++ |
068127d6 GM |
461 | ** The functions `keep-lines', `flush-lines' and `how-many' now |
462 | operate on the active region in Transient Mark mode. | |
463 | ||
8ac08dea | 464 | +++ |
62c273d7 DL |
465 | ** `gnus-user-agent' is a new possibility for `mail-user-agent'. It |
466 | is like `message-user-agent', but with all the Gnus paraphernalia. | |
467 | ||
8ac08dea | 468 | +++ |
f393cf90 DL |
469 | ** Gnus changes. |
470 | ||
471 | The Gnus NEWS entries are short, but they reflect sweeping changes in | |
472 | four areas: Article display treatment, MIME treatment, | |
473 | internationalization and mail-fetching. | |
474 | ||
475 | *** The mail-fetching functions have changed. See the manual for the | |
476 | many details. In particular, all procmail fetching variables are gone. | |
477 | ||
478 | If you used procmail like in | |
479 | ||
480 | (setq nnmail-use-procmail t) | |
481 | (setq nnmail-spool-file 'procmail) | |
482 | (setq nnmail-procmail-directory "~/mail/incoming/") | |
483 | (setq nnmail-procmail-suffix "\\.in") | |
484 | ||
327652be | 485 | this now has changed to |
f393cf90 DL |
486 | |
487 | (setq mail-sources | |
488 | '((directory :path "~/mail/incoming/" | |
489 | :suffix ".in"))) | |
490 | ||
491 | More information is available in the info doc at Select Methods -> | |
492 | Getting Mail -> Mail Sources | |
493 | ||
494 | *** Gnus is now a MIME-capable reader. This affects many parts of | |
495 | Gnus, and adds a slew of new commands. See the manual for details. | |
31446945 KH |
496 | Separate MIME packages like RMIME, mime-compose etc., will probably no |
497 | longer work; remove them and use the native facilities. | |
498 | ||
657706fa DL |
499 | The FLIM/SEMI package still works with Emacs 21, but if you want to |
500 | use the native facilities, you must remove any mailcap.el[c] that was | |
501 | installed by FLIM/SEMI version 1.13 or earlier. | |
f393cf90 | 502 | |
60dd7e0e | 503 | *** Gnus has also been multilingualized. This also affects too many |
4301cf66 DL |
504 | parts of Gnus to summarize here, and adds many new variables. There |
505 | are built-in facilities equivalent to those of gnus-mule.el, which is | |
506 | now just a compatibility layer. | |
f393cf90 DL |
507 | |
508 | *** gnus-auto-select-first can now be a function to be | |
509 | called to position point. | |
510 | ||
511 | *** The user can now decide which extra headers should be included in | |
512 | summary buffers and NOV files. | |
513 | ||
514 | *** `gnus-article-display-hook' has been removed. Instead, a number | |
515 | of variables starting with `gnus-treat-' have been added. | |
516 | ||
517 | *** The Gnus posting styles have been redone again and now work in a | |
518 | subtly different manner. | |
519 | ||
520 | *** New web-based backends have been added: nnslashdot, nnwarchive | |
521 | and nnultimate. nnweb has been revamped, again, to keep up with | |
522 | ever-changing layouts. | |
523 | ||
524 | *** Gnus can now read IMAP mail via nnimap. | |
525 | ||
72190b84 | 526 | *** There is image support of various kinds and some sound support. |
f393cf90 | 527 | |
889be0a1 | 528 | +++ |
f393cf90 | 529 | ** When your terminal can't display characters from some of the ISO |
d1e68bce DL |
530 | 8859 character sets but can display Latin-1, you can display |
531 | more-or-less mnemonic sequences of ASCII/Latin-1 characters instead of | |
532 | empty boxes (under a window system) or question marks (not under a | |
533 | window system). Customize the option `latin1-display' to turn this | |
534 | on. | |
535 | ||
ba9eeda1 GM |
536 | ** The new user-option `find-file-suppress-same-file-warnings' can be |
537 | set to suppress warnings ``X and Y are the same file'' when visiting a | |
538 | file that is already visited under a different name. | |
539 | ||
42ac0ae5 GM |
540 | ** The new user-option `electric-help-shrink-window' can be set to |
541 | nil to prevent adjusting the help window size to the buffer size. | |
542 | ||
ba9eeda1 | 543 | ** The Strokes package has been updated. If your Emacs has XPM |
dab96841 DL |
544 | support, you can use it for pictographic editing. In Strokes mode, |
545 | use C-mouse-2 to compose a complex stoke and insert it into the | |
546 | buffer. You can encode or decode a strokes buffer with new commands | |
547 | M-x strokes-encode-buffer and M-x strokes-decode-buffer. There is a | |
548 | new command M-x strokes-list-strokes. | |
549 | ||
b941a14b | 550 | +++ |
ba9eeda1 | 551 | ** New command M-x describe-character-set reads a character set name |
eb27839a | 552 | and displays information about that. |
b941a14b | 553 | |
25ad1371 GM |
554 | ** The new variable `auto-mode-interpreter-regexp' contains a regular |
555 | expression matching interpreters, for file mode determination. | |
556 | ||
557 | This regular expression is matched against the first line of a file to | |
558 | determine the file's mode in `set-auto-mode' when Emacs can't deduce a | |
559 | mode from the file's name. If it matches, the file is assumed to be | |
560 | interpreted by the interpreter matched by the second group of the | |
561 | regular expression. The mode is then determined as the mode | |
562 | associated with that interpreter in `interpreter-mode-alist'. | |
563 | ||
40e857ea | 564 | ** New function executable-make-buffer-file-executable-if-script-p is |
424d8b44 | 565 | suitable as an after-save-hook as an alternative to `executable-chmod'. |
40e857ea | 566 | |
beb2eb00 | 567 | +++ |
c08398de DL |
568 | ** The most preferred coding-system is now used to save a buffer if |
569 | buffer-file-coding-system is `undecided' and it is safe for the buffer | |
570 | contents. (The most preferred is set by set-language-environment or | |
571 | by M-x prefer-coding-system.) Thus if you visit an ASCII file and | |
572 | insert a non-ASCII character from your current language environment, | |
573 | the file will be saved silently with the appropriate coding. | |
574 | Previously you would be prompted for a safe coding system. | |
575 | ||
db7a3ede | 576 | +++ |
3d6cd763 GM |
577 | ** New variable `inhibit-iso-escape-detection' determines if Emacs' |
578 | coding system detection algorithm should pay attention to ISO2022's | |
579 | escape sequences. If this variable is non-nil, the algorithm ignores | |
580 | such escape sequences. The default value is nil, and it is | |
581 | recommended not to change it except for the special case that you | |
07b14857 | 582 | always want to read any escape code verbatim. If you just want to |
3d6cd763 | 583 | read a specific file without decoding escape codes, use C-x RET c |
07b14857 KH |
584 | (`universal-coding-system-argument'). For instance, C-x RET c latin-1 |
585 | RET C-x C-f filename RET. | |
26ae8525 | 586 | |
0b8a3a6d DL |
587 | ** Variable `default-korean-keyboard' is initialized properly from the |
588 | environment variable `HANGUL_KEYBOARD_TYPE'. | |
589 | ||
6d35b49f | 590 | +++ |
0b8a3a6d DL |
591 | ** New command M-x list-charset-chars reads a character set name and |
592 | displays all characters in that character set. | |
593 | ||
594 | ** M-x set-terminal-coding-system (C-x RET t) now allows CCL-based | |
595 | coding systems such as cpXXX and cyrillic-koi8. | |
596 | ||
a4067978 | 597 | +++ |
5cb6a58e | 598 | ** M-; now calls comment-dwim which tries to do something clever based |
a4067978 | 599 | on the context. M-x kill-comment is now an alias to comment-kill, |
a5e350c9 SM |
600 | defined in newcomment.el. You can choose different styles of region |
601 | commenting with the variable `comment-style'. | |
5cb6a58e | 602 | |
424d8b44 | 603 | +++ |
5898e075 DL |
604 | ** New user options `display-time-mail-face' and |
605 | `display-time-use-mail-icon' control the appearance of mode-line mail | |
606 | indicator used by the display-time package. On a suitable display the | |
607 | indicator can be an icon and is mouse-sensitive. | |
608 | ||
424d8b44 | 609 | +++ |
cc181e95 GM |
610 | ** On window-systems, additional space can be put between text lines |
611 | on the display using several methods | |
612 | ||
424d8b44 | 613 | +++ |
cc181e95 GM |
614 | - By setting frame parameter `line-spacing' to PIXELS. PIXELS must be |
615 | a positive integer, and specifies that PIXELS number of pixels should | |
616 | be put below text lines on the affected frame or frames. | |
617 | ||
424d8b44 | 618 | +++ |
cc181e95 | 619 | - By setting X resource `lineSpacing', class `LineSpacing'. This is |
5820dead | 620 | equivalent to specifying the frame parameter. |
cc181e95 | 621 | |
da4496b6 | 622 | - By specifying `--line-spacing=N' or `-lsp N' on the command line. |
cc181e95 GM |
623 | |
624 | - By setting buffer-local variable `line-spacing'. The meaning is | |
625 | the same, but applies to the a particular buffer only. | |
626 | ||
424d8b44 | 627 | +++ |
3b4fa1b2 | 628 | ** The new command `clone-indirect-buffer' can be used to create |
1c459486 | 629 | an indirect buffer that is a twin copy of the current buffer. The |
3b4fa1b2 | 630 | command `clone-indirect-buffer-other-window', bound to C-x 4 c, |
1c459486 | 631 | does the same but displays the indirect buffer in another window. |
0daee095 | 632 | |
424d8b44 | 633 | +++ |
176256a1 | 634 | ** New user options `backup-directory-alist' and |
3bbc50af DL |
635 | `make-backup-file-name-function' control the placement of backups, |
636 | typically in a single directory or in an invisible sub-directory. | |
176256a1 | 637 | |
dd0add8e DL |
638 | ** New commands iso-iso2sgml and iso-sgml2iso convert between Latin-1 |
639 | characters and the corresponding SGML (HTML) entities. | |
640 | ||
424d8b44 | 641 | +++ |
699238d9 | 642 | ** New X resources recognized |
100b3cbb | 643 | |
7233c5bd GM |
644 | *** The X resource `synchronous', class `Synchronous', specifies |
645 | whether Emacs should run in synchronous mode. Synchronous mode | |
646 | is useful for debugging X problems. | |
647 | ||
648 | Example: | |
649 | ||
699238d9 | 650 | emacs.synchronous: true |
7233c5bd | 651 | |
100b3cbb GM |
652 | *** The X resource `visualClass, class `VisualClass', specifies the |
653 | visual Emacs should use. The resource's value should be a string of | |
654 | the form `CLASS-DEPTH', where CLASS is the name of the visual class, | |
655 | and DEPTH is the requested color depth as a decimal number. Valid | |
656 | visual class names are | |
657 | ||
658 | TrueColor | |
659 | PseudoColor | |
660 | DirectColor | |
661 | StaticColor | |
662 | GrayScale | |
663 | StaticGray | |
664 | ||
665 | Visual class names specified as X resource are case-insensitive, i.e. | |
666 | `pseudocolor', `Pseudocolor' and `PseudoColor' all have the same | |
667 | meaning. | |
668 | ||
669 | The program `xdpyinfo' can be used to list the visual classes | |
670 | supported on your display, and which depths they have. If | |
671 | `visualClass' is not specified, Emacs uses the display's default | |
672 | visual. | |
673 | ||
674 | Example: | |
675 | ||
699238d9 | 676 | emacs.visualClass: TrueColor-8 |
100b3cbb GM |
677 | |
678 | *** The X resource `privateColormap', class `PrivateColormap', | |
679 | specifies that Emacs should use a private colormap if it is using the | |
680 | default visual, and that visual is of class PseudoColor. Recognized | |
681 | resource values are `true' or `on'. | |
682 | ||
683 | Example: | |
684 | ||
699238d9 | 685 | emacs.privateColormap: true |
100b3cbb | 686 | |
424d8b44 | 687 | +++ |
31047e0d DL |
688 | ** The variable `echo-keystrokes' may now have a floating point value. |
689 | ||
3261c1d8 DL |
690 | ** If your init file is compiled (.emacs.elc), `user-init-file' is set |
691 | to the source name (.emacs.el), if that exists, after loading it. | |
692 | ||
ffe36136 | 693 | ** The help string specified for a menu-item whose definition contains |
aa78a4f3 EZ |
694 | the property `:help HELP' is now displayed under X, on MS-Windows, and |
695 | MS-DOS, either in the echo area or with tooltips. Many standard menus | |
696 | displayed by Emacs now have help strings. | |
697 | ||
559cee90 DL |
698 | ** New user option `read-mail-command' specifies a command to use to |
699 | read mail from the menu etc. | |
700 | ||
480b5773 | 701 | +++ |
271b4185 GM |
702 | ** Hexl contains a new command `hexl-insert-hex-string' which inserts |
703 | a string of hexadecimal numbers read from the mini-buffer. | |
704 | ||
0daee095 GM |
705 | ** Changes in Texinfo mode. |
706 | ||
a5e350c9 | 707 | *** A couple of new key bindings have been added for inserting Texinfo |
0daee095 GM |
708 | macros |
709 | ||
710 | Key binding Macro | |
711 | ------------------------- | |
712 | C-c C-c C-s @strong | |
713 | C-c C-c C-e @emph | |
105602b1 | 714 | C-c C-c u @uref |
0daee095 | 715 | C-c C-c q @quotation |
105602b1 | 716 | C-c C-c m @email |
a5e350c9 SM |
717 | C-c C-o @<block> ... @end <block> |
718 | M-RET @item | |
719 | ||
720 | *** The " key now inserts either " or `` or '' depending on context. | |
0daee095 | 721 | |
559cee90 DL |
722 | ** Changes in Outline mode. |
723 | ||
724 | There is now support for Imenu to index headings. A new command | |
725 | `outline-headers-as-kill' copies the visible headings in the region to | |
726 | the kill ring, e.g. to produce a table of contents. | |
727 | ||
327652be | 728 | ** Changes to Emacs Server |
7a912f63 | 729 | |
c0a8c108 EZ |
730 | +++ |
731 | *** The new option `server-kill-new-buffers' specifies what to do | |
7a912f63 GM |
732 | with buffers when done with them. If non-nil, the default, buffers |
733 | are killed, unless they were already present before visiting them with | |
734 | Emacs Server. If nil, `server-temp-file-regexp' specifies which | |
735 | buffers to kill, as before. | |
736 | ||
737 | Please note that only buffers are killed that still have a client, | |
c0a8c108 | 738 | i.e. buffers visited with `emacsclient --no-wait' are never killed in |
7a912f63 GM |
739 | this way. |
740 | ||
956777b3 GM |
741 | ** Changes to Show Paren mode. |
742 | ||
743 | *** Overlays used by Show Paren mode now use a priority property. | |
744 | The new user option show-paren-priority specifies the priority to | |
745 | use. Default is 1000. | |
746 | ||
f6989277 | 747 | +++ |
404fa7d6 DL |
748 | ** New command M-x check-parens can be used to find unbalanced paren |
749 | groups and strings in buffers in Lisp mode (or other modes). | |
750 | ||
424d8b44 DL |
751 | +++ |
752 | ** You can now easily create new *Info* buffers using either | |
753 | M-x clone-buffer, C-u m <entry> RET or C-u g <entry> RET. | |
754 | M-x clone-buffer can also be used on *Help* and several other special | |
755 | buffers. | |
8964fec7 | 756 | |
d35fce81 GM |
757 | ** Listing buffers with M-x list-buffers (C-x C-b) now shows |
758 | abbreviated file names. Abbreviations can be customized by changing | |
759 | `directory-abbrev-alist'. | |
760 | ||
a933dad1 DL |
761 | ** Faces and frame parameters. |
762 | ||
763 | There are four new faces `scroll-bar', `border', `cursor' and `mouse'. | |
764 | Setting the frame parameters `scroll-bar-foreground' and | |
765 | `scroll-bar-background' sets foreground and background color of face | |
766 | `scroll-bar' and vice versa. Setting frame parameter `border-color' | |
767 | sets the background color of face `border' and vice versa. Likewise | |
768 | for frame parameters `cursor-color' and face `cursor', and frame | |
769 | parameter `mouse-color' and face `mouse'. | |
770 | ||
771 | Changing frame parameter `font' sets font-related attributes of the | |
772 | `default' face and vice versa. Setting frame parameters | |
79214ddf | 773 | `foreground-color' or `background-color' sets the colors of the |
a933dad1 DL |
774 | `default' face and vice versa. |
775 | ||
d80061fa | 776 | +++ |
f77a4a8a GM |
777 | ** New face `menu'. |
778 | ||
779 | The face `menu' can be used to change colors and font of Emacs' menus. | |
780 | Setting the font of LessTif/Motif menus is currently not supported; | |
781 | attempts to set the font are ignored in this case. | |
782 | ||
424d8b44 | 783 | +++ |
a933dad1 DL |
784 | ** New frame parameter `screen-gamma' for gamma correction. |
785 | ||
786 | The new frame parameter `screen-gamma' specifies gamma-correction for | |
787 | colors. Its value may be nil, the default, in which case no gamma | |
788 | correction occurs, or a number > 0, usually a float, that specifies | |
789 | the screen gamma of a frame's display. | |
790 | ||
791 | PC monitors usually have a screen gamma of 2.2. smaller values result | |
792 | in darker colors. You might want to try a screen gamma of 1.5 for LCD | |
793 | color displays. The viewing gamma Emacs uses is 0.4545. (1/2.2). | |
794 | ||
795 | The X resource name of this parameter is `screenGamma', class | |
796 | `ScreenGamma'. | |
797 | ||
a933dad1 DL |
798 | ** Tabs and variable-width text. |
799 | ||
800 | Tabs are now displayed with stretch properties; the width of a tab is | |
801 | defined as a multiple of the normal character width of a frame, and is | |
802 | independent of the fonts used in the text where the tab appears. | |
803 | Thus, tabs can be used to line up text in different fonts. | |
804 | ||
805 | ** Enhancements of the Lucid menu bar | |
806 | ||
424d8b44 | 807 | +++ |
a933dad1 DL |
808 | *** The Lucid menu bar now supports the resource "margin". |
809 | ||
810 | emacs.pane.menubar.margin: 5 | |
811 | ||
79dd1637 RS |
812 | The default margin is 4 which makes the menu bar appear like the |
813 | LessTif/Motif one. | |
a933dad1 | 814 | |
79dd1637 RS |
815 | *** Arrows that indicate sub-menus are now drawn with shadows, as in |
816 | LessTif and Motif. | |
a933dad1 | 817 | |
a933dad1 DL |
818 | ** Sound support |
819 | ||
2f516940 | 820 | Emacs supports playing sound files on GNU/Linux and FreeBSD (Voxware |
0b50c67f | 821 | driver and native BSD driver, a.k.a. Luigi's driver). Currently |
2f516940 | 822 | supported file formats are RIFF-WAVE (*.wav) and Sun Audio (*.au). |
a933dad1 | 823 | |
424d8b44 | 824 | +++ |
a933dad1 DL |
825 | ** A new variable, backup-by-copying-when-privileged-mismatch, gives |
826 | the highest file uid for which backup-by-copying-when-mismatch will be | |
827 | forced on. The assumption is that uids less than or equal to this | |
828 | value are special uids (root, bin, daemon, etc.--not real system | |
829 | users) and that files owned by these users should not change ownership, | |
830 | even if your system policy allows users other than root to edit them. | |
831 | ||
832 | The default is 200; set the variable to nil to disable the feature. | |
833 | ||
0e18b431 | 834 | +++ |
a933dad1 DL |
835 | ** A block cursor can be drawn as wide as the glyph under it under X. |
836 | ||
837 | As an example: if a block cursor is over a tab character, it will be | |
838 | drawn as wide as that tab on the display. To do this, set | |
839 | `x-stretch-cursor' to a non-nil value. | |
840 | ||
fdd8bb68 | 841 | +++ |
a933dad1 DL |
842 | ** Empty display lines at the end of a buffer may be marked with a |
843 | bitmap (this is similar to the tilde displayed by vi). | |
844 | ||
845 | This behavior is activated by setting the buffer-local variable | |
846 | `indicate-empty-lines' to a non-nil value. The default value of this | |
847 | variable is found in `default-indicate-empty-lines'. | |
848 | ||
c5d00c64 | 849 | +++ |
a933dad1 DL |
850 | ** There is a new "aggressive" scrolling method. |
851 | ||
852 | When scrolling up because point is above the window start, if the | |
d9e66103 | 853 | value of the buffer-local variable `scroll-up-aggressively' is a |
a933dad1 | 854 | number, Emacs chooses a new window start so that point ends up that |
d5951185 | 855 | fraction of the window's height from the top of the window. |
a933dad1 DL |
856 | |
857 | When scrolling down because point is below the window end, if the | |
8a33023e | 858 | value of the buffer-local variable `scroll-down-aggressively' is a |
a933dad1 | 859 | number, Emacs chooses a new window start so that point ends up that |
d5951185 | 860 | fraction of the window's height from the bottom of the window. |
a933dad1 DL |
861 | |
862 | ** The rectangle commands now avoid inserting undesirable spaces, | |
863 | notably at the end of lines. | |
864 | ||
865 | All these functions have been rewritten to avoid inserting unwanted | |
866 | spaces, and an optional prefix now allows them to behave the old way. | |
867 | ||
424d8b44 | 868 | +++ |
eee54b0e DL |
869 | There is a new command M-x replace-rectangle. |
870 | ||
2ce72bfa EZ |
871 | ** `C-x r t' (string-rectangle) no longer deletes the existing |
872 | rectangle contents before inserting the specified string on each line. | |
873 | The `replace-rectangle' command can be used if deletion is required. | |
874 | ||
a933dad1 DL |
875 | ** The new command M-x query-replace-regexp-eval acts like |
876 | query-replace-regexp, but takes a Lisp expression which is evaluated | |
877 | after each match to get the replacement text. | |
878 | ||
00782214 | 879 | +++ |
d5483ab1 GM |
880 | ** M-x query-replace recognizes a new command `e' (or `E') that lets |
881 | you edit the replacement string. | |
4ff40dd0 | 882 | |
424d8b44 | 883 | ** The new command mail-abbrev-complete-alias, bound to `M-TAB', lets |
4ff40dd0 GM |
884 | you complete mail aliases in the text, analogous to |
885 | lisp-complete-symbol. | |
886 | ||
2f72fd2f GM |
887 | ** The command `Info-search' now uses a search history. |
888 | ||
0d43b60d GM |
889 | ** Changes to hideshow.el |
890 | ||
0d43b60d GM |
891 | *** Generalized block selection and traversal |
892 | ||
889be0a1 DL |
893 | A block is now recognized by its start and end regexps (both strings), |
894 | and an integer specifying which sub-expression in the start regexp | |
895 | serves as the place where a `forward-sexp'-like function can operate. | |
896 | See the documentation of variable `hs-special-modes-alist'. | |
897 | ||
898 | *** During incremental search, if Hideshow minor mode is active, | |
899 | hidden blocks are temporarily shown. The variable `hs-headline' can | |
900 | be used in the mode line format to show the line at the beginning of | |
901 | the open block. | |
902 | ||
903 | *** User option `hs-hide-all-non-comment-function' specifies a | |
904 | function to be called at each top-level block beginning, instead of | |
905 | the normal block-hiding function. | |
906 | ||
907 | *** The command `hs-show-region' has been removed. | |
908 | ||
909 | *** The key bindings have changed to fit the Emacs conventions, | |
ed368846 TTN |
910 | roughly imitating those of Outline minor mode. Notably, the prefix |
911 | for all bindings is now `C-c @'. For details, see the documentation | |
912 | for `hs-minor-mode'. | |
327652be | 913 | |
559cee90 DL |
914 | ** Changes to Change Log mode and Add-Log functions |
915 | ||
424d8b44 | 916 | +++ |
1b24b888 GM |
917 | *** If you invoke `add-change-log-entry' from a backup file, it makes |
918 | an entry appropriate for the file's parent. This is useful for making | |
559cee90 DL |
919 | log entries by comparing a version with deleted functions. |
920 | ||
424d8b44 | 921 | +++ |
1b24b888 GM |
922 | **** New command M-x change-log-merge merges another log into the |
923 | current buffer. | |
424d8b44 DL |
924 | |
925 | +++ | |
1b24b888 GM |
926 | *** New command M-x change-log-redate fixes any old-style date entries |
927 | in a log file. | |
eb2aac9d | 928 | |
502004be | 929 | +++ |
1b24b888 GM |
930 | *** Change Log mode now adds a file's version number to change log |
931 | entries if user-option `change-log-version-info-enabled' is non-nil. | |
2018166d | 932 | Unless the file is under version control the search for a file's |
424d8b44 | 933 | version number is performed based on regular expressions from |
8a33023e | 934 | `change-log-version-number-regexp-list' which can be customized. |
424d8b44 | 935 | Version numbers are only found in the first 10 percent of a file. |
eb2aac9d | 936 | |
2c63c979 | 937 | *** Change Log mode now defines its own faces for font-lock highlighting. |
1b24b888 | 938 | |
79c78e77 GM |
939 | ** Changes to cmuscheme |
940 | ||
941 | *** The user-option `scheme-program-name' has been renamed | |
942 | `cmuscheme-program-name' due to conflicts with xscheme.el. | |
943 | ||
3476b54a GM |
944 | ** Changes in Font Lock |
945 | ||
946 | *** The new function `font-lock-remove-keywords' can be used to remove | |
a5e350c9 | 947 | font-lock keywords from the current buffer or from a specific major mode. |
3476b54a | 948 | |
8a33023e | 949 | *** Multi-line patterns are now supported. Modes using this, should |
2be6ecc6 | 950 | set font-lock-multiline to t in their font-lock-defaults. |
2c63c979 | 951 | |
a5e350c9 SM |
952 | *** `font-lock-syntactic-face-function' allows major-modes to choose |
953 | the face used for each string/comment. | |
c607d53d | 954 | |
601e0081 SM |
955 | *** A new standard face `font-lock-doc-face'. |
956 | Meant for Lisp docstrings, Javadoc comments and other "documentation in code". | |
957 | ||
b3b98592 GM |
958 | ** Comint (subshell) changes |
959 | ||
988cded7 MB |
960 | These changes generally affect all modes derived from comint mode, which |
961 | include shell-mode, gdb-mode, scheme-interaction-mode, etc. | |
962 | ||
963 | *** By default, comint no longer uses the variable `comint-prompt-regexp' | |
964 | to distinguish prompts from user-input. Instead, it notices which | |
965 | parts of the text were output by the process, and which entered by the | |
966 | user, and attaches `field' properties to allow emacs commands to use | |
967 | this information. Common movement commands, notably beginning-of-line, | |
968 | respect field boundaries in a fairly natural manner. To disable this | |
969 | feature, and use the old behavior, customize the user option | |
970 | `comint-use-prompt-regexp-instead-of-fields'. | |
971 | ||
972 | *** Comint now includes new features to send commands to running processes | |
b3b98592 GM |
973 | and redirect the output to a designated buffer or buffers. |
974 | ||
988cded7 | 975 | *** The command M-x comint-redirect-send-command reads a command and |
b3b98592 GM |
976 | buffer name from the mini-buffer. The command is sent to the current |
977 | buffer's process, and its output is inserted into the specified buffer. | |
978 | ||
979 | The command M-x comint-redirect-send-command-to-process acts like | |
980 | M-x comint-redirect-send-command but additionally reads the name of | |
981 | the buffer whose process should be used from the mini-buffer. | |
982 | ||
988cded7 MB |
983 | *** Packages based on comint now highlight user input and program prompts, |
984 | and support choosing previous input with mouse-2. To control these features, | |
985 | see the user-options `comint-highlight-input' and `comint-highlight-prompt'. | |
31fc5d15 | 986 | |
988cded7 | 987 | *** The new command `comint-write-output' (usually bound to `C-c C-s') |
d648cc45 MB |
988 | saves the output from the most recent command to a file. With a prefix |
989 | argument, it appends to the file. | |
990 | ||
988cded7 | 991 | *** The command `comint-kill-output' has been renamed `comint-delete-output' |
d648cc45 MB |
992 | (usually bound to `C-c C-o'); the old name is aliased to it for |
993 | compatibility. | |
994 | ||
0e40b809 EL |
995 | *** The new function `comint-add-to-input-history' adds commands to the input |
996 | ring (history). | |
d648cc45 | 997 | |
fe5d5d8c | 998 | *** The new variable `comint-input-history-ignore' is a regexp for |
6dde6abc GM |
999 | identifying history lines that should be ignored, like tcsh time-stamp |
1000 | strings, starting with a `#'. The default value of this variable is "^#". | |
fe5d5d8c | 1001 | |
e26cec67 GM |
1002 | ** Changes to Rmail mode |
1003 | ||
b97cd2cc | 1004 | *** The new user-option rmail-user-mail-address-regexp can be |
f3780fe4 | 1005 | set to fine tune the identification of the correspondent when |
c0510d27 GM |
1006 | receiving new mail. If it matches the address of the sender, the |
1007 | recipient is taken as correspondent of a mail. If nil, the default, | |
1008 | `user-login-name' and `user-mail-address' are used to exclude yourself | |
1009 | as correspondent. | |
1010 | ||
1011 | Usually you don't have to set this variable, except if you collect | |
1012 | mails sent by you under different user names. Then it should be a | |
993d8b7d | 1013 | regexp matching your mail addresses. |
c0510d27 | 1014 | |
3b55acc9 GM |
1015 | *** The new user-option rmail-confirm-expunge controls whether and how |
1016 | to ask for confirmation before expunging deleted messages from an | |
1017 | Rmail file. You can choose between no confirmation, confirmation | |
1018 | with y-or-n-p, or confirmation with yes-or-no-p. Default is to ask | |
1019 | for confirmation with yes-or-no-p. | |
1020 | ||
6a1950ec GM |
1021 | *** RET is now bound in the Rmail summary to rmail-summary-goto-msg, |
1022 | like `j'. | |
1023 | ||
5bb6f079 RS |
1024 | *** There is a new user option `rmail-digest-end-regexps' that |
1025 | specifies the regular expressions to detect the line that ends a | |
2d5e9b54 | 1026 | digest message. |
e26cec67 | 1027 | |
993d8b7d DL |
1028 | *** The new user option `rmail-automatic-folder-directives' specifies |
1029 | in which folder to put messages automatically. | |
1030 | ||
4ddb57b2 EZ |
1031 | *** The new function `rmail-redecode-body' allows to fix a message |
1032 | with non-ASCII characters if Emacs happens to decode it incorrectly | |
1033 | due to missing or malformed "charset=" header. | |
1034 | ||
400a1ed0 GM |
1035 | ** Changes to TeX mode |
1036 | ||
a5e350c9 | 1037 | *** The default mode has been changed from `plain-tex-mode' to |
400a1ed0 GM |
1038 | `latex-mode'. |
1039 | ||
a5e350c9 SM |
1040 | *** latex-mode now has a simple indentation algorithm. |
1041 | ||
1042 | *** M-f and M-p jump around \begin...\end pairs. | |
1043 | ||
1044 | *** Added support for outline-minor-mode. | |
c607d53d | 1045 | |
a933dad1 DL |
1046 | ** Changes to RefTeX mode |
1047 | ||
1048 | *** RefTeX has new support for index generation. Index entries can be | |
1049 | created with `C-c <', with completion available on index keys. | |
1050 | Pressing `C-c /' indexes the word at the cursor with a default | |
1051 | macro. `C-c >' compiles all index entries into an alphabetically | |
1052 | sorted *Index* buffer which looks like the final index. Entries | |
1053 | can be edited from that buffer. | |
1054 | ||
1055 | *** Label and citation key selection now allow to select several | |
1056 | items and reference them together (use `m' to mark items, `a' or | |
1057 | `A' to use all marked entries). | |
1058 | ||
1059 | *** reftex.el has been split into a number of smaller files to reduce | |
1060 | memory use when only a part of RefTeX is being used. | |
1061 | ||
1062 | *** a new command `reftex-view-crossref-from-bibtex' (bound to `C-c &' | |
1063 | in BibTeX-mode) can be called in a BibTeX database buffer in order | |
1064 | to show locations in LaTeX documents where a particular entry has | |
1065 | been cited. | |
1066 | ||
38de9631 GM |
1067 | ** Emacs Lisp mode now allows multiple levels of outline headings. |
1068 | The level of a heading is determined from the number of leading | |
1069 | semicolons in a heading line. Toplevel forms starting with a `(' | |
1070 | in column 1 are always made leaves. | |
1071 | ||
a933dad1 DL |
1072 | ** The M-x time-stamp command (most commonly used on write-file-hooks) |
1073 | has the following new features: | |
1074 | ||
1075 | *** The patterns for finding the time stamp and for updating a pattern | |
1076 | may match text spanning multiple lines. For example, some people like | |
1077 | to have the filename and date on separate lines. The new variable | |
1078 | time-stamp-inserts-lines controls the matching for multi-line patterns. | |
1079 | ||
1080 | *** More than one time stamp can be updated in the same file. This | |
1081 | feature is useful if you need separate time stamps in a program source | |
1082 | file to both include in formatted documentation and insert in the | |
1083 | compiled binary. The same time-stamp will be written at each matching | |
1084 | pattern. The variable time-stamp-count enables this new feature; it | |
1085 | defaults to 1. | |
1086 | ||
5d94f558 | 1087 | ** Partial Completion mode now completes environment variables in |
b675095c GM |
1088 | file names. |
1089 | ||
424d8b44 | 1090 | +++ |
a933dad1 DL |
1091 | ** Customize changes |
1092 | ||
1093 | *** Customize now supports comments about customized items. Use the | |
2018166d DL |
1094 | `State' menu to add comments, or give a prefix argument to |
1095 | M-x customize-set-variable or M-x customize-set-value. Note that | |
1096 | customization comments will cause the customizations to fail in | |
1097 | earlier versions of Emacs. | |
a933dad1 DL |
1098 | |
1099 | *** The new option `custom-buffer-done-function' says whether to kill | |
1100 | Custom buffers when you've done with them or just bury them (the | |
1101 | default). | |
1102 | ||
1103 | ** New features in evaluation commands | |
1104 | ||
5e03eb84 | 1105 | *** The commands to evaluate Lisp expressions, such as C-M-x in Lisp |
a933dad1 DL |
1106 | modes, C-j in Lisp Interaction mode, and M-:, now bind the variables |
1107 | print-level, print-length, and debug-on-error based on the | |
1108 | customizable variables eval-expression-print-level, | |
1109 | eval-expression-print-length, and eval-expression-debug-on-error. | |
1110 | ||
5e03eb84 GM |
1111 | *** The function `eval-defun' (M-C-x) now loads Edebug and instruments |
1112 | code when called with a prefix argument. | |
1113 | ||
ead53494 GM |
1114 | ** Ispell changes |
1115 | ||
37d8a691 | 1116 | +++ |
bbe15990 EZ |
1117 | *** The command `ispell' now spell-checks a region if |
1118 | transient-mark-mode is on, and the mark is active. Otherwise it | |
ead53494 GM |
1119 | spell-checks the current buffer. |
1120 | ||
37d8a691 | 1121 | +++ |
385ff9e3 GM |
1122 | *** Support for synchronous subprocesses - DOS/Windoze - has been |
1123 | added. | |
1124 | ||
1125 | *** An "alignment error" bug was fixed when a manual spelling | |
1126 | correction is made and re-checked. | |
1127 | ||
1e7db2e9 | 1128 | *** An Italian, Portuguese, and Slovak dictionary definition has been added. |
385ff9e3 GM |
1129 | |
1130 | *** Region skipping performance has been vastly improved in some | |
1131 | cases. | |
1132 | ||
1133 | *** Spell checking HTML buffers has been improved and isn't so strict | |
1134 | on syntax errors. | |
1135 | ||
1136 | *** The buffer-local words are now always placed on a new line at the | |
1137 | end of the buffer. | |
1138 | ||
a933dad1 DL |
1139 | ** Dired changes |
1140 | ||
1141 | *** New variable `dired-recursive-deletes' determines if the delete | |
1142 | command will delete non-empty directories recursively. The default | |
1143 | is, delete only empty directories. | |
1144 | ||
1145 | *** New variable `dired-recursive-copies' determines if the copy | |
1146 | command will copy directories recursively. The default is, do not | |
1147 | copy directories recursively. | |
1148 | ||
f6737cde GM |
1149 | *** In command `dired-do-shell-command' (usually bound to `!') a `?' |
1150 | in the shell command has a special meaning similar to `*', but with | |
1151 | the difference that the command will be run on each file individually. | |
1152 | ||
2f72fd2f GM |
1153 | *** The new command `dired-find-alternate-file' (usually bound to `a') |
1154 | replaces the Dired buffer with the buffer for an alternate file or | |
1155 | directory. | |
1156 | ||
7381ae05 MB |
1157 | *** The new command `dired-show-file-type' (usually bound to `w') shows |
1158 | a message in the echo area describing what type of file the point is on. | |
1159 | This command invokes the external program `file' do its work, and so | |
1160 | will only work on systems with that program, and will be only as | |
1161 | accurate or inaccurate as it is. | |
1162 | ||
e024b101 GM |
1163 | *** Dired now properly handles undo changes of adding/removing `-R' |
1164 | from ls switches. | |
1165 | ||
60b392a7 MB |
1166 | *** Dired commands that prompt for a destination file now allow the use |
1167 | of the `M-n' command in the minibuffer to insert the source filename, | |
1168 | which the user can then edit. This only works if there is a single | |
1169 | source file, not when operating on multiple marked files. | |
1170 | ||
a933dad1 DL |
1171 | ** The variable mail-specify-envelope-from controls whether to |
1172 | use the -f option when sending mail. | |
1173 | ||
b1c609b1 GM |
1174 | ** CC mode changes. |
1175 | ||
1176 | Note: This release contains changes that might not be compatible with | |
1177 | current user setups (although it's believed that these | |
1178 | incompatibilities will only show in very uncommon circumstances). | |
1179 | However, since the impact is uncertain, these changes may be rolled | |
1180 | back depending on user feedback. Therefore there's no forward | |
1181 | compatibility guarantee wrt the new features introduced in this | |
1182 | release. | |
1183 | ||
e120bebf GM |
1184 | *** The hardcoded switch to "java" style in Java mode is gone. |
1185 | CC Mode used to automatically set the style to "java" when Java mode | |
1186 | is entered. This has now been removed since it caused too much | |
1187 | confusion. | |
1188 | ||
1189 | However, to keep backward compatibility to a certain extent, the | |
1190 | default value for c-default-style now specifies the "java" style for | |
1191 | java-mode, but "gnu" for all other modes (as before). So you won't | |
1192 | notice the change if you haven't touched that variable. | |
1193 | ||
1194 | *** New cleanups, space-before-funcall and compact-empty-funcall. | |
1195 | Two new cleanups have been added to c-cleanup-list: | |
1196 | ||
1197 | space-before-funcall causes a space to be inserted before the opening | |
1198 | parenthesis of a function call, which gives the style "foo (bar)". | |
1199 | ||
1200 | compact-empty-funcall causes any space before a function call opening | |
1201 | parenthesis to be removed if there are no arguments to the function. | |
1202 | It's typically useful together with space-before-funcall to get the | |
1203 | style "foo (bar)" and "foo()". | |
1204 | ||
1205 | *** Some keywords now automatically trigger reindentation. | |
1206 | Keywords like "else", "while", "catch" and "finally" have been made | |
1207 | "electric" to make them reindent automatically when they continue an | |
1208 | earlier statement. An example: | |
1209 | ||
1210 | for (i = 0; i < 17; i++) | |
1211 | if (a[i]) | |
1212 | res += a[i]->offset; | |
1213 | else | |
1214 | ||
1215 | Here, the "else" should be indented like the preceding "if", since it | |
1216 | continues that statement. CC Mode will automatically reindent it after | |
1217 | the "else" has been typed in full, since it's not until then it's | |
1218 | possible to decide whether it's a new statement or a continuation of | |
1219 | the preceding "if". | |
1220 | ||
1221 | CC Mode uses Abbrev mode to achieve this, which is therefore turned on | |
1222 | by default. | |
1223 | ||
1224 | *** M-a and M-e now moves by sentence in multiline strings. | |
1225 | Previously these two keys only moved by sentence in comments, which | |
1226 | meant that sentence movement didn't work in strings containing | |
1227 | documentation or other natural language text. | |
1228 | ||
1229 | The reason it's only activated in multiline strings (i.e. strings that | |
1230 | contain a newline, even when escaped by a '\') is to avoid stopping in | |
1231 | the short strings that often reside inside statements. Multiline | |
1232 | strings almost always contain text in a natural language, as opposed | |
1233 | to other strings that typically contain format specifications, | |
1234 | commands, etc. Also, it's not that bothersome that M-a and M-e misses | |
1235 | sentences in single line strings, since they're short anyway. | |
1236 | ||
1237 | *** Support for autodoc comments in Pike mode. | |
1238 | Autodoc comments for Pike are used to extract documentation from the | |
1239 | source, like Javadoc in Java. Pike mode now recognize this markup in | |
1240 | comment prefixes and paragraph starts. | |
1241 | ||
1242 | *** The comment prefix regexps on c-comment-prefix may be mode specific. | |
1243 | When c-comment-prefix is an association list, it specifies the comment | |
1244 | line prefix on a per-mode basis, like c-default-style does. This | |
1245 | change came about to support the special autodoc comment prefix in | |
1246 | Pike mode only. | |
1247 | ||
1248 | *** Better handling of syntactic errors. | |
1249 | The recovery after unbalanced parens earlier in the buffer has been | |
1250 | improved; CC Mode now reports them by dinging and giving a message | |
1251 | stating the offending line, but still recovers and indent the | |
1252 | following lines in a sane way (most of the time). An "else" with no | |
1253 | matching "if" is handled similarly. If an error is discovered while | |
1254 | indenting a region, the whole region is still indented and the error | |
1255 | is reported afterwards. | |
1256 | ||
1257 | *** Lineup functions may now return absolute columns. | |
1258 | A lineup function can give an absolute column to indent the line to by | |
1259 | returning a vector with the desired column as the first element. | |
1260 | ||
1261 | *** More robust and warning-free byte compilation. | |
1262 | Although this is strictly not a user visible change (well, depending | |
1263 | on the view of a user), it's still worth mentioning that CC Mode now | |
1264 | can be compiled in the standard ways without causing trouble. Some | |
1265 | code have also been moved between the subpackages to enhance the | |
1266 | modularity somewhat. Thanks to Martin Buchholz for doing the | |
1267 | groundwork. | |
1268 | ||
7972fcfc GM |
1269 | *** c-style-variables-are-local-p now defaults to t. |
1270 | This is an incompatible change that has been made to make the behavior | |
1271 | of the style system wrt global variable settings less confusing for | |
1272 | non-advanced users. If you know what this variable does you might | |
1273 | want to set it to nil in your .emacs, otherwise you probably don't | |
1274 | have to bother. | |
1275 | ||
1276 | Defaulting c-style-variables-are-local-p to t avoids the confusing | |
1277 | situation that occurs when a user sets some style variables globally | |
487522fe | 1278 | and edits both a Java and a non-Java file in the same Emacs session. |
7972fcfc GM |
1279 | If the style variables aren't buffer local in this case, loading of |
1280 | the second file will cause the default style (either "gnu" or "java" | |
1281 | by default) to override the global settings made by the user. | |
1282 | ||
b1c609b1 GM |
1283 | *** New initialization procedure for the style system. |
1284 | When the initial style for a buffer is determined by CC Mode (from the | |
1285 | variable c-default-style), the global values of style variables now | |
1286 | take precedence over the values specified by the chosen style. This | |
1287 | is different than the old behavior: previously, the style-specific | |
1288 | settings would override the global settings. This change makes it | |
1289 | possible to do simple configuration in the intuitive way with | |
1290 | Customize or with setq lines in one's .emacs file. | |
1291 | ||
1292 | By default, the global value of every style variable is the new | |
1293 | special symbol set-from-style, which causes the value to be taken from | |
1294 | the style system. This means that in effect, only an explicit setting | |
1295 | of a style variable will cause the "overriding" behavior described | |
1296 | above. | |
1297 | ||
1298 | Also note that global settings override style-specific settings *only* | |
1299 | when the initial style of a buffer is chosen by a CC Mode major mode | |
1300 | function. When a style is chosen in other ways --- for example, by a | |
1301 | call like (c-set-style "gnu") in a hook, or via M-x c-set-style --- | |
1302 | then the style-specific values take precedence over any global style | |
1303 | values. In Lisp terms, global values override style-specific values | |
1304 | only when the new second argument to c-set-style is non-nil; see the | |
1305 | function documentation for more info. | |
1306 | ||
1307 | The purpose of these changes is to make it easier for users, | |
1308 | especially novice users, to do simple customizations with Customize or | |
1309 | with setq in their .emacs files. On the other hand, the new system is | |
1310 | intended to be compatible with advanced users' customizations as well, | |
1311 | such as those that choose styles in hooks or whatnot. This new system | |
1312 | is believed to be almost entirely compatible with current | |
1313 | configurations, in spite of the changed precedence between style and | |
1314 | global variable settings when a buffer's default style is set. | |
1315 | ||
1316 | (Thanks to Eric Eide for clarifying this explanation a bit.) | |
1317 | ||
1318 | **** c-offsets-alist is now a customizable variable. | |
1319 | This became possible as a result of the new initialization behavior. | |
1320 | ||
1321 | This variable is treated slightly differently from the other style | |
1322 | variables; instead of using the symbol set-from-style, it will be | |
1323 | completed with the syntactic symbols it doesn't already contain when | |
1324 | the style is first initialized. This means it now defaults to the | |
1325 | empty list to make all syntactic elements get their values from the | |
1326 | style system. | |
1327 | ||
1328 | **** Compatibility variable to restore the old behavior. | |
1329 | In case your configuration doesn't work with this change, you can set | |
1330 | c-old-style-variable-behavior to non-nil to get the old behavior back | |
1331 | as far as possible. | |
1332 | ||
1333 | *** Improvements to line breaking and text filling. | |
1334 | CC Mode now handles this more intelligently and seamlessly wrt the | |
1335 | surrounding code, especially inside comments. For details see the new | |
1336 | chapter about this in the manual. | |
1337 | ||
1338 | **** New variable to recognize comment line prefix decorations. | |
1339 | The variable c-comment-prefix-regexp has been added to properly | |
1340 | recognize the line prefix in both block and line comments. It's | |
1341 | primarily used to initialize the various paragraph recognition and | |
1342 | adaptive filling variables that the text handling functions uses. | |
1343 | ||
1344 | **** New variable c-block-comment-prefix. | |
1345 | This is a generalization of the now obsolete variable | |
1346 | c-comment-continuation-stars to handle arbitrary strings. | |
1347 | ||
1348 | **** CC Mode now uses adaptive fill mode. | |
1349 | This to make it adapt better to the paragraph style inside comments. | |
1350 | ||
1351 | It's also possible to use other adaptive filling packages inside CC | |
1352 | Mode, notably Kyle E. Jones' Filladapt mode (http://wonderworks.com/). | |
1353 | A new convenience function c-setup-filladapt sets up Filladapt for use | |
1354 | inside CC Mode. | |
1355 | ||
1356 | Note though that the 2.12 version of Filladapt lacks a feature that | |
1357 | causes it to work suboptimally when c-comment-prefix-regexp can match | |
1358 | the empty string (which it commonly does). A patch for that is | |
1359 | available from the CC Mode web site (http://www.python.org/emacs/ | |
1360 | cc-mode/). | |
1361 | ||
1362 | **** It's now possible to selectively turn off auto filling. | |
1363 | The variable c-ignore-auto-fill is used to ignore auto fill mode in | |
1364 | specific contexts, e.g. in preprocessor directives and in string | |
1365 | literals. | |
1366 | ||
1367 | **** New context sensitive line break function c-context-line-break. | |
1368 | It works like newline-and-indent in normal code, and adapts the line | |
1369 | prefix according to the comment style when used inside comments. If | |
1370 | you're normally using newline-and-indent, you might want to switch to | |
1371 | this function. | |
1372 | ||
1373 | *** Fixes to IDL mode. | |
1374 | It now does a better job in recognizing only the constructs relevant | |
1375 | to IDL. E.g. it no longer matches "class" as the beginning of a | |
1376 | struct block, but it does match the CORBA 2.3 "valuetype" keyword. | |
1377 | Thanks to Eric Eide. | |
1378 | ||
1379 | *** Improvements to the Whitesmith style. | |
1380 | It now keeps the style consistently on all levels and both when | |
1381 | opening braces hangs and when they don't. | |
1382 | ||
1383 | **** New lineup function c-lineup-whitesmith-in-block. | |
1384 | ||
1385 | *** New lineup functions c-lineup-template-args and c-indent-multi-line-block. | |
1386 | See their docstrings for details. c-lineup-template-args does a | |
1387 | better job of tracking the brackets used as parens in C++ templates, | |
1388 | and is used by default to line up continued template arguments. | |
1389 | ||
1390 | *** c-lineup-comment now preserves alignment with a comment on the | |
1391 | previous line. It used to instead preserve comments that started in | |
1392 | the column specified by comment-column. | |
1393 | ||
1394 | *** c-lineup-C-comments handles "free form" text comments. | |
1395 | In comments with a long delimiter line at the start, the indentation | |
1396 | is kept unchanged for lines that start with an empty comment line | |
1397 | prefix. This is intended for the type of large block comments that | |
1398 | contain documentation with its own formatting. In these you normally | |
1399 | don't want CC Mode to change the indentation. | |
1400 | ||
1401 | *** The `c' syntactic symbol is now relative to the comment start | |
1402 | instead of the previous line, to make integers usable as lineup | |
1403 | arguments. | |
1404 | ||
1405 | *** All lineup functions have gotten docstrings. | |
1406 | ||
1407 | *** More preprocessor directive movement functions. | |
1408 | c-down-conditional does the reverse of c-up-conditional. | |
1409 | c-up-conditional-with-else and c-down-conditional-with-else are | |
1410 | variants of these that also stops at "#else" lines (suggested by Don | |
1411 | Provan). | |
1412 | ||
1413 | *** Minor improvements to many movement functions in tricky situations. | |
1414 | ||
c407c570 GM |
1415 | ** Makefile mode changes |
1416 | ||
1417 | *** The mode now uses the abbrev table `makefile-mode-abbrev-table'. | |
1418 | ||
5d94f558 | 1419 | *** Conditionals and include statements are now highlighted when |
c407c570 GM |
1420 | Fontlock mode is active. |
1421 | ||
87be76f6 GM |
1422 | ** Isearch changes |
1423 | ||
3353ef5a GM |
1424 | *** Isearch now puts a call to `isearch-resume' in the command history, |
1425 | so that searches can be resumed. | |
1426 | ||
1427 | *** In Isearch mode, M-C-s and M-C-r are now bound like C-s and C-r, | |
c407c570 GM |
1428 | respectively, i.e. you can repeat a regexp isearch with the same keys |
1429 | that started the search. | |
1430 | ||
87be76f6 | 1431 | *** In Isearch mode, mouse-2 in the echo area now yanks the current |
a933dad1 DL |
1432 | selection into the search string rather than giving an error. |
1433 | ||
c8a8458a | 1434 | +++ |
87be76f6 GM |
1435 | *** There is a new lazy highlighting feature in incremental search. |
1436 | ||
d35fce81 | 1437 | Lazy highlighting is switched on/off by customizing variable |
87be76f6 GM |
1438 | `isearch-lazy-highlight'. When active, all matches for the current |
1439 | search string are highlighted. The current match is highlighted as | |
1440 | before using face `isearch' or `region'. All other matches are | |
1441 | highlighted using face `isearch-lazy-highlight-face' which defaults to | |
5d94f558 | 1442 | `secondary-selection'. |
87be76f6 GM |
1443 | |
1444 | The extra highlighting makes it easier to anticipate where the cursor | |
1445 | will end up each time you press C-s or C-r to repeat a pending search. | |
1446 | Highlighting of these additional matches happens in a deferred fashion | |
1447 | using "idle timers," so the cycles needed do not rob isearch of its | |
1448 | usual snappy response. | |
1449 | ||
1450 | If `isearch-lazy-highlight-cleanup' is set to t, highlights for | |
1451 | matches are automatically cleared when you end the search. If it is | |
1452 | set to nil, you can remove the highlights manually with `M-x | |
1453 | isearch-lazy-highlight-cleanup'. | |
1454 | ||
21bc6203 | 1455 | +++ |
35384f06 GM |
1456 | ** Changes in sort.el |
1457 | ||
1458 | The function sort-numeric-fields interprets numbers starting with `0' | |
12c25bdc | 1459 | as octal and numbers starting with `0x' or `0X' as hexadecimal. The |
21bc6203 | 1460 | new user-option sort-numeric-base can be used to specify a default |
35384f06 | 1461 | numeric base. |
87be76f6 | 1462 | |
d7b511c4 GM |
1463 | ** Changes to Ange-ftp |
1464 | ||
424d8b44 | 1465 | +++ |
d7b511c4 | 1466 | *** Ange-ftp allows you to specify of a port number in remote file |
d67f47e4 DL |
1467 | names cleanly. It is appended to the host name, separated by a hash |
1468 | sign, e.g. `/foo@bar.org#666:mumble'. (This syntax comes from EFS.) | |
1469 | ||
d7b511c4 GM |
1470 | *** If the new user-option `ange-ftp-try-passive-mode' is set, passive |
1471 | ftp mode will be used if the ftp client supports that. | |
1472 | ||
9d453139 SS |
1473 | *** Ange-ftp handles the output of the w32-style clients which |
1474 | output ^M at the end of lines. | |
1475 | ||
4b9347b3 GM |
1476 | ** Shell script mode changes. |
1477 | ||
1478 | Shell script mode (sh-script) can now indent scripts for shells | |
8a33023e | 1479 | derived from sh and rc. The indentation style is customizable, and |
4b9347b3 GM |
1480 | sh-script can attempt to "learn" the current buffer's style. |
1481 | ||
79214ddf FP |
1482 | ** Etags changes. |
1483 | ||
1484 | *** In DOS, etags looks for file.cgz if it cannot find file.c. | |
1485 | ||
aca0be23 | 1486 | *** New option --ignore-case-regex is an alternative to --regex. It is now |
8dc78b52 FP |
1487 | possible to bind a regexp to a language, by prepending the regexp with |
1488 | {lang}, where lang is one of the languages that `etags --help' prints out. | |
1489 | This feature is useful especially for regex files, where each line contains | |
1490 | a regular expression. The manual contains details. | |
aca0be23 | 1491 | |
79214ddf FP |
1492 | *** In C and derived languages, etags creates tags for function |
1493 | declarations when given the --declarations option. | |
1494 | ||
1495 | *** In C++, tags are created for "operator". The tags have the form | |
aca0be23 | 1496 | "operator+", without spaces between the keyword and the operator. |
79214ddf | 1497 | |
8c463abe | 1498 | *** You shouldn't generally need any more the -C or -c++ option: etags |
10de1e33 FP |
1499 | automatically switches to C++ parsing when it meets the `class' or |
1500 | `template' keywords. | |
8c463abe FP |
1501 | |
1502 | *** Etags now is able to delve at arbitrary deeps into nested structures in | |
1503 | C-like languages. Previously, it was limited to one or two brace levels. | |
1504 | ||
79214ddf FP |
1505 | *** New language Ada: tags are functions, procedures, packages, tasks, and |
1506 | types. | |
1507 | ||
de370c4c | 1508 | *** In Fortran, `procedure' is not tagged. |
79214ddf FP |
1509 | |
1510 | *** In Java, tags are created for "interface". | |
1511 | ||
1512 | *** In Lisp, "(defstruct (foo", "(defun (operator" and similar constructs | |
1513 | are now tagged. | |
1514 | ||
89d57763 FP |
1515 | *** In makefiles, tags the targets. |
1516 | ||
79214ddf FP |
1517 | *** In Perl, the --globals option tags global variables. my and local |
1518 | variables are tagged. | |
1519 | ||
1520 | *** New language Python: def and class at the beginning of a line are tags. | |
1521 | ||
8dc78b52 FP |
1522 | *** .ss files are Scheme files, .pdb is Postscript with C syntax, .psw is |
1523 | for PSWrap. | |
79214ddf | 1524 | |
c8d94f86 | 1525 | +++ |
f6737cde GM |
1526 | ** Changes in etags.el |
1527 | ||
3f6e4b8b GM |
1528 | *** The new user-option tags-case-fold-search can be used to make |
1529 | tags operations case-sensitive or case-insensitive. The default | |
1530 | is to use the same setting as case-fold-search. | |
1531 | ||
f6737cde GM |
1532 | *** You can display additional output with M-x tags-apropos by setting |
1533 | the new variable tags-apropos-additional-actions. | |
1534 | ||
1535 | If non-nil, the variable's value should be a list of triples (TITLE | |
1536 | FUNCTION TO-SEARCH). For each triple, M-x tags-apropos processes | |
1537 | TO-SEARCH and lists tags from it. TO-SEARCH should be an alist, | |
1538 | obarray, or symbol. If it is a symbol, the symbol's value is used. | |
1539 | ||
1540 | TITLE is a string to use to label the list of tags from TO-SEARCH. | |
1541 | ||
1542 | FUNCTION is a function to call when an entry is selected in the Tags | |
1543 | List buffer. It is called with one argument, the selected symbol. | |
1544 | ||
1545 | A useful example value for this variable might be something like: | |
1546 | ||
1547 | '(("Emacs Lisp" Info-goto-emacs-command-node obarray) | |
1548 | ("Common Lisp" common-lisp-hyperspec common-lisp-hyperspec-obarray) | |
1549 | ("SCWM" scwm-documentation scwm-obarray)) | |
1550 | ||
1551 | *** The face tags-tag-face can be used to customize the appearance | |
1552 | of tags in the output of M-x tags-apropos. | |
1553 | ||
1554 | *** Setting tags-apropos-verbose to a non-nil value displays the | |
1555 | names of tags files in the *Tags List* buffer. | |
1556 | ||
0c68ce6f GM |
1557 | *** You can now search for tags that are part of the filename itself. |
1558 | If you have tagged the files topfile.c subdir/subfile.c | |
1559 | /tmp/tempfile.c, you can now search for tags "topfile.c", "subfile.c", | |
d521e087 | 1560 | "dir/sub", "tempfile", "tempfile.c". If the tag matches the file name, |
0c68ce6f GM |
1561 | point will go to the beginning of the file. |
1562 | ||
1e7db2e9 | 1563 | *** Compressed files are now transparently supported if |
d521e087 FP |
1564 | auto-compression-mode is active. You can tag (with Etags) and search |
1565 | (with find-tag) both compressed and uncompressed files. | |
1566 | ||
1e7db2e9 GM |
1567 | *** Tags commands like M-x tags-search no longer change point |
1568 | in buffers where no match is found. In buffers where a match is | |
1569 | found, the original value of point is pushed on the marker ring. | |
1570 | ||
424d8b44 | 1571 | +++ |
fbc164de PE |
1572 | ** Emacs now attempts to determine the initial language environment |
1573 | and preferred and locale coding systems systematically from the | |
1574 | LC_ALL, LC_CTYPE, and LANG environment variables during startup. | |
1575 | ||
c3eb1f10 | 1576 | +++ |
0b8a3a6d DL |
1577 | ** New language environments `Polish', `Latin-8' and `Latin-9'. |
1578 | Latin-8 and Latin-9 correspond respectively to the ISO character sets | |
1579 | 8859-14 (Celtic) and 8859-15 (updated Latin-1, with the Euro sign). | |
889be0a1 DL |
1580 | GNU Intlfonts doesn't support these yet but recent X releases have |
1581 | 8859-15. See etc/INSTALL for information on obtaining extra fonts. | |
028d739a DL |
1582 | There are new Leim input methods for Latin-8 and Latin-9 prefix (only) |
1583 | and Polish `slash'. | |
59c1bf85 | 1584 | |
732b9cdd GM |
1585 | +++ |
1586 | ** New language environments `Dutch' and `Spanish'. | |
89d57763 | 1587 | These new environments mainly select appropriate translations |
732b9cdd GM |
1588 | of the tutorial. |
1589 | ||
b8b2ea31 KH |
1590 | ** In Ethiopic language environment, special key bindings for |
1591 | function keys are changed as follows. This is to conform to "Emacs | |
1592 | Lisp Coding Convention". | |
1593 | ||
1594 | new command old-binding | |
1595 | --- ------- ----------- | |
1596 | f3 ethio-fidel-to-sera-buffer f5 | |
1597 | S-f3 ethio-fidel-to-sera-region f5 | |
1598 | C-f3 ethio-fidel-to-sera-mail-or-marker f5 | |
1599 | ||
1600 | f4 ethio-sera-to-fidel-buffer unchanged | |
1601 | S-f4 ethio-sera-to-fidel-region unchanged | |
1602 | C-f4 ethio-sera-to-fidel-mail-or-marker unchanged | |
1603 | ||
1604 | S-f5 ethio-toggle-punctuation f3 | |
1605 | S-f6 ethio-modify-vowel f6 | |
1606 | S-f7 ethio-replace-space f7 | |
1607 | S-f8 ethio-input-special-character f8 | |
1608 | S-f9 ethio-replace-space unchanged | |
1609 | C-f9 ethio-toggle-space f2 | |
1610 | ||
1e406be0 KH |
1611 | ** The rule of input method "slovak" is slightly changed. Now the |
1612 | rules for translating "q" and "Q" to "`" (backquote) are deleted, thus | |
1613 | typing them inserts "q" and "Q" respectively. Rules for translating | |
1614 | "=q", "+q", "=Q", and "+Q" to "`" are also deleted. Now, to input | |
1615 | "`", you must type "=q". | |
1616 | ||
424d8b44 | 1617 | +++ |
163ea954 | 1618 | ** Fortran mode has a new command `fortran-strip-sequence-nos' to |
e33b0397 DL |
1619 | remove text past column 72. The syntax class of `\' in Fortran is now |
1620 | appropriate for C-style escape sequences in strings. | |
1621 | ||
1622 | ** SGML mode's default `sgml-validate-command' is now `nsgmls'. | |
1623 | ||
424d8b44 | 1624 | +++ |
6f8ea2ae DL |
1625 | ** A new command `view-emacs-problems' (C-h P) displays the PROBLEMS file. |
1626 | ||
6ab8d72d | 1627 | +++ |
1e36ff68 | 1628 | ** The Dabbrev package has a new user-option `dabbrev-ignored-regexps' |
c0510d27 GM |
1629 | containing a list of regular expressions. Buffers matching a regular |
1630 | expression from that list, are not checked. | |
1631 | ||
5d94f558 SS |
1632 | ** Emacs can now figure out modification times of remote files. |
1633 | When you do C-x C-f /user@host:/path/file RET and edit the file, | |
1634 | and someone else modifies the file, you will be prompted to revert | |
1635 | the buffer, just like for the local files. | |
1636 | ||
dc28878c GM |
1637 | ** The buffer menu (C-x C-b) no longer lists the *Buffer List* buffer. |
1638 | ||
df8a9f78 | 1639 | +++ |
95931eb1 GM |
1640 | ** When invoked with a prefix argument, the command `list-abbrevs' now |
1641 | displays local abbrevs, only. | |
1642 | ||
54baed30 GM |
1643 | ** VC Changes |
1644 | ||
1645 | VC has been overhauled internally. It is now modular, making it | |
1646 | easier to plug-in arbitrary version control backends. (See Lisp | |
1647 | Changes for details on the new structure.) As a result, the mechanism | |
1648 | to enable and disable support for particular version systems has | |
1649 | changed: everything is now controlled by the new variable | |
60a441a5 | 1650 | `vc-handled-backends'. Its value is a list of symbols that identify |
54baed30 GM |
1651 | version systems; the default is '(RCS CVS SCCS). When finding a file, |
1652 | each of the backends in that list is tried in order to see whether the | |
1653 | file is registered in that backend. | |
1654 | ||
1655 | When registering a new file, VC first tries each of the listed | |
1656 | backends to see if any of them considers itself "responsible" for the | |
1657 | directory of the file (e.g. because a corresponding subdirectory for | |
1658 | master files exists). If none of the backends is responsible, then | |
1659 | the first backend in the list that could register the file is chosen. | |
1660 | As a consequence, the variable `vc-default-back-end' is now obsolete. | |
1661 | ||
1662 | The old variable `vc-master-templates' is also obsolete, although VC | |
1663 | still supports it for backward compatibility. To define templates for | |
1664 | RCS or SCCS, you should rather use the new variables | |
1665 | vc-{rcs,sccs}-master-templates. (There is no such feature under CVS | |
1666 | where it doesn't make sense.) | |
1667 | ||
1668 | The variables `vc-ignore-vc-files' and `vc-handle-cvs' are also | |
1669 | obsolete now, you must set `vc-handled-backends' to nil or exclude | |
1670 | `CVS' from the list, respectively, to achieve their effect now. | |
1671 | ||
1672 | *** General Changes | |
1673 | ||
1674 | The variable `vc-checkout-carefully' is obsolete: the corresponding | |
1675 | checks are always done now. | |
1676 | ||
327652be | 1677 | VC Dired buffers are now kept up-to-date during all version control |
54baed30 GM |
1678 | operations. |
1679 | ||
c286608e SM |
1680 | `vc-diff' output is now displayed in `diff-mode'. |
1681 | `vc-print-log' uses `log-view-mode'. | |
1682 | `vc-log-mode' (used for *VC-Log*) has been replaced by `log-edit-mode'. | |
1683 | ||
22933be8 AS |
1684 | The command C-x v m (vc-merge) now accepts an empty argument as the |
1685 | first revision number. This means that any recent changes on the | |
1686 | current branch should be picked up from the repository and merged into | |
1687 | the working file (``merge news''). | |
1688 | ||
1689 | The commands C-x v s (vc-create-snapshot) and C-x v r | |
1690 | (vc-retrieve-snapshot) now ask for a directory name from which to work | |
1691 | downwards. | |
1692 | ||
1693 | *** Multiple Backends | |
1694 | ||
1695 | VC now lets you register files in more than one backend. This is | |
1696 | useful, for example, if you are working with a slow remote CVS | |
1697 | repository. You can then use RCS for local editing, and occasionally | |
1698 | commit your changes back to CVS, or pick up changes from CVS into your | |
1699 | local RCS archives. | |
1700 | ||
1701 | To make this work, the ``more local'' backend (RCS in our example) | |
1702 | should come first in `vc-handled-backends', and the ``more remote'' | |
1703 | backend (CVS) should come later. (The default value of | |
1704 | `vc-handled-backends' already has it that way.) | |
1705 | ||
60a441a5 AS |
1706 | You can then commit changes to another backend (say, RCS), by typing |
1707 | C-u C-x v v RCS RET (i.e. vc-next-action now accepts a backend name as | |
1708 | a revision number). VC registers the file in the more local backend | |
1709 | if that hasn't already happened, and commits to a branch based on the | |
1710 | current revision number from the more remote backend. | |
22933be8 AS |
1711 | |
1712 | If a file is registered in multiple backends, you can switch to | |
1713 | another one using C-x v b (vc-switch-backend). This does not change | |
1714 | any files, it only changes VC's perspective on the file. Use this to | |
1715 | pick up changes from CVS while working under RCS locally. | |
1716 | ||
1717 | After you are done with your local RCS editing, you can commit your | |
1718 | changes back to CVS using C-u C-x v v CVS RET. In this case, the | |
1719 | local RCS archive is removed after the commit, and the log entry | |
1720 | buffer is initialized to contain the entire RCS change log of the file. | |
1721 | ||
54baed30 GM |
1722 | *** Changes for CVS |
1723 | ||
1724 | There is a new user option, `vc-cvs-stay-local'. If it is `t' (the | |
1725 | default), then VC avoids network queries for files registered in | |
1726 | remote repositories. The state of such files is then only determined | |
1727 | by heuristics and past information. `vc-cvs-stay-local' can also be a | |
1728 | regexp to match against repository hostnames; only files from hosts | |
1729 | that match it are treated locally. If the variable is nil, then VC | |
1730 | queries the repository just as often as it does for local files. | |
1731 | ||
22933be8 AS |
1732 | If `vc-cvs-stay-local' is on, then VC also makes local backups of |
1733 | repository versions. This means that ordinary diffs (C-x v =) and | |
1734 | revert operations (C-x v u) can be done completely locally, without | |
1735 | any repository interactions at all. The name of a local version | |
1736 | backup of FILE is FILE.~REV.~, where REV is the repository version | |
1737 | number. This format is similar to that used by C-x v ~ | |
1738 | (vc-version-other-window), except for the trailing dot. As a matter | |
1739 | of fact, the two features can each use the files created by the other, | |
1740 | the only difference being that files with a trailing `.' are deleted | |
105602b1 EZ |
1741 | automatically after commit. (This feature doesn't work on MS-DOS, |
1742 | since DOS disallows more than a single dot in the trunk of a file | |
1743 | name.) | |
22933be8 | 1744 | |
54baed30 GM |
1745 | If `vc-cvs-stay-local' is on, and there have been changes in the |
1746 | repository, VC notifies you about it when you actually try to commit. | |
1747 | If you want to check for updates from the repository without trying to | |
22933be8 | 1748 | commit, you can either use C-x v m RET to perform an update on the |
54baed30 GM |
1749 | current file, or you can use C-x v r RET to get an update for an |
1750 | entire directory tree. | |
1751 | ||
1752 | The new user option `vc-cvs-use-edit' indicates whether VC should call | |
1753 | "cvs edit" to make files writeable; it defaults to `t'. (This option | |
1754 | is only meaningful if the CVSREAD variable is set, or if files are | |
1755 | "watched" by other developers.) | |
1756 | ||
22933be8 AS |
1757 | The commands C-x v s (vc-create-snapshot) and C-x v r |
1758 | (vc-retrieve-snapshot) are now also implemented for CVS. If you give | |
60a441a5 | 1759 | an empty snapshot name to the latter, that performs a `cvs update', |
22933be8 AS |
1760 | starting at the given directory. |
1761 | ||
54baed30 GM |
1762 | *** Lisp Changes in VC |
1763 | ||
1764 | VC has been restructured internally to make it modular. You can now | |
1765 | add support for arbitrary version control backends by writing a | |
1766 | library that provides a certain set of backend-specific functions, and | |
1767 | then telling VC to use that library. For example, to add support for | |
60a441a5 AS |
1768 | a version system named SYS, you write a library named vc-sys.el, which |
1769 | provides a number of functions vc-sys-... (see commentary at the top | |
54baed30 | 1770 | of vc.el for a detailed list of them). To make VC use that library, |
60a441a5 AS |
1771 | you need to put it somewhere into Emacs' load path and add the symbol |
1772 | `SYS' to the list `vc-handled-backends'. | |
54baed30 | 1773 | |
c4ed232b | 1774 | ** The customizable EDT emulation package now supports the EDT |
732b9cdd GM |
1775 | SUBS command and EDT scroll margins. It also works with more |
1776 | terminal/keyboard configurations and it now works under XEmacs. | |
1777 | See etc/edt-user.doc for more information. | |
1778 | ||
a933dad1 DL |
1779 | ** New modes and packages |
1780 | ||
79b9f6e0 MB |
1781 | *** The new global minor mode `minibuffer-electric-default-mode' |
1782 | automatically hides the `(default ...)' part of minibuffer prompts when | |
1783 | the default is not applicable. | |
1784 | ||
b95b34e5 GM |
1785 | *** Artist is an Emacs lisp package that allows you to draw lines, |
1786 | rectangles and ellipses by using your mouse and/or keyboard. The | |
1787 | shapes are made up with the ascii characters |, -, / and \. | |
1788 | ||
1789 | Features are: | |
1790 | ||
1791 | - Intersecting: When a `|' intersects with a `-', a `+' is | |
1792 | drawn, like this: | \ / | |
c607d53d | 1793 | --+-- X |
b95b34e5 GM |
1794 | | / \ |
1795 | ||
1796 | - Rubber-banding: When drawing lines you can interactively see the | |
1797 | result while holding the mouse button down and moving the mouse. If | |
1798 | your machine is not fast enough (a 386 is a bit too slow, but a | |
1799 | pentium is well enough), you can turn this feature off. You will | |
1800 | then see 1's and 2's which mark the 1st and 2nd endpoint of the line | |
1801 | you are drawing. | |
1802 | ||
1803 | - Arrows: After having drawn a (straight) line or a (straight) | |
1804 | poly-line, you can set arrows on the line-ends by typing < or >. | |
1805 | ||
1806 | - Flood-filling: You can fill any area with a certain character by | |
1807 | flood-filling. | |
1808 | ||
1809 | - Cut copy and paste: You can cut, copy and paste rectangular | |
1810 | regions. Artist also interfaces with the rect package (this can be | |
1811 | turned off if it causes you any trouble) so anything you cut in | |
1812 | artist can be yanked with C-x r y and vice versa. | |
c607d53d | 1813 | |
b95b34e5 GM |
1814 | - Drawing with keys: Everything you can do with the mouse, you can |
1815 | also do without the mouse. | |
1816 | ||
1817 | - Aspect-ratio: You can set the variable artist-aspect-ratio to | |
1818 | reflect the height-width ratio for the font you are using. Squares | |
1819 | and circles are then drawn square/round. Note, that once your | |
1820 | ascii-file is shown with font with a different height-width ratio, | |
1821 | the squares won't be square and the circles won't be round. | |
1822 | ||
1823 | - Drawing operations: The following drawing operations are implemented: | |
1824 | ||
1825 | lines straight-lines | |
1826 | rectangles squares | |
1827 | poly-lines straight poly-lines | |
1828 | ellipses circles | |
1829 | text (see-thru) text (overwrite) | |
1830 | spray-can setting size for spraying | |
1831 | vaporize line vaporize lines | |
1832 | erase characters erase rectangles | |
1833 | ||
1834 | Straight lines are lines that go horizontally, vertically or | |
1835 | diagonally. Plain lines go in any direction. The operations in | |
1836 | the right column are accessed by holding down the shift key while | |
1837 | drawing. | |
1838 | ||
1839 | It is possible to vaporize (erase) entire lines and connected lines | |
1840 | (rectangles for example) as long as the lines being vaporized are | |
1841 | straight and connected at their endpoints. Vaporizing is inspired | |
1842 | by the drawrect package by Jari Aalto <jari.aalto@poboxes.com>. | |
1843 | ||
1844 | - Picture mode compatibility: Artist is picture mode compatible (this | |
1845 | can be turned off). | |
1846 | ||
4473cdd9 JW |
1847 | +++ |
1848 | *** The new package Eshell is an operating system command shell | |
1849 | implemented entirely in Emacs Lisp. Use `M-x eshell' to invoke it. | |
1850 | It functions similarly to bash and zsh, and allows running of Lisp | |
1851 | functions and external commands using the same syntax. It supports | |
1852 | history lists, aliases, extended globbing, smart scrolling, etc. It | |
1853 | will work on any platform Emacs has been ported to. And since most of | |
1854 | the basic commands -- ls, rm, mv, cp, ln, du, cat, etc. -- have been | |
1855 | rewritten in Lisp, it offers an operating-system independent shell, | |
1856 | all within the scope of your Emacs process. | |
1857 | ||
ff332647 | 1858 | +++ |
90cbf47e GM |
1859 | *** The new package timeclock.el is a mode is for keeping track of time |
1860 | intervals. You can use it for whatever purpose you like, but the | |
1861 | typical scenario is to keep track of how much time you spend working | |
1862 | on certain projects. | |
1863 | ||
894ca69e | 1864 | +++ |
baf7eee4 GM |
1865 | *** The new package hi-lock.el provides commands to highlight matches |
1866 | of interactively entered regexps. For example, | |
abb2db1c | 1867 | |
d96d6bb0 | 1868 | M-x highlight-regexp RET clearly RET RET |
abb2db1c GM |
1869 | |
1870 | will highlight all occurrences of `clearly' using a yellow background | |
1871 | face. New occurrences of `clearly' will be highlighted as they are | |
1872 | typed. `M-x unhighlight-regexp RET' will remove the highlighting. | |
1873 | Any existing face can be used for highlighting and a set of | |
1874 | appropriate faces is provided. The regexps can be written into the | |
1875 | current buffer in a form that will be recognized the next time the | |
baf7eee4 GM |
1876 | corresponding file is read. There are commands to highlight matches |
1877 | to phrases and to highlight entire lines containing a match. | |
abb2db1c | 1878 | |
424d8b44 | 1879 | +++ |
d96d6bb0 | 1880 | *** The new package zone.el plays games with Emacs' display when |
abb2db1c GM |
1881 | Emacs is idle. |
1882 | ||
31fc5d15 GM |
1883 | *** The new package xml.el provides a simple but generic XML |
1884 | parser. It doesn't parse the DTDs however. | |
1885 | ||
5cb6a58e SM |
1886 | *** The comment operations are now provided by the newcomment.el |
1887 | package which allows different styles of comment-region and should | |
1888 | be more robust while offering the same functionality. | |
601e0081 SM |
1889 | `comment-region' now doesn't always comment a-line-at-a-time, but only |
1890 | comments the region, breaking the line at point if necessary. | |
5cb6a58e | 1891 | |
424d8b44 | 1892 | +++ |
578979ee GM |
1893 | *** The Ebrowse package implements a C++ class browser and tags |
1894 | facilities tailored for use with C++. It is documented in a | |
1895 | separate Texinfo file. | |
1896 | ||
424d8b44 DL |
1897 | +++ |
1898 | *** The PCL-CVS package available by either running M-x cvs-examine or | |
1899 | by visiting a CVS administrative directory (with a prefix argument) | |
1900 | provides an alternative interface to VC-dired for CVS. It comes with | |
1901 | `log-view-mode' to view RCS and SCCS logs and `log-edit-mode' used to | |
8a33023e | 1902 | enter check-in log messages. |
dc1178bf | 1903 | |
424d8b44 | 1904 | +++ |
6abca616 EZ |
1905 | *** The new package called `woman' allows to browse Unix man pages |
1906 | without invoking external programs. | |
1907 | ||
1908 | The command `M-x woman' formats manual pages entirely in Emacs Lisp | |
1909 | and then displays them, like `M-x manual-entry' does. Unlike | |
1910 | `manual-entry', `woman' does not invoke any external programs, so it | |
1911 | is useful on systems such as MS-DOS/MS-Windows where the `man' and | |
490f2e7b | 1912 | Groff or `troff' commands are not readily available. |
6abca616 EZ |
1913 | |
1914 | The command `M-x woman-find-file' asks for the file name of a man | |
1915 | page, then formats and displays it like `M-x woman' does. | |
1916 | ||
719e2c6e | 1917 | +++ |
5e5dff44 GM |
1918 | *** The new command M-x re-builder offers a convenient interface for |
1919 | authoring regular expressions with immediate visual feedback. | |
1920 | ||
1921 | The buffer from which the command was called becomes the target for | |
1922 | the regexp editor popping up in a separate window. Matching text in | |
1923 | the target buffer is immediately color marked during the editing. | |
1924 | Each sub-expression of the regexp will show up in a different face so | |
1925 | even complex regexps can be edited and verified on target data in a | |
1926 | single step. | |
1927 | ||
1928 | On displays not supporting faces the matches instead blink like | |
1929 | matching parens to make them stand out. On such a setup you will | |
1930 | probably also want to use the sub-expression mode when the regexp | |
1931 | contains such to get feedback about their respective limits. | |
1932 | ||
424d8b44 | 1933 | +++ |
f7136ee8 GM |
1934 | *** glasses-mode is a minor mode that makes |
1935 | unreadableIdentifiersLikeThis readable. It works as glasses, without | |
1936 | actually modifying content of a buffer. | |
1937 | ||
bbd9b566 GM |
1938 | *** The package ebnf2ps translates an EBNF to a syntactic chart in |
1939 | PostScript. | |
1940 | ||
1941 | Currently accepts ad-hoc EBNF, ISO EBNF and Bison/Yacc. | |
1942 | ||
1943 | The ad-hoc default EBNF syntax has the following elements: | |
1944 | ||
1945 | ; comment (until end of line) | |
1946 | A non-terminal | |
1947 | "C" terminal | |
1948 | ?C? special | |
1949 | $A default non-terminal | |
1950 | $"C" default terminal | |
1951 | $?C? default special | |
1952 | A = B. production (A is the header and B the body) | |
1953 | C D sequence (C occurs before D) | |
1954 | C | D alternative (C or D occurs) | |
1955 | A - B exception (A excluding B, B without any non-terminal) | |
1956 | n * A repetition (A repeats n (integer) times) | |
1957 | (C) group (expression C is grouped together) | |
1958 | [C] optional (C may or not occurs) | |
1959 | C+ one or more occurrences of C | |
1960 | {C}+ one or more occurrences of C | |
1961 | {C}* zero or more occurrences of C | |
1962 | {C} zero or more occurrences of C | |
1963 | C / D equivalent to: C {D C}* | |
1964 | {C || D}+ equivalent to: C {D C}* | |
1965 | {C || D}* equivalent to: [C {D C}*] | |
1966 | {C || D} equivalent to: [C {D C}*] | |
1967 | ||
1968 | Please, see ebnf2ps documentation for EBNF syntax and how to use it. | |
1969 | ||
99453a38 GM |
1970 | *** The package align.el will align columns within a region, using M-x |
1971 | align. Its mode-specific rules, based on regular expressions, | |
1972 | determine where the columns should be split. In C and C++, for | |
1973 | example, it will align variable names in declaration lists, or the | |
1974 | equal signs of assignments. | |
1975 | ||
424d8b44 | 1976 | +++ |
559cee90 DL |
1977 | *** `paragraph-indent-minor-mode' is a new minor mode supporting |
1978 | paragraphs in the same style as `paragraph-indent-text-mode'. | |
1979 | ||
424d8b44 | 1980 | +++ |
6448a6b3 GM |
1981 | *** bs.el is a new package for buffer selection similar to |
1982 | list-buffers or electric-buffer-list. Use M-x bs-show to display a | |
2018166d | 1983 | buffer menu with this package. See the Custom group `bs'. |
6448a6b3 | 1984 | |
6344985d GM |
1985 | *** find-lisp.el is a package emulating the Unix find command in Lisp. |
1986 | ||
249652b1 GM |
1987 | *** calculator.el is a small calculator package that is intended to |
1988 | replace desktop calculators such as xcalc and calc.exe. Actually, it | |
1989 | is not too small - it has more features than most desktop calculators, | |
1990 | and can be customized easily to get many more functions. It should | |
1991 | not be confused with "calc" which is a much bigger mathematical tool | |
1992 | which answers different needs. | |
1993 | ||
424d8b44 | 1994 | +++ |
3476b54a GM |
1995 | *** The minor modes cwarn-mode and global-cwarn-mode highlights |
1996 | suspicious C and C++ constructions. Currently, assignments inside | |
1997 | expressions, semicolon following `if', `for' and `while' (except, of | |
1998 | course, after a `do .. while' statement), and C++ functions with | |
1999 | reference parameters are recognized. The modes require font-lock mode | |
2000 | to be enabled. | |
2001 | ||
424d8b44 | 2002 | +++ |
8964fec7 SM |
2003 | *** smerge-mode.el provides `smerge-mode', a simple minor-mode for files |
2004 | containing diff3-style conflict markers, such as generated by RCS. | |
2005 | ||
424d8b44 | 2006 | +++ |
a933dad1 DL |
2007 | *** 5x5.el is a simple puzzle game. |
2008 | ||
424d8b44 | 2009 | +++ |
a933dad1 DL |
2010 | *** hl-line.el provides a minor mode to highlight the current line. |
2011 | ||
2012 | *** ansi-color.el translates ANSI terminal escapes into text-properties. | |
2013 | ||
fba448c1 | 2014 | Please note: if `ansi-color-for-comint-mode' and |
8901d1ac GM |
2015 | `global-font-lock-mode' are non-nil, loading ansi-color.el will |
2016 | disable font-lock and add `ansi-color-apply' to | |
2017 | `comint-preoutput-filter-functions' for all shell-mode buffers. This | |
2018 | displays the output of "ls --color=yes" using the correct foreground | |
2019 | and background colors. | |
2020 | ||
a933dad1 DL |
2021 | *** delphi.el provides a major mode for editing the Delphi (Object |
2022 | Pascal) language. | |
2023 | ||
f6499c03 | 2024 | +++ |
a933dad1 DL |
2025 | *** quickurl.el provides a simple method of inserting a URL based on |
2026 | the text at point. | |
2027 | ||
2028 | *** sql.el provides an interface to SQL data bases. | |
2029 | ||
424d8b44 | 2030 | +++ |
8d54eb69 DL |
2031 | *** fortune.el uses the fortune program to create mail/news signatures. |
2032 | ||
732b9cdd GM |
2033 | *** whitespace.el is a package for warning about and cleaning bogus |
2034 | whitespace in a file. | |
a933dad1 | 2035 | |
ebcfda83 GM |
2036 | *** PostScript mode (ps-mode) is a new major mode for editing PostScript |
2037 | files. It offers: interaction with a PostScript interpreter, including | |
2038 | (very basic) error handling; fontification, easily customizable for | |
2039 | interpreter messages; auto-indentation; insertion of EPSF templates and | |
2040 | often used code snippets; viewing of BoundingBox; commenting out / | |
2041 | uncommenting regions; conversion of 8bit characters to PostScript octal | |
2042 | codes. All functionality is accessible through a menu. | |
2043 | ||
2044 | *** delim-col helps to prettify columns in a text region or rectangle. | |
2045 | ||
2046 | Here is an example of columns: | |
2047 | ||
2048 | horse apple bus | |
2049 | dog pineapple car EXTRA | |
2050 | porcupine strawberry airplane | |
2051 | ||
2052 | Doing the following settings: | |
2053 | ||
2054 | (setq delimit-columns-str-before "[ ") | |
2055 | (setq delimit-columns-str-after " ]") | |
2056 | (setq delimit-columns-str-separator ", ") | |
2057 | (setq delimit-columns-separator "\t") | |
2058 | ||
2059 | ||
2060 | Selecting the lines above and typing: | |
2061 | ||
2062 | M-x delimit-columns-region | |
2063 | ||
2064 | It results: | |
2065 | ||
2066 | [ horse , apple , bus , ] | |
2067 | [ dog , pineapple , car , EXTRA ] | |
2068 | [ porcupine, strawberry, airplane, ] | |
2069 | ||
2070 | delim-col has the following options: | |
2071 | ||
2072 | delimit-columns-str-before Specify a string to be inserted | |
2073 | before all columns. | |
2074 | ||
2075 | delimit-columns-str-separator Specify a string to be inserted | |
2076 | between each column. | |
2077 | ||
2078 | delimit-columns-str-after Specify a string to be inserted | |
2079 | after all columns. | |
2080 | ||
2081 | delimit-columns-separator Specify a regexp which separates | |
2082 | each column. | |
2083 | ||
2084 | delim-col has the following commands: | |
2085 | ||
2086 | delimit-columns-region Prettify all columns in a text region. | |
2087 | delimit-columns-rectangle Prettify all columns in a text rectangle. | |
2088 | ||
424d8b44 | 2089 | +++ |
2018166d DL |
2090 | *** Recentf mode maintains a menu for visiting files that were |
2091 | operated on recently. User option recentf-menu-filter specifies a | |
2092 | menu filter function to change the menu appearance. For example, the | |
2093 | recent file list can be displayed: | |
f507826c | 2094 | |
31fc5d15 | 2095 | - organized by major modes, directories or user defined rules. |
8a33023e GM |
2096 | - sorted by file paths, file names, ascending or descending. |
2097 | - showing paths relative to the current default-directory | |
f507826c | 2098 | |
31fc5d15 GM |
2099 | The `recentf-filter-changer' menu filter function allows to |
2100 | dynamically change the menu appearance. | |
f507826c | 2101 | |
8062f458 DL |
2102 | *** elide-head.el provides a mechanism for eliding boilerplate header |
2103 | text. | |
2104 | ||
424d8b44 | 2105 | +++ |
36e24b82 | 2106 | *** footnote.el provides `footnote-mode', a minor mode supporting use |
91735437 DL |
2107 | of footnotes. It is intended for use with Message mode, but isn't |
2108 | specific to Message mode. | |
2109 | ||
424d8b44 | 2110 | +++ |
36e24b82 DL |
2111 | *** diff-mode.el provides `diff-mode', a major mode for |
2112 | viewing/editing context diffs (patches). It is selected for files | |
2113 | with extension `.diff', `.diffs', `.patch' and `.rej'. | |
2114 | ||
aaa659ef DL |
2115 | *** EUDC, the Emacs Unified Directory Client, provides a common user |
2116 | interface to access directory servers using different directory | |
2117 | protocols. It has a separate manual. | |
2118 | ||
eee54b0e DL |
2119 | *** autoconf.el provides a major mode for editing configure.in files |
2120 | for Autoconf, selected automatically. | |
2121 | ||
424d8b44 | 2122 | +++ |
612839b6 GM |
2123 | *** windmove.el provides moving between windows. |
2124 | ||
5d94f558 | 2125 | *** crm.el provides a facility to read multiple strings from the |
612839b6 | 2126 | minibuffer with completion. |
aaa659ef | 2127 | |
399da7e3 DL |
2128 | *** todo-mode.el provides management of TODO lists and integration |
2129 | with the diary features. | |
2130 | ||
6e417ca5 DL |
2131 | *** autoarg.el provides a feature reported from Twenex Emacs whereby |
2132 | numeric keys supply prefix args rather than self inserting. | |
2133 | ||
4a27bdfb GM |
2134 | *** The function `turn-off-auto-fill' unconditionally turns off Auto |
2135 | Fill mode. | |
2136 | ||
60dd7e0e DL |
2137 | *** gnus-mule.el is now just a compatibility layer over the built-in |
2138 | Gnus facilities. | |
2139 | ||
dace60cf JW |
2140 | *** pcomplete.el is a library that provides programmable completion |
2141 | facilities for Emacs, similar to what zsh and tcsh offer. The main | |
2142 | difference is that completion functions are written in Lisp, meaning | |
2143 | they can be profiled, debugged, etc. | |
a18a342d | 2144 | |
965bc065 DL |
2145 | +++ |
2146 | ** Refill minor mode provides preliminary support for keeping | |
2147 | paragraphs filled as you modify them. | |
2148 | ||
2149 | +++ | |
2150 | ** The new global minor mode `auto-image-file-mode' allows image files | |
2151 | to be visited as images. | |
2152 | ||
a933dad1 DL |
2153 | ** Withdrawn packages |
2154 | ||
2155 | *** mldrag.el has been removed. mouse.el provides the same | |
2156 | functionality with aliases for the mldrag functions. | |
25a81338 | 2157 | |
3261c1d8 DL |
2158 | *** eval-reg.el has been obsoleted by changes to edebug.el and removed. |
2159 | ||
2160 | *** ph.el has been obsoleted by EUDC and removed. | |
ce75fd23 | 2161 | |
05197f40 | 2162 | \f |
01242779 DL |
2163 | * Incompatible Lisp changes |
2164 | ||
2165 | There are a few Lisp changes which are not backwards-compatible and | |
2166 | may require changes to existing code. Here is a list for reference. | |
3b6936cc | 2167 | See the sections below for details. |
01242779 | 2168 | |
89d57763 | 2169 | ** Since `format' preserves text properties, the idiom |
9b2a085d | 2170 | `(format "%s" foo)' no longer works to copy and remove properties. |
3b6936cc | 2171 | Use `copy-sequence' and `set-text-properties'. |
01242779 DL |
2172 | |
2173 | ** Since the `keymap' text property now has significance, some code | |
2174 | which uses both `local-map' and `keymap' properties (for portability) | |
2175 | may, for instance, give rise to duplicate menus when the keymaps from | |
2176 | these properties are active. | |
2177 | ||
4dd4cc14 | 2178 | ** The change in the treatment of non-ASCII characters in search |
01242779 | 2179 | ranges may affect some code. |
1c14ba45 DL |
2180 | |
2181 | ** A non-nil value for the LOCAL arg of add-hook makes the hook | |
2182 | buffer-local even if `make-local-hook' hasn't been called, which might | |
2183 | make a difference to some code. | |
2184 | ||
4dd4cc14 DL |
2185 | ** The new treatment of the minibuffer prompt might affect code which |
2186 | operates on the minibuffer. | |
2187 | ||
7c94ccf6 EZ |
2188 | ** The new character sets `eight-bit-control' and `eight-bit-graphic' |
2189 | cause `no-conversion' and `emacs-mule-unix' coding systems to produce | |
2190 | different results when reading files with non-ASCII characters | |
2191 | (previously, both coding systems would produce the same results). | |
2192 | Specifically, `no-conversion' interprets each 8-bit byte as a separate | |
2193 | character. This makes `no-conversion' inappropriate for reading | |
2194 | multibyte text, e.g. buffers written to disk in their internal MULE | |
2195 | encoding (auto-saving does that, for example). If a Lisp program | |
2196 | reads such files with `no-conversion', each byte of the multibyte | |
2197 | sequence, including the MULE leading codes such as \201, is treated as | |
2198 | a separate character, which prevents them from being interpreted in | |
2199 | the buffer as multibyte characters. | |
2200 | ||
2201 | Therefore, Lisp programs that read files which contain the internal | |
2202 | MULE encoding should use `emacs-mule-unix'. `no-conversion' is only | |
2203 | appropriate for reading truly binary files. | |
2204 | ||
7a39158f | 2205 | ** Code that relies on the obsolete `before-change-function' and |
3280fbe8 EZ |
2206 | `after-change-function' to detect buffer changes will now fail. Use |
2207 | `before-change-functions' and `after-change-functions' instead. | |
7a39158f DL |
2208 | |
2209 | ** Code that uses `concat' with integer args now gets an error, as | |
2210 | long promised. | |
2211 | ||
f34eb373 DL |
2212 | ** Not a Lisp incompatibility as such but, with the introduction of |
2213 | extra private charsets, there is now only one slot free for a new | |
2214 | dimension-2 private charset. User code which tries to add more than | |
2215 | one extra will fail unless you rebuild Emacs with some standard | |
2216 | charset(s) removed; that is probably inadvisable because it changes | |
2217 | the emacs-mule encoding. Also, files stored in the emacs-mule | |
028d739a DL |
2218 | encoding using Emacs 20 with additional private charsets defined will |
2219 | probably not be read correctly by Emacs 21. | |
3478eafc | 2220 | |
05197f40 | 2221 | \f |
ce75fd23 GM |
2222 | * Lisp changes made after edition 2.6 of the Emacs Lisp Manual, |
2223 | (Display-related features are described in a page of their own below.) | |
2224 | ||
2018166d DL |
2225 | ** The keyword :set-after in defcustom allows to specify dependencies |
2226 | between custom options. Example: | |
2227 | ||
2228 | (defcustom default-input-method nil | |
2229 | "*Default input method for multilingual text (a string). | |
2230 | This is the input method activated automatically by the command | |
2231 | `toggle-input-method' (\\[toggle-input-method])." | |
2232 | :group 'mule | |
2233 | :type '(choice (const nil) string) | |
2234 | :set-after '(current-language-environment)) | |
2235 | ||
2236 | This specifies that default-input-method should be set after | |
2237 | current-language-environment even if default-input-method appears | |
2238 | first in a custom-set-variables statement. | |
2239 | ||
f3780fe4 | 2240 | ** The new hook `kbd-macro-termination-hook' is run at the end of |
a758f97d GM |
2241 | function execute-kbd-macro. Functions on this hook are called with no |
2242 | args. The hook is run independent of how the macro was terminated | |
2243 | (signal or normal termination). | |
2244 | ||
023045d6 DL |
2245 | +++ |
2246 | ** Functions `butlast' and `nbutlast' for removing trailing elements | |
2247 | from a list are now available without requiring the CL package. | |
2248 | ||
eb1b0c74 GM |
2249 | +++ |
2250 | ** The new user-option `even-window-heights' can be set to nil | |
2251 | to prevent `display-buffer' from evening out window heights. | |
2252 | ||
52d89894 GM |
2253 | +++ |
2254 | ** The user-option `face-font-registry-alternatives' specifies | |
2255 | alternative font registry names to try when looking for a font. | |
2256 | ||
693c4692 | 2257 | ** Function `md5' calculates the MD5 "message digest"/"checksum". |
4301cf66 | 2258 | |
1c14ba45 | 2259 | +++ |
6bc92b2e GM |
2260 | ** Function `delete-frame' runs `delete-frame-hook' before actually |
2261 | deleting the frame. The hook is called with one arg, the frame | |
2262 | being deleted. | |
2263 | ||
1c14ba45 | 2264 | +++ |
39e776cd SM |
2265 | ** `add-hook' now makes the hook local if called with a non-nil LOCAL arg. |
2266 | ||
a18a342d | 2267 | +++ |
1396138a | 2268 | ** The treatment of non-ASCII characters in search ranges has changed. |
a18a342d DL |
2269 | If a range in a regular expression or the arg of |
2270 | skip-chars-forward/backward starts with a unibyte character C and ends | |
2271 | with a multibyte character C2, the range is divided into two: one is | |
2272 | C..?\377, the other is C1..C2, where C1 is the first character of C2's | |
2273 | charset. | |
2274 | ||
4fbdfdcf MB |
2275 | +++ |
2276 | ** The new function `display-message-or-buffer' displays a message in | |
2277 | the echo area or pops up a buffer, depending on the length of the | |
2278 | message. | |
2279 | ||
6a0b0752 MB |
2280 | ** The new macro `with-auto-compression-mode' allows evaluating an |
2281 | expression with auto-compression-mode enabled. | |
2282 | ||
1c14ba45 | 2283 | +++ |
47e351a3 GM |
2284 | ** In image specifications, `:heuristic-mask' has been replaced |
2285 | with the more general `:mask' property. | |
2286 | ||
1c14ba45 | 2287 | +++ |
f864120f | 2288 | ** Image specifications accept more `:conversion's. |
ba9eeda1 | 2289 | |
a2bd77b8 GM |
2290 | ** A `?' can be used in a symbol name without escaping it with a |
2291 | backslash. | |
2292 | ||
424d8b44 DL |
2293 | +++ |
2294 | ** Reading from the mini-buffer now reads from standard input if Emacs | |
2295 | is running in batch mode. For example, | |
2296 | ||
2297 | (message "%s" (read t)) | |
2298 | ||
2299 | will read a Lisp expression from standard input and print the result | |
2300 | to standard output. | |
2301 | ||
2302 | +++ | |
2303 | ** The argument of `down-list', `backward-up-list', `up-list', | |
2304 | `kill-sexp', `backward-kill-sexp' and `mark-sexp' is now optional. | |
2305 | ||
ead53494 GM |
2306 | ** If `display-buffer-reuse-frames' is set, function `display-buffer' |
2307 | will raise frames displaying a buffer, instead of creating a new | |
2308 | frame or window. | |
2309 | ||
f6499c03 | 2310 | +++ |
27848c01 GM |
2311 | ** Two new functions for removing elements from lists/sequences |
2312 | were added | |
2313 | ||
2314 | - Function: remove ELT SEQ | |
2315 | ||
8a33023e | 2316 | Return a copy of SEQ with all occurrences of ELT removed. SEQ must be |
27848c01 GM |
2317 | a list, vector, or string. The comparison is done with `equal'. |
2318 | ||
2319 | - Function: remq ELT LIST | |
2320 | ||
8a33023e | 2321 | Return a copy of LIST with all occurrences of ELT removed. The |
27848c01 GM |
2322 | comparison is done with `eq'. |
2323 | ||
1c14ba45 | 2324 | +++ |
27848c01 | 2325 | ** The function `delete' now also works with vectors and strings. |
3ab82477 | 2326 | |
b548072f GM |
2327 | ** The meaning of the `:weakness WEAK' argument of make-hash-table |
2328 | has been changed. | |
2329 | ||
424d8b44 | 2330 | +++ |
07b14857 KH |
2331 | ** Function `aset' stores any multibyte character in any string |
2332 | without signaling "Attempt to change char length of a string". It may | |
2333 | convert a unibyte string to multibyte if necessary. | |
2334 | ||
1c14ba45 | 2335 | +++ |
9662da0b GM |
2336 | ** The value of the `help-echo' text property is called as a function |
2337 | or evaluated, if it is not a string already, to obtain a help string. | |
d5aa31d8 | 2338 | |
7fce7efb DL |
2339 | ** Function `make-obsolete' now has an optional arg to say when the |
2340 | function was declared obsolete. | |
2341 | ||
1c14ba45 | 2342 | +++ |
5d94f558 | 2343 | ** Function `plist-member' is renamed from `widget-plist-member' (which is |
7fce7efb DL |
2344 | retained as an alias). |
2345 | ||
f98d3086 SM |
2346 | ** Easy-menu's :filter now works as in XEmacs. |
2347 | It takes the unconverted (i.e. XEmacs) form of the menu and the result | |
2348 | is automatically converted to Emacs' form. | |
2349 | ||
87efd256 GM |
2350 | ** The new function `window-list' has been defined |
2351 | ||
39b39373 GM |
2352 | - Function: window-list &optional FRAME WINDOW MINIBUF |
2353 | ||
2354 | Return a list of windows on FRAME, starting with WINDOW. FRAME nil or | |
2355 | omitted means use the selected frame. WINDOW nil or omitted means use | |
2356 | the selected window. MINIBUF t means include the minibuffer window, | |
2357 | even if it isn't active. MINIBUF nil or omitted means include the | |
2358 | minibuffer window only if it's active. MINIBUF neither nil nor t | |
2359 | means never include the minibuffer window. | |
87efd256 | 2360 | |
67c9a1d2 GM |
2361 | ** There's a new function `some-window' defined as follows |
2362 | ||
2363 | - Function: some-window PREDICATE &optional MINIBUF ALL-FRAMES DEFAULT | |
2364 | ||
2365 | Return a window satisfying PREDICATE. | |
2366 | ||
2367 | This function cycles through all visible windows using `walk-windows', | |
2368 | calling PREDICATE on each one. PREDICATE is called with a window as | |
2369 | argument. The first window for which PREDICATE returns a non-nil | |
2370 | value is returned. If no window satisfies PREDICATE, DEFAULT is | |
2371 | returned. | |
2372 | ||
2373 | Optional second arg MINIBUF t means count the minibuffer window even | |
2374 | if not active. MINIBUF nil or omitted means count the minibuffer iff | |
2375 | it is active. MINIBUF neither t nor nil means not to count the | |
2376 | minibuffer even if it is active. | |
2377 | ||
2378 | Several frames may share a single minibuffer; if the minibuffer | |
2379 | counts, all windows on all frames that share that minibuffer count | |
2380 | too. Therefore, if you are using a separate minibuffer frame | |
2381 | and the minibuffer is active and MINIBUF says it counts, | |
2382 | `walk-windows' includes the windows in the frame from which you | |
2383 | entered the minibuffer, as well as the minibuffer window. | |
2384 | ||
2385 | ALL-FRAMES is the optional third argument. | |
2386 | ALL-FRAMES nil or omitted means cycle within the frames as specified above. | |
2387 | ALL-FRAMES = `visible' means include windows on all visible frames. | |
2388 | ALL-FRAMES = 0 means include windows on all visible and iconified frames. | |
2389 | ALL-FRAMES = t means include windows on all frames including invisible frames. | |
2390 | If ALL-FRAMES is a frame, it means include windows on that frame. | |
2391 | Anything else means restrict to the selected frame. | |
2392 | ||
ead53494 GM |
2393 | ** The function `single-key-description' now encloses function key and |
2394 | event names in angle brackets. When called with a second optional | |
2395 | argument non-nil, angle brackets won't be printed. | |
dce6b995 | 2396 | |
25fa6deb GM |
2397 | ** If the variable `message-truncate-lines' is bound to t around a |
2398 | call to `message', the echo area will not be resized to display that | |
088831a6 GM |
2399 | message; it will be truncated instead, as it was done in 20.x. |
2400 | Default value is nil. | |
25fa6deb | 2401 | |
5d94f558 | 2402 | ** The user option `line-number-display-limit' can now be set to nil, |
1681ead6 GM |
2403 | meaning no limit. |
2404 | ||
5d94f558 | 2405 | ** `select-safe-coding-system' now also checks the most preferred |
c08398de DL |
2406 | coding-system if buffer-file-coding-system is `undecided' and |
2407 | DEFAULT-CODING-SYSTEM is not specified, | |
2408 | ||
9b2999d0 DL |
2409 | +++ |
2410 | ** The function `subr-arity' provides information about the argument | |
2411 | list of a primitive. | |
de370c4c | 2412 | |
c286608e SM |
2413 | ** `where-is-internal' now also accepts a list of keymaps. |
2414 | ||
9b2999d0 | 2415 | +++ |
80c05bd3 DL |
2416 | ** The text property `keymap' specifies a key map which overrides the |
2417 | buffer's local map and the map specified by the `local-map' property. | |
2418 | This is probably what most current uses of `local-map' want, rather | |
2419 | than replacing the local map. | |
2420 | ||
14fd0da3 DL |
2421 | ** The obsolete variables `before-change-function' and |
2422 | `after-change-function' are no longer acted upon and have been | |
2423 | removed. Use `before-change-functions' and `after-change-functions' | |
2424 | instead. | |
45f485a6 GM |
2425 | |
2426 | ** The function `apropos-mode' runs the hook `apropos-mode-hook'. | |
2427 | ||
f6499c03 | 2428 | +++ |
c286608e SM |
2429 | ** `concat' no longer accepts individual integer arguments, |
2430 | as promised long ago. | |
f0298744 | 2431 | |
5d94f558 | 2432 | ** The new function `float-time' returns the current time as a float. |
05197f40 | 2433 | \f |
a933dad1 DL |
2434 | * Lisp changes in Emacs 21.1 (see following page for display-related features) |
2435 | ||
2436 | Note that +++ before an item means the Lisp manual has been updated. | |
2437 | --- means that I have decided it does not need to be in the Lisp manual. | |
2438 | When you add a new item, please add it without either +++ or --- | |
2439 | so I will know I still need to look at it -- rms. | |
2440 | ||
697617d9 GM |
2441 | *** The features `md5' and `overlay' are now provided by default. |
2442 | ||
85c75536 MB |
2443 | *** The special form `save-restriction' now works correctly even if the |
2444 | buffer is widened inside the save-restriction and changes made outside | |
2445 | the original restriction. Previously, doing this would cause the saved | |
2446 | restriction to be restored incorrectly. | |
2447 | ||
0b8a3a6d DL |
2448 | *** The functions `find-charset-region' and `find-charset-string' include |
2449 | `eight-bit-control' and/or `eight-bit-graphic' in the returned list | |
028d739a | 2450 | when they find 8-bit characters. Previously, they included `ascii' in a |
0b8a3a6d DL |
2451 | multibyte buffer and `unknown' in a unibyte buffer. |
2452 | ||
2453 | *** The functions `set-buffer-modified', `string-as-multibyte' and | |
2454 | `string-as-unibyte' change the byte sequence of a buffer if it | |
2455 | contains a character from the `eight-bit-control' character set. | |
2456 | ||
2457 | *** The handling of multibyte sequences in a multibyte buffer is | |
2458 | changed. Previously, a byte sequence matching the pattern | |
2459 | [\200-\237][\240-\377]+ was interpreted as a single character | |
2460 | regardless of the length of the trailing bytes [\240-\377]+. Thus, if | |
2461 | the sequence was longer than what the leading byte indicated, the | |
2462 | extra trailing bytes were ignored by Lisp functions. Now such extra | |
2463 | bytes are independent 8-bit characters belonging to the charset | |
2464 | eight-bit-graphic. | |
2465 | ||
2466 | ** Fontsets are now implemented using char-tables. | |
2467 | ||
9b2a085d | 2468 | A fontset can now be specified for each independent character, for |
0b8a3a6d DL |
2469 | a group of characters or for a character set rather than just for a |
2470 | character set as previously. | |
2471 | ||
2472 | *** The arguments of the function `set-fontset-font' are changed. | |
2473 | They are NAME, CHARACTER, FONTNAME, and optional FRAME. The function | |
2474 | modifies fontset NAME to use FONTNAME for CHARACTER. | |
2475 | ||
2476 | CHARACTER may be a cons (FROM . TO), where FROM and TO are non-generic | |
2477 | characters. In that case FONTNAME is used for all characters in the | |
2478 | range FROM and TO (inclusive). CHARACTER may be a charset. In that | |
2479 | case FONTNAME is used for all character in the charset. | |
2480 | ||
2481 | FONTNAME may be a cons (FAMILY . REGISTRY), where FAMILY is the family | |
9b2a085d | 2482 | name of a font and REGISTRY is a registry name of a font. |
0b8a3a6d DL |
2483 | |
2484 | *** Variable x-charset-registry has been deleted. The default charset | |
2485 | registries of character sets are set in the default fontset | |
2486 | "fontset-default". | |
2487 | ||
2488 | *** The function `create-fontset-from-fontset-spec' ignores the second | |
2489 | argument STYLE-VARIANT. It never creates style-variant fontsets. | |
2490 | ||
2491 | ** The method of composing characters is changed. Now character | |
2492 | composition is done by a special text property `composition' in | |
2493 | buffers and strings. | |
2494 | ||
2495 | *** Charset composition is deleted. Emacs never creates a `composite | |
2496 | character' which is an independent character with a unique character | |
2497 | code. Thus the following functions handling `composite characters' | |
2498 | have been deleted: composite-char-component, | |
2499 | composite-char-component-count, composite-char-composition-rule, | |
2500 | composite-char-composition-rule and decompose-composite-char delete. | |
2501 | The variables leading-code-composition and min-composite-char have | |
2502 | also been deleted. | |
2503 | ||
2504 | *** Three more glyph reference points are added. They can be used to | |
2505 | specify a composition rule. See the documentation of the variable | |
2506 | `reference-point-alist' for more detail. | |
2507 | ||
2508 | *** The function `compose-region' takes new arguments COMPONENTS and | |
2509 | MODIFICATION-FUNC. With COMPONENTS, you can specify not only a | |
2510 | composition rule but also characters to be composed. Such characters | |
2511 | may differ between buffer and string text. | |
2512 | ||
2513 | *** The function `compose-string' takes new arguments START, END, | |
2514 | COMPONENTS, and MODIFICATION-FUNC. | |
2515 | ||
2516 | *** The function `compose-string' puts text property `composition' | |
2517 | directly on the argument STRING instead of returning a new string. | |
2518 | Likewise, the function `decompose-string' just removes text property | |
2519 | `composition' from STRING. | |
2520 | ||
2521 | *** The new function `find-composition' returns information about | |
2522 | a composition at a specified position in a buffer or a string. | |
2523 | ||
2524 | *** The function `decompose-composite-char' is now labeled as | |
2525 | obsolete. | |
2526 | ||
889be0a1 DL |
2527 | ** The new coding system `mac-roman' is primarily intended for use on |
2528 | the Macintosh but may be used generally for Macintosh-encoded text. | |
2529 | ||
965bc065 | 2530 | ** The new character sets `mule-unicode-0100-24ff', |
1e36ff68 DL |
2531 | `mule-unicode-2500-33ff', and `mule-unicode-e000-ffff' have been |
2532 | introduced for Unicode characters in the range U+0100..U+24FF, | |
2533 | U+2500..U+33FF, U+E000..U+FFFF respectively. | |
0b8a3a6d | 2534 | |
1e36ff68 DL |
2535 | ** The new coding system `mule-utf-8' has been added. It provides |
2536 | limited support for decoding/encoding UTF-8 text. For details, please | |
2537 | see the documentation string of this coding system. | |
23cfab61 | 2538 | |
0b8a3a6d | 2539 | ** The new character sets `japanese-jisx0213-1' and |
1e36ff68 DL |
2540 | `japanese-jisx0213-2' have been introduced for the new Japanese |
2541 | standard JIS X 0213 Plane 1 and Plane 2. | |
2542 | ||
2543 | ** The new character sets `latin-iso8859-14' and `latin-iso8859-15' | |
2544 | have been introduced. | |
0b8a3a6d DL |
2545 | |
2546 | +++ | |
2547 | ** The new character sets `eight-bit-control' and `eight-bit-graphic' | |
1e36ff68 | 2548 | have been introduced for 8-bit characters in the ranges 0x80..0x9F and |
028d739a DL |
2549 | 0xA0..0xFF respectively. Note that the multibyte representation of |
2550 | eight-bit-control is never exposed; this leads to an exception in the | |
2551 | emacs-mule coding system, which encodes everything else to the | |
2018166d DL |
2552 | buffer/string internal representation. Note that to search for |
2553 | eight-bit-graphic characters in a multibyte buffer, the search string | |
2554 | must be multibyte, otherwise such characters will be converted to | |
2555 | their multibyte equivalent. | |
0b8a3a6d | 2556 | |
399da7e3 | 2557 | +++ |
f0124b4a DL |
2558 | ** If the APPEND argument of `write-region' is an integer, it seeks to |
2559 | that offset in the file before writing. | |
2560 | ||
f98d3086 SM |
2561 | ** The function `add-minor-mode' has been added for convenience and |
2562 | compatibility with XEmacs (and is used internally by define-minor-mode). | |
7464346d | 2563 | |
612839b6 GM |
2564 | ** The function `shell-command' now sets the default directory of the |
2565 | `*Shell Command Output*' buffer to the default directory of the buffer | |
2566 | from which the command was issued. | |
2567 | ||
2568 | ** The functions `query-replace', `query-replace-regexp', | |
2569 | `query-replace-regexp-eval' `map-query-replace-regexp', | |
2570 | `replace-string', `replace-regexp', and `perform-replace' take two | |
2571 | additional optional arguments START and END that specify the region to | |
2572 | operate on. | |
2573 | ||
271b4185 GM |
2574 | ** The new function `count-screen-lines' is a more flexible alternative |
2575 | to `window-buffer-height'. | |
2576 | ||
2577 | - Function: count-screen-lines &optional BEG END COUNT-FINAL-NEWLINE WINDOW | |
2578 | ||
2579 | Return the number of screen lines in the region between BEG and END. | |
2580 | The number of screen lines may be different from the number of actual | |
2581 | lines, due to line breaking, display table, etc. | |
2582 | ||
2583 | Optional arguments BEG and END default to `point-min' and `point-max' | |
2584 | respectively. | |
2585 | ||
8a33023e | 2586 | If region ends with a newline, ignore it unless optional third argument |
271b4185 GM |
2587 | COUNT-FINAL-NEWLINE is non-nil. |
2588 | ||
2589 | The optional fourth argument WINDOW specifies the window used for | |
2590 | obtaining parameters such as width, horizontal scrolling, and so | |
2591 | on. The default is to use the selected window's parameters. | |
2592 | ||
2593 | Like `vertical-motion', `count-screen-lines' always uses the current | |
2594 | buffer, regardless of which buffer is displayed in WINDOW. This makes | |
2595 | possible to use `count-screen-lines' in any buffer, whether or not it | |
2596 | is currently displayed in some window. | |
2597 | ||
3c30cb6e DL |
2598 | ** The new function `mapc' is like `mapcar' but doesn't collect the |
2599 | argument function's results. | |
2600 | ||
62f20204 GM |
2601 | ** The functions base64-decode-region and base64-decode-string now |
2602 | signal an error instead of returning nil if decoding fails. | |
2603 | ||
c0510d27 | 2604 | ** The function sendmail-user-agent-compose now recognizes a `body' |
b4da8dfa | 2605 | header in the list of headers passed to it. |
c0510d27 GM |
2606 | |
2607 | ** The new function member-ignore-case works like `member', but | |
2608 | ignores differences in case and text representation. | |
2609 | ||
2610 | ** The buffer-local variable cursor-type can be used to specify the | |
19d1bc27 GM |
2611 | cursor to use in windows displaying a buffer. Values are interpreted |
2612 | as follows: | |
2613 | ||
2614 | t use the cursor specified for the frame (default) | |
2615 | nil don't display a cursor | |
2616 | `bar' display a bar cursor with default width | |
2617 | (bar . WIDTH) display a bar cursor with width WIDTH | |
2618 | others display a box cursor. | |
2619 | ||
9a0dd3dc GM |
2620 | ** The variable open-paren-in-column-0-is-defun-start controls whether |
2621 | an open parenthesis in column 0 is considered to be the start of a | |
2622 | defun. If set, the default, it is considered a defun start. If not | |
2623 | set, an open parenthesis in column 0 has no special meaning. | |
2624 | ||
d7b511c4 | 2625 | ** The new function `string-to-syntax' can be used to translate syntax |
dc1178bf | 2626 | specifications in string form as accepted by `modify-syntax-entry' to |
d7b511c4 GM |
2627 | the cons-cell form that is used for the values of the `syntax-table' |
2628 | text property, and in `font-lock-syntactic-keywords'. | |
2629 | ||
2630 | Example: | |
2631 | ||
2632 | (string-to-syntax "()") | |
2633 | => (4 . 41) | |
2634 | ||
1fa28578 GM |
2635 | ** Emacs' reader supports CL read syntax for integers in bases |
2636 | other than 10. | |
2637 | ||
2638 | *** `#BINTEGER' or `#bINTEGER' reads INTEGER in binary (radix 2). | |
2639 | INTEGER optionally contains a sign. | |
2640 | ||
5d94f558 | 2641 | #b1111 |
1fa28578 | 2642 | => 15 |
5d94f558 | 2643 | #b-1111 |
1fa28578 GM |
2644 | => -15 |
2645 | ||
2646 | *** `#OINTEGER' or `#oINTEGER' reads INTEGER in octal (radix 8). | |
2647 | ||
5d94f558 | 2648 | #o666 |
1fa28578 GM |
2649 | => 438 |
2650 | ||
2651 | *** `#XINTEGER' or `#xINTEGER' reads INTEGER in hexadecimal (radix 16). | |
2652 | ||
5d94f558 | 2653 | #xbeef |
1fa28578 GM |
2654 | => 48815 |
2655 | ||
2656 | *** `#RADIXrINTEGER' reads INTEGER in radix RADIX, 2 <= RADIX <= 36. | |
2657 | ||
5d94f558 | 2658 | #2R-111 |
1fa28578 | 2659 | => -7 |
5d94f558 | 2660 | #25rah |
1fa28578 GM |
2661 | => 267 |
2662 | ||
3d4ff2dd | 2663 | ** The function `documentation-property' now evaluates the value of |
f98d3086 | 2664 | the given property to obtain a string if it doesn't refer to etc/DOC |
e9b4e5ff GM |
2665 | and isn't a string. |
2666 | ||
3d4ff2dd GM |
2667 | ** If called for a symbol, the function `documentation' now looks for |
2668 | a `function-documentation' property of that symbol. If it has a non-nil | |
2669 | value, the documentation is taken from that value. If the value is | |
2670 | not a string, it is evaluated to obtain a string. | |
2671 | ||
16ce590d DL |
2672 | +++ |
2673 | ** The last argument of `define-key-after' defaults to t for convenience. | |
2674 | ||
73825616 | 2675 | ** The new function `replace-regexp-in-string' replaces all matches |
16ce590d DL |
2676 | for a regexp in a string. |
2677 | ||
2678 | ** `mouse-position' now runs the abnormal hook | |
2679 | `mouse-position-function'. | |
2680 | ||
723e779c GM |
2681 | ** The function string-to-number now returns a float for numbers |
2682 | that don't fit into a Lisp integer. | |
2683 | ||
d1e103b2 GM |
2684 | ** The variable keyword-symbols-constants-flag has been removed. |
2685 | Keywords are now always considered constants. | |
2686 | ||
31047e0d DL |
2687 | +++ |
2688 | ** The new function `delete-and-extract-region' deletes text and | |
2689 | returns it. | |
2690 | ||
7a85e4df GM |
2691 | ** The function `clear-this-command-keys' now also clears the vector |
2692 | returned by function `recent-keys'. | |
2693 | ||
02b14400 RS |
2694 | +++ |
2695 | ** Variables `beginning-of-defun-function' and `end-of-defun-function' | |
2696 | can be used to define handlers for the functions that find defuns. | |
2697 | Major modes can define these locally instead of rebinding M-C-a | |
2698 | etc. if the normal conventions for defuns are not appropriate for the | |
2699 | mode. | |
404fa7d6 | 2700 | |
02b14400 | 2701 | +++ |
8964fec7 SM |
2702 | ** easy-mmode-define-minor-mode now takes an additional BODY argument |
2703 | and is renamed `define-minor-mode'. | |
2704 | ||
02b14400 RS |
2705 | +++ |
2706 | ** If an abbrev has a hook function which is a symbol, and that symbol | |
2707 | has a non-nil `no-self-insert' property, the return value of the hook | |
2708 | function specifies whether an expansion has been done or not. If it | |
2709 | returns nil, abbrev-expand also returns nil, meaning "no expansion has | |
2710 | been performed." | |
2711 | ||
2712 | When abbrev expansion is done by typing a self-inserting character, | |
2713 | and the abbrev has a hook with the `no-self-insert' property, and the | |
2714 | hook function returns non-nil meaning expansion has been done, | |
2715 | then the self-inserting character is not inserted. | |
ef961722 | 2716 | |
02b14400 | 2717 | +++ |
81da8b32 GM |
2718 | ** The function `intern-soft' now accepts a symbol as first argument. |
2719 | In this case, that exact symbol is looked up in the specified obarray, | |
2720 | and the function's value is nil if it is not found. | |
2721 | ||
02b14400 | 2722 | +++ |
9e207b90 GM |
2723 | ** The new macro `with-syntax-table' can be used to evaluate forms |
2724 | with the syntax table of the current buffer temporarily set to a | |
2725 | specified table. | |
2726 | ||
2727 | (with-syntax-table TABLE &rest BODY) | |
2728 | ||
2729 | Evaluate BODY with syntax table of current buffer set to a copy of | |
03d9c64c GM |
2730 | TABLE. The current syntax table is saved, BODY is evaluated, and the |
2731 | saved table is restored, even in case of an abnormal exit. Value is | |
2732 | what BODY returns. | |
9e207b90 | 2733 | |
02b14400 | 2734 | +++ |
d7f89643 | 2735 | ** Regular expressions now support intervals \{n,m\} as well as |
95cd4c40 | 2736 | Perl's shy-groups \(?:...\) and non-greedy *? +? and ?? operators. |
8a33023e | 2737 | Also back-references like \2 are now considered as an error if the |
601e0081 SM |
2738 | corresponding subgroup does not exist (or is not closed yet). |
2739 | Previously it would have been silently turned into `2' (ignoring the `\'). | |
8964fec7 | 2740 | |
02b14400 | 2741 | +++ |
dde9e75a GM |
2742 | ** The optional argument BUFFER of function file-local-copy has been |
2743 | removed since it wasn't used by anything. | |
2744 | ||
02b14400 | 2745 | +++ |
9da30515 GM |
2746 | ** The file name argument of function `file-locked-p' is now required |
2747 | instead of being optional. | |
2748 | ||
02b14400 | 2749 | +++ |
d20679eb GM |
2750 | ** The new built-in error `text-read-only' is signaled when trying to |
2751 | modify read-only text. | |
2752 | ||
fbc164de PE |
2753 | ** New functions and variables for locales. |
2754 | ||
2018166d | 2755 | +++ |
fbc164de PE |
2756 | The new variable `locale-coding-system' specifies how to encode and |
2757 | decode strings passed to low-level message functions like strerror and | |
b718982a PE |
2758 | time functions like strftime. The new variables |
2759 | `system-messages-locale' and `system-time-locale' give the system | |
2760 | locales to be used when invoking these two types of functions. | |
fbc164de PE |
2761 | |
2762 | The new function `set-locale-environment' sets the language | |
2763 | environment, preferred coding system, and locale coding system from | |
2764 | the system locale as specified by the LC_ALL, LC_CTYPE, and LANG | |
b718982a PE |
2765 | environment variables. Normally, it is invoked during startup and need |
2766 | not be invoked thereafter. It uses the new variables | |
2767 | `locale-language-names', `locale-charset-language-names', and | |
2768 | `locale-preferred-coding-systems' to make its decisions. | |
fbc164de | 2769 | |
02b14400 | 2770 | +++ |
863476d1 SM |
2771 | ** syntax tables now understand nested comments. |
2772 | To declare a comment syntax as allowing nesting, just add an `n' | |
2773 | modifier to either of the characters of the comment end and the comment | |
2774 | start sequences. | |
2775 | ||
02b14400 | 2776 | +++ |
ef6d912c GM |
2777 | ** The function `pixmap-spec-p' has been renamed `bitmap-spec-p' |
2778 | because `bitmap' is more in line with the usual X terminology. | |
2779 | ||
02b14400 | 2780 | +++ |
a933dad1 DL |
2781 | ** New function `propertize' |
2782 | ||
2783 | The new function `propertize' can be used to conveniently construct | |
2784 | strings with text properties. | |
2785 | ||
2786 | - Function: propertize STRING &rest PROPERTIES | |
2787 | ||
2788 | Value is a copy of STRING with text properties assigned as specified | |
2789 | by PROPERTIES. PROPERTIES is a sequence of pairs PROPERTY VALUE, with | |
2790 | PROPERTY being the name of a text property and VALUE being the | |
2791 | specified value of that property. Example: | |
2792 | ||
2793 | (propertize "foo" 'face 'bold 'read-only t) | |
2794 | ||
2795 | +++ | |
2796 | ** push and pop macros. | |
2797 | ||
02b14400 RS |
2798 | Simple versions of the push and pop macros of Common Lisp |
2799 | are now defined in Emacs Lisp. These macros allow only symbols | |
a933dad1 DL |
2800 | as the place that holds the list to be changed. |
2801 | ||
2802 | (push NEWELT LISTNAME) add NEWELT to the front of LISTNAME's value. | |
2803 | (pop LISTNAME) return first elt of LISTNAME, and remove it | |
2804 | (thus altering the value of LISTNAME). | |
2805 | ||
02b14400 RS |
2806 | ** New dolist and dotimes macros. |
2807 | ||
6c7fd5aa RS |
2808 | Simple versions of the dolist and dotimes macros of Common Lisp |
2809 | are now defined in Emacs Lisp. | |
02b14400 RS |
2810 | |
2811 | (dolist (VAR LIST [RESULT]) BODY...) | |
2812 | Execute body once for each element of LIST, | |
2813 | using the variable VAR to hold the current element. | |
2814 | Then return the value of RESULT, or nil if RESULT is omitted. | |
2815 | ||
2816 | (dotimes (VAR COUNT [RESULT]) BODY...) | |
2817 | Execute BODY with VAR bound to successive integers running from 0, | |
2818 | inclusive, to COUNT, exclusive. | |
2819 | Then return the value of RESULT, or nil if RESULT is omitted. | |
2820 | ||
a933dad1 | 2821 | +++ |
6c083b4c GM |
2822 | ** Regular expressions now support Posix character classes such as |
2823 | [:alpha:], [:space:] and so on. These must be used within a character | |
2824 | class--for instance, [-[:digit:].+] matches digits or a period | |
2825 | or a sign. | |
a933dad1 DL |
2826 | |
2827 | [:digit:] matches 0 through 9 | |
2828 | [:cntrl:] matches ASCII control characters | |
2829 | [:xdigit:] matches 0 through 9, a through f and A through F. | |
2830 | [:blank:] matches space and tab only | |
2831 | [:graph:] matches graphic characters--everything except ASCII control chars, | |
2832 | space, and DEL. | |
2833 | [:print:] matches printing characters--everything except ASCII control chars | |
2834 | and DEL. | |
2835 | [:alnum:] matches letters and digits. | |
2836 | (But at present, for multibyte characters, | |
2837 | it matches anything that has word syntax.) | |
2838 | [:alpha:] matches letters. | |
2839 | (But at present, for multibyte characters, | |
2840 | it matches anything that has word syntax.) | |
2841 | [:ascii:] matches ASCII (unibyte) characters. | |
2842 | [:nonascii:] matches non-ASCII (multibyte) characters. | |
2843 | [:lower:] matches anything lower-case. | |
2844 | [:punct:] matches punctuation. | |
2845 | (But at present, for multibyte characters, | |
2846 | it matches anything that has non-word syntax.) | |
2847 | [:space:] matches anything that has whitespace syntax. | |
2848 | [:upper:] matches anything upper-case. | |
2849 | [:word:] matches anything that has word syntax. | |
2850 | ||
2851 | +++ | |
2852 | ** Emacs now has built-in hash tables. | |
2853 | ||
2854 | The following functions are defined for hash tables: | |
2855 | ||
2856 | - Function: make-hash-table ARGS | |
2857 | ||
2858 | The argument list ARGS consists of keyword/argument pairs. All arguments | |
2859 | are optional. The following arguments are defined: | |
2860 | ||
2861 | :test TEST | |
2862 | ||
2863 | TEST must be a symbol specifying how to compare keys. Default is `eql'. | |
2864 | Predefined are `eq', `eql' and `equal'. If TEST is not predefined, | |
2865 | it must have been defined with `define-hash-table-test'. | |
2866 | ||
2867 | :size SIZE | |
2868 | ||
2869 | SIZE must be an integer > 0 giving a hint to the implementation how | |
2870 | many elements will be put in the hash table. Default size is 65. | |
2871 | ||
2872 | :rehash-size REHASH-SIZE | |
2873 | ||
2874 | REHASH-SIZE specifies by how much to grow a hash table once it becomes | |
2875 | full. If REHASH-SIZE is an integer, add that to the hash table's old | |
2876 | size to get the new size. Otherwise, REHASH-SIZE must be a float > | |
2877 | 1.0, and the new size is computed by multiplying REHASH-SIZE with the | |
2878 | old size. Default rehash size is 1.5. | |
2879 | ||
2880 | :rehash-threshold THRESHOLD | |
2881 | ||
2882 | THRESHOLD must be a float > 0 and <= 1.0 specifying when to resize the | |
2883 | hash table. It is resized when the ratio of (number of entries) / | |
2884 | (size of hash table) is >= THRESHOLD. Default threshold is 0.8. | |
2885 | ||
2886 | :weakness WEAK | |
2887 | ||
b548072f GM |
2888 | WEAK must be either nil, one of the symbols `key, `value', |
2889 | `key-or-value', `key-and-value', or t, meaning the same as | |
2890 | `key-and-value'. Entries are removed from weak tables during garbage | |
2891 | collection if their key and/or value are not referenced elsewhere | |
2892 | outside of the hash table. Default are non-weak hash tables. | |
a933dad1 DL |
2893 | |
2894 | - Function: makehash &optional TEST | |
2895 | ||
2896 | Similar to make-hash-table, but only TEST can be specified. | |
2897 | ||
2898 | - Function: hash-table-p TABLE | |
2899 | ||
2900 | Returns non-nil if TABLE is a hash table object. | |
2901 | ||
2902 | - Function: copy-hash-table TABLE | |
2903 | ||
2904 | Returns a copy of TABLE. Only the table itself is copied, keys and | |
2905 | values are shared. | |
2906 | ||
2907 | - Function: hash-table-count TABLE | |
2908 | ||
2909 | Returns the number of entries in TABLE. | |
2910 | ||
2911 | - Function: hash-table-rehash-size TABLE | |
2912 | ||
2913 | Returns the rehash size of TABLE. | |
2914 | ||
2915 | - Function: hash-table-rehash-threshold TABLE | |
2916 | ||
2917 | Returns the rehash threshold of TABLE. | |
2918 | ||
2919 | - Function: hash-table-rehash-size TABLE | |
2920 | ||
2921 | Returns the size of TABLE. | |
2922 | ||
d96d6bb0 | 2923 | - Function: hash-table-test TABLE |
a933dad1 DL |
2924 | |
2925 | Returns the test TABLE uses to compare keys. | |
2926 | ||
2927 | - Function: hash-table-weakness TABLE | |
2928 | ||
2929 | Returns the weakness specified for TABLE. | |
2930 | ||
2931 | - Function: clrhash TABLE | |
2932 | ||
2933 | Clear TABLE. | |
2934 | ||
2935 | - Function: gethash KEY TABLE &optional DEFAULT | |
2936 | ||
2937 | Look up KEY in TABLE and return its associated VALUE or DEFAULT if | |
2938 | not found. | |
2939 | ||
79214ddf | 2940 | - Function: puthash KEY VALUE TABLE |
a933dad1 DL |
2941 | |
2942 | Associate KEY with VALUE in TABLE. If KEY is already associated with | |
2943 | another value, replace the old value with VALUE. | |
2944 | ||
2945 | - Function: remhash KEY TABLE | |
2946 | ||
2947 | Remove KEY from TABLE if it is there. | |
2948 | ||
2949 | - Function: maphash FUNCTION TABLE | |
2950 | ||
2951 | Call FUNCTION for all elements in TABLE. FUNCTION must take two | |
2952 | arguments KEY and VALUE. | |
2953 | ||
2954 | - Function: sxhash OBJ | |
2955 | ||
2956 | Return a hash code for Lisp object OBJ. | |
2957 | ||
2958 | - Function: define-hash-table-test NAME TEST-FN HASH-FN | |
2959 | ||
2960 | Define a new hash table test named NAME. If NAME is specified as | |
2961 | a test in `make-hash-table', the table created will use TEST-FN for | |
79214ddf | 2962 | comparing keys, and HASH-FN to compute hash codes for keys. Test |
a933dad1 DL |
2963 | and hash function are stored as symbol property `hash-table-test' |
2964 | of NAME with a value of (TEST-FN HASH-FN). | |
2965 | ||
2966 | TEST-FN must take two arguments and return non-nil if they are the same. | |
2967 | ||
2968 | HASH-FN must take one argument and return an integer that is the hash | |
2969 | code of the argument. The function should use the whole range of | |
2970 | integer values for hash code computation, including negative integers. | |
2971 | ||
2972 | Example: The following creates a hash table whose keys are supposed to | |
2973 | be strings that are compared case-insensitively. | |
2974 | ||
2975 | (defun case-fold-string= (a b) | |
2976 | (compare-strings a nil nil b nil nil t)) | |
2977 | ||
2978 | (defun case-fold-string-hash (a) | |
2979 | (sxhash (upcase a))) | |
2980 | ||
79214ddf | 2981 | (define-hash-table-test 'case-fold 'case-fold-string= |
a933dad1 DL |
2982 | 'case-fold-string-hash)) |
2983 | ||
2984 | (make-hash-table :test 'case-fold) | |
2985 | ||
2986 | +++ | |
2987 | ** The Lisp reader handles circular structure. | |
2988 | ||
2989 | It now works to use the #N= and #N# constructs to represent | |
2990 | circular structures. For example, #1=(a . #1#) represents | |
2991 | a cons cell which is its own cdr. | |
2992 | ||
2993 | +++ | |
2994 | ** The Lisp printer handles circular structure. | |
2995 | ||
2996 | If you bind print-circle to a non-nil value, the Lisp printer outputs | |
2997 | #N= and #N# constructs to represent circular and shared structure. | |
2998 | ||
a933dad1 DL |
2999 | +++ |
3000 | ** If the second argument to `move-to-column' is anything but nil or | |
3001 | t, that means replace a tab with spaces if necessary to reach the | |
3002 | specified column, but do not add spaces at the end of the line if it | |
3003 | is too short to reach that column. | |
3004 | ||
3005 | +++ | |
3006 | ** perform-replace has a new feature: the REPLACEMENTS argument may | |
3007 | now be a cons cell (FUNCTION . DATA). This means to call FUNCTION | |
3008 | after each match to get the replacement text. FUNCTION is called with | |
3009 | two arguments: DATA, and the number of replacements already made. | |
3010 | ||
3011 | If the FROM-STRING contains any upper-case letters, | |
3012 | perform-replace also turns off `case-fold-search' temporarily | |
3013 | and inserts the replacement text without altering case in it. | |
3014 | ||
3015 | +++ | |
3016 | ** The function buffer-size now accepts an optional argument | |
3017 | to specify which buffer to return the size of. | |
3018 | ||
3019 | +++ | |
3020 | ** The calendar motion commands now run the normal hook | |
3021 | calendar-move-hook after moving point. | |
3022 | ||
3023 | +++ | |
3024 | ** The new variable small-temporary-file-directory specifies a | |
3025 | directory to use for creating temporary files that are likely to be | |
3026 | small. (Certain Emacs features use this directory.) If | |
3027 | small-temporary-file-directory is nil, they use | |
3028 | temporary-file-directory instead. | |
3029 | ||
3030 | +++ | |
3031 | ** The variable `inhibit-modification-hooks', if non-nil, inhibits all | |
3032 | the hooks that track changes in the buffer. This affects | |
3033 | `before-change-functions' and `after-change-functions', as well as | |
3034 | hooks attached to text properties and overlay properties. | |
3035 | ||
3036 | +++ | |
2018166d DL |
3037 | ** assq-delete-all is a new function that deletes all the |
3038 | elements of an alist which have a car `eq' to a particular value. | |
a933dad1 DL |
3039 | |
3040 | +++ | |
3041 | ** make-temp-file provides a more reliable way to create a temporary file. | |
3042 | ||
3043 | make-temp-file is used like make-temp-name, except that it actually | |
3044 | creates the file before it returns. This prevents a timing error, | |
3045 | ensuring that no other job can use the same name for a temporary file. | |
3046 | ||
3047 | +++ | |
3048 | ** New exclusive-open feature in `write-region' | |
3049 | ||
3050 | The optional seventh arg is now called MUSTBENEW. If non-nil, it insists | |
3051 | on a check for an existing file with the same name. If MUSTBENEW | |
3052 | is `excl', that means to get an error if the file already exists; | |
3053 | never overwrite. If MUSTBENEW is neither nil nor `excl', that means | |
3054 | ask for confirmation before overwriting, but do go ahead and | |
3055 | overwrite the file if the user gives confirmation. | |
3056 | ||
3057 | If the MUSTBENEW argument in `write-region' is `excl', | |
3058 | that means to use a special feature in the `open' system call | |
3059 | to get an error if the file exists at that time. | |
3060 | The error reported is `file-already-exists'. | |
3061 | ||
3062 | +++ | |
3063 | ** Function `format' now handles text properties. | |
3064 | ||
3065 | Text properties of the format string are applied to the result string. | |
3066 | If the result string is longer than the format string, text properties | |
3067 | ending at the end of the format string are extended to the end of the | |
3068 | result string. | |
3069 | ||
3070 | Text properties from string arguments are applied to the result | |
3071 | string where arguments appear in the result string. | |
3072 | ||
3073 | Example: | |
3074 | ||
3075 | (let ((s1 "hello, %s") | |
3076 | (s2 "world")) | |
3077 | (put-text-property 0 (length s1) 'face 'bold s1) | |
3078 | (put-text-property 0 (length s2) 'face 'italic s2) | |
b246b1f6 | 3079 | (format s1 s2)) |
a933dad1 DL |
3080 | |
3081 | results in a bold-face string with an italic `world' at the end. | |
3082 | ||
3083 | +++ | |
3084 | ** Messages can now be displayed with text properties. | |
3085 | ||
3086 | Text properties are handled as described above for function `format'. | |
3087 | The following example displays a bold-face message with an italic | |
3088 | argument in it. | |
3089 | ||
3090 | (let ((msg "hello, %s!") | |
3091 | (arg "world")) | |
3092 | (put-text-property 0 (length msg) 'face 'bold msg) | |
3093 | (put-text-property 0 (length arg) 'face 'italic arg) | |
3094 | (message msg arg)) | |
3095 | ||
3096 | +++ | |
3097 | ** Sound support | |
3098 | ||
3099 | Emacs supports playing sound files on GNU/Linux and the free BSDs | |
3100 | (Voxware driver and native BSD driver, aka as Luigi's driver). | |
3101 | ||
3102 | Currently supported file formats are RIFF-WAVE (*.wav) and Sun Audio | |
3103 | (*.au). You must configure Emacs with the option `--with-sound=yes' | |
3104 | to enable sound support. | |
3105 | ||
3106 | Sound files can be played by calling (play-sound SOUND). SOUND is a | |
3107 | list of the form `(sound PROPERTY...)'. The function is only defined | |
3108 | when sound support is present for the system on which Emacs runs. The | |
3109 | functions runs `play-sound-functions' with one argument which is the | |
3110 | sound to play, before playing the sound. | |
3111 | ||
3112 | The following sound properties are supported: | |
3113 | ||
3114 | - `:file FILE' | |
3115 | ||
3116 | FILE is a file name. If FILE isn't an absolute name, it will be | |
3117 | searched relative to `data-directory'. | |
3118 | ||
6fb40beb GM |
3119 | - `:data DATA' |
3120 | ||
3121 | DATA is a string containing sound data. Either :file or :data | |
3122 | may be present, but not both. | |
3123 | ||
a933dad1 DL |
3124 | - `:volume VOLUME' |
3125 | ||
3126 | VOLUME must be an integer in the range 0..100 or a float in the range | |
3127 | 0..1. This property is optional. | |
3128 | ||
01242779 DL |
3129 | - `:device DEVICE' |
3130 | ||
3131 | DEVICE is a string specifying the system device on which to play the | |
3132 | sound. The default device is system-dependent. | |
3133 | ||
a933dad1 DL |
3134 | Other properties are ignored. |
3135 | ||
01242779 DL |
3136 | An alternative interface is called as |
3137 | (play-sound-file FILE &optional VOLUME DEVICE). | |
3138 | ||
a933dad1 | 3139 | ** `multimedia' is a new Finder keyword and Custom group. |
356673d4 | 3140 | |
9b2999d0 | 3141 | +++ |
356673d4 DL |
3142 | ** keywordp is a new predicate to test efficiently for an object being |
3143 | a keyword symbol. | |
fc91dc2d GM |
3144 | |
3145 | ** Changes to garbage collection | |
3146 | ||
3147 | *** The function garbage-collect now additionally returns the number | |
3148 | of live and free strings. | |
3149 | ||
3150 | *** There is a new variable `strings-consed' holding the number of | |
3151 | strings that have been consed so far. | |
3152 | ||
05197f40 | 3153 | \f |
04545643 GM |
3154 | * Lisp-level Display features added after release 2.6 of the Emacs |
3155 | Lisp Manual | |
3156 | ||
f7eb32aa | 3157 | +++ |
a299a6f0 GM |
3158 | ** The user-option `resize-mini-windows' controls how Emacs resizes |
3159 | mini-windows. | |
3160 | ||
9b2999d0 | 3161 | +++ |
26fcde61 MB |
3162 | ** The function `pos-visible-in-window-p' now has a third optional |
3163 | argument, PARTIALLY. If a character is only partially visible, nil is | |
3164 | returned, unless PARTIALLY is non-nil. | |
ea4c1b7c | 3165 | |
a299a6f0 | 3166 | ** On window systems, `glyph-table' is no longer used. |
82a452c8 | 3167 | |
9a8d84ca DL |
3168 | +++ |
3169 | ** Help strings in menu items are now used to provide `help-echo' text. | |
2c69ced2 | 3170 | |
9b2999d0 | 3171 | +++ |
2c69ced2 GM |
3172 | ** The function `image-size' can be used to determine the size of an |
3173 | image. | |
3174 | ||
3175 | - Function: image-size SPEC &optional PIXELS FRAME | |
3176 | ||
3177 | Return the size of an image as a pair (WIDTH . HEIGHT). | |
3178 | ||
3179 | SPEC is an image specification. PIXELS non-nil means return sizes | |
3180 | measured in pixels, otherwise return sizes measured in canonical | |
3181 | character units (fractions of the width/height of the frame's default | |
3182 | font). FRAME is the frame on which the image will be displayed. | |
3183 | FRAME nil or omitted means use the selected frame. | |
3184 | ||
9b2999d0 | 3185 | +++ |
ebb8f116 GM |
3186 | ** The function `image-mask-p' can be used to determine if an image |
3187 | has a mask bitmap. | |
3188 | ||
3189 | - Function: image-mask-p SPEC &optional FRAME | |
3190 | ||
3191 | Return t if image SPEC has a mask bitmap. | |
3192 | FRAME is the frame on which the image will be displayed. FRAME nil | |
3193 | or omitted means use the selected frame. | |
3194 | ||
f6499c03 | 3195 | +++ |
0b8a3a6d DL |
3196 | ** The function `find-image' can be used to find a usable image |
3197 | satisfying one of a list of specifications. | |
3198 | ||
3199 | +++ | |
3200 | ** The STRING argument of `put-image' and `insert-image' is now | |
3201 | optional. | |
3202 | ||
f6499c03 DL |
3203 | +++ |
3204 | ** Image specifications may contain the property `:ascent center' (see | |
3205 | below). | |
04545643 | 3206 | |
05197f40 | 3207 | \f |
a933dad1 DL |
3208 | * New Lisp-level Display features in Emacs 21.1 |
3209 | ||
3210 | Note that +++ before an item means the Lisp manual has been updated. | |
3211 | --- means that I have decided it does not need to be in the Lisp manual. | |
3212 | When you add a new item, please add it without either +++ or --- | |
3213 | so I will know I still need to look at it -- rms. | |
3214 | ||
f6d3257b GM |
3215 | ** The function tty-suppress-bold-inverse-default-colors can be used |
3216 | to make Emacs avoid displaying text with bold black foreground on TTYs. | |
3217 | ||
3218 | Some terminals, notably PC consoles, emulate bold text by displaying | |
3219 | text in brighter colors. On such a console, a bold black foreground | |
3220 | is displayed in a gray color. If this turns out to be hard to read on | |
3221 | your monitor---the problem occurred with the mode line on | |
3222 | laptops---you can instruct Emacs to ignore the text's boldness, and to | |
3223 | just display it black instead. | |
3224 | ||
3225 | This situation can't be detected automatically. You will have to put | |
3226 | a line like | |
3227 | ||
3228 | (tty-suppress-bold-inverse-default-colors t) | |
3229 | ||
3230 | in your `.emacs'. | |
3231 | ||
a933dad1 DL |
3232 | ** New face implementation. |
3233 | ||
3234 | Emacs faces have been reimplemented from scratch. They don't use XLFD | |
3235 | font names anymore and face merging now works as expected. | |
3236 | ||
3237 | +++ | |
3238 | *** New faces. | |
3239 | ||
3240 | Each face can specify the following display attributes: | |
3241 | ||
3242 | 1. Font family or fontset alias name. | |
79214ddf | 3243 | |
a933dad1 DL |
3244 | 2. Relative proportionate width, aka character set width or set |
3245 | width (swidth), e.g. `semi-compressed'. | |
79214ddf | 3246 | |
a933dad1 | 3247 | 3. Font height in 1/10pt |
79214ddf | 3248 | |
a933dad1 | 3249 | 4. Font weight, e.g. `bold'. |
79214ddf | 3250 | |
a933dad1 | 3251 | 5. Font slant, e.g. `italic'. |
79214ddf | 3252 | |
a933dad1 | 3253 | 6. Foreground color. |
79214ddf | 3254 | |
a933dad1 DL |
3255 | 7. Background color. |
3256 | ||
3257 | 8. Whether or not characters should be underlined, and in what color. | |
3258 | ||
3259 | 9. Whether or not characters should be displayed in inverse video. | |
3260 | ||
3261 | 10. A background stipple, a bitmap. | |
3262 | ||
3263 | 11. Whether or not characters should be overlined, and in what color. | |
3264 | ||
3265 | 12. Whether or not characters should be strike-through, and in what | |
3266 | color. | |
3267 | ||
3268 | 13. Whether or not a box should be drawn around characters, its | |
3269 | color, the width of the box lines, and 3D appearance. | |
3270 | ||
3271 | Faces are frame-local by nature because Emacs allows to define the | |
3272 | same named face (face names are symbols) differently for different | |
3273 | frames. Each frame has an alist of face definitions for all named | |
3274 | faces. The value of a named face in such an alist is a Lisp vector | |
0969bd6a | 3275 | with the symbol `face' in slot 0, and a slot for each of the face |
a933dad1 DL |
3276 | attributes mentioned above. |
3277 | ||
3278 | There is also a global face alist `face-new-frame-defaults'. Face | |
3279 | definitions from this list are used to initialize faces of newly | |
3280 | created frames. | |
79214ddf | 3281 | |
a933dad1 DL |
3282 | A face doesn't have to specify all attributes. Those not specified |
3283 | have a nil value. Faces specifying all attributes are called | |
3284 | `fully-specified'. | |
3285 | ||
3286 | +++ | |
3287 | *** Face merging. | |
3288 | ||
3289 | The display style of a given character in the text is determined by | |
3290 | combining several faces. This process is called `face merging'. Any | |
3291 | aspect of the display style that isn't specified by overlays or text | |
3292 | properties is taken from the `default' face. Since it is made sure | |
3293 | that the default face is always fully-specified, face merging always | |
3294 | results in a fully-specified face. | |
3295 | ||
3296 | +++ | |
3297 | *** Face realization. | |
3298 | ||
3299 | After all face attributes for a character have been determined by | |
3300 | merging faces of that character, that face is `realized'. The | |
3301 | realization process maps face attributes to what is physically | |
3302 | available on the system where Emacs runs. The result is a `realized | |
3303 | face' in form of an internal structure which is stored in the face | |
3304 | cache of the frame on which it was realized. | |
3305 | ||
3306 | Face realization is done in the context of the charset of the | |
3307 | character to display because different fonts and encodings are used | |
3308 | for different charsets. In other words, for characters of different | |
3309 | charsets, different realized faces are needed to display them. | |
3310 | ||
3311 | Except for composite characters, faces are always realized for a | |
3312 | specific character set and contain a specific font, even if the face | |
3313 | being realized specifies a fontset. The reason is that the result of | |
3314 | the new font selection stage is better than what can be done with | |
3315 | statically defined font name patterns in fontsets. | |
3316 | ||
3317 | In unibyte text, Emacs' charsets aren't applicable; function | |
3318 | `char-charset' reports ASCII for all characters, including those > | |
3319 | 0x7f. The X registry and encoding of fonts to use is determined from | |
3320 | the variable `face-default-registry' in this case. The variable is | |
3321 | initialized at Emacs startup time from the font the user specified for | |
3322 | Emacs. | |
3323 | ||
3324 | Currently all unibyte text, i.e. all buffers with | |
3325 | `enable-multibyte-characters' nil are displayed with fonts of the same | |
3326 | registry and encoding `face-default-registry'. This is consistent | |
3327 | with the fact that languages can also be set globally, only. | |
3328 | ||
a7c13351 | 3329 | +++ |
a933dad1 DL |
3330 | **** Clearing face caches. |
3331 | ||
3332 | The Lisp function `clear-face-cache' can be called to clear face caches | |
3333 | on all frames. If called with a non-nil argument, it will also unload | |
3334 | unused fonts. | |
3335 | ||
3336 | +++ | |
3337 | *** Font selection. | |
79214ddf | 3338 | |
a933dad1 DL |
3339 | Font selection tries to find the best available matching font for a |
3340 | given (charset, face) combination. This is done slightly differently | |
3341 | for faces specifying a fontset, or a font family name. | |
3342 | ||
3343 | If the face specifies a fontset name, that fontset determines a | |
3344 | pattern for fonts of the given charset. If the face specifies a font | |
3345 | family, a font pattern is constructed. Charset symbols have a | |
3346 | property `x-charset-registry' for that purpose that maps a charset to | |
3347 | an XLFD registry and encoding in the font pattern constructed. | |
3348 | ||
3349 | Available fonts on the system on which Emacs runs are then matched | |
3350 | against the font pattern. The result of font selection is the best | |
3351 | match for the given face attributes in this font list. | |
3352 | ||
3353 | Font selection can be influenced by the user. | |
3354 | ||
3355 | The user can specify the relative importance he gives the face | |
3356 | attributes width, height, weight, and slant by setting | |
3357 | face-font-selection-order (faces.el) to a list of face attribute | |
3358 | names. The default is (:width :height :weight :slant), and means | |
3359 | that font selection first tries to find a good match for the font | |
3360 | width specified by a face, then---within fonts with that width---tries | |
3361 | to find a best match for the specified font height, etc. | |
3362 | ||
52d89894 GM |
3363 | Setting `face-font-family-alternatives' allows the user to specify |
3364 | alternative font families to try if a family specified by a face | |
89d57763 | 3365 | doesn't exist. |
af4bb4c8 KH |
3366 | |
3367 | Setting `face-font-registry-alternatives' allows the user to specify | |
8a33023e | 3368 | all alternative font registry names to try for a face specifying a |
af4bb4c8 KH |
3369 | registry. |
3370 | ||
8a33023e | 3371 | Please note that the interpretations of the above two variables are |
af4bb4c8 KH |
3372 | slightly different. |
3373 | ||
3374 | Setting face-ignored-fonts allows the user to ignore specific fonts. | |
3375 | ||
a933dad1 DL |
3376 | |
3377 | +++ | |
3378 | **** Scalable fonts | |
3379 | ||
3380 | Emacs can make use of scalable fonts but doesn't do so by default, | |
3381 | since the use of too many or too big scalable fonts may crash XFree86 | |
3382 | servers. | |
3383 | ||
3384 | To enable scalable font use, set the variable | |
b246b1f6 | 3385 | `scalable-fonts-allowed'. A value of nil, the default, means never use |
a933dad1 DL |
3386 | scalable fonts. A value of t means any scalable font may be used. |
3387 | Otherwise, the value must be a list of regular expressions. A | |
3388 | scalable font may then be used if it matches a regular expression from | |
3389 | that list. Example: | |
3390 | ||
3391 | (setq scalable-fonts-allowed '("muleindian-2$")) | |
3392 | ||
3393 | allows the use of scalable fonts with registry `muleindian-2'. | |
3394 | ||
3395 | +++ | |
3396 | *** Functions and variables related to font selection. | |
3397 | ||
3398 | - Function: x-family-fonts &optional FAMILY FRAME | |
3399 | ||
3400 | Return a list of available fonts of family FAMILY on FRAME. If FAMILY | |
3401 | is omitted or nil, list all families. Otherwise, FAMILY must be a | |
3402 | string, possibly containing wildcards `?' and `*'. | |
3403 | ||
3404 | If FRAME is omitted or nil, use the selected frame. Each element of | |
3405 | the result is a vector [FAMILY WIDTH POINT-SIZE WEIGHT SLANT FIXED-P | |
3406 | FULL REGISTRY-AND-ENCODING]. FAMILY is the font family name. | |
3407 | POINT-SIZE is the size of the font in 1/10 pt. WIDTH, WEIGHT, and | |
3408 | SLANT are symbols describing the width, weight and slant of the font. | |
3409 | These symbols are the same as for face attributes. FIXED-P is non-nil | |
3410 | if the font is fixed-pitch. FULL is the full name of the font, and | |
3411 | REGISTRY-AND-ENCODING is a string giving the registry and encoding of | |
3412 | the font. The result list is sorted according to the current setting | |
3413 | of the face font sort order. | |
3414 | ||
79214ddf | 3415 | - Function: x-font-family-list |
a933dad1 DL |
3416 | |
3417 | Return a list of available font families on FRAME. If FRAME is | |
3418 | omitted or nil, use the selected frame. Value is a list of conses | |
3419 | (FAMILY . FIXED-P) where FAMILY is a font family, and FIXED-P is | |
3420 | non-nil if fonts of that family are fixed-pitch. | |
3421 | ||
3422 | - Variable: font-list-limit | |
3423 | ||
3424 | Limit for font matching. If an integer > 0, font matching functions | |
3425 | won't load more than that number of fonts when searching for a | |
3426 | matching font. The default is currently 100. | |
3427 | ||
3428 | +++ | |
3429 | *** Setting face attributes. | |
3430 | ||
3431 | For the most part, the new face implementation is interface-compatible | |
3432 | with the old one. Old face attribute related functions are now | |
3433 | implemented in terms of the new functions `set-face-attribute' and | |
3434 | `face-attribute'. | |
3435 | ||
3436 | Face attributes are identified by their names which are keyword | |
3437 | symbols. All attributes can be set to `unspecified'. | |
3438 | ||
3439 | The following attributes are recognized: | |
3440 | ||
3441 | `:family' | |
3442 | ||
3443 | VALUE must be a string specifying the font family, e.g. ``courier'', | |
3444 | or a fontset alias name. If a font family is specified, wild-cards `*' | |
3445 | and `?' are allowed. | |
3446 | ||
3447 | `:width' | |
3448 | ||
3449 | VALUE specifies the relative proportionate width of the font to use. | |
3450 | It must be one of the symbols `ultra-condensed', `extra-condensed', | |
3451 | `condensed', `semi-condensed', `normal', `semi-expanded', `expanded', | |
3452 | `extra-expanded', or `ultra-expanded'. | |
3453 | ||
3454 | `:height' | |
3455 | ||
787345ff MB |
3456 | VALUE must be either an integer specifying the height of the font to use |
3457 | in 1/10 pt, a floating point number specifying the amount by which to | |
3458 | scale any underlying face, or a function, which is called with the old | |
3459 | height (from the underlying face), and should return the new height. | |
a933dad1 DL |
3460 | |
3461 | `:weight' | |
3462 | ||
3463 | VALUE specifies the weight of the font to use. It must be one of the | |
3464 | symbols `ultra-bold', `extra-bold', `bold', `semi-bold', `normal', | |
3465 | `semi-light', `light', `extra-light', `ultra-light'. | |
3466 | ||
3467 | `:slant' | |
3468 | ||
3469 | VALUE specifies the slant of the font to use. It must be one of the | |
3470 | symbols `italic', `oblique', `normal', `reverse-italic', or | |
3471 | `reverse-oblique'. | |
3472 | ||
3473 | `:foreground', `:background' | |
3474 | ||
3475 | VALUE must be a color name, a string. | |
3476 | ||
3477 | `:underline' | |
3478 | ||
3479 | VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be underlined. If | |
3480 | VALUE is t, underline with foreground color of the face. If VALUE is | |
3481 | a string, underline with that color. If VALUE is nil, explicitly | |
3482 | don't underline. | |
3483 | ||
3484 | `:overline' | |
3485 | ||
3486 | VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be overlined. If | |
3487 | VALUE is t, overline with foreground color of the face. If VALUE is a | |
3488 | string, overline with that color. If VALUE is nil, explicitly don't | |
3489 | overline. | |
3490 | ||
3491 | `:strike-through' | |
3492 | ||
3493 | VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be drawn with a line | |
3494 | striking through them. If VALUE is t, use the foreground color of the | |
3495 | face. If VALUE is a string, strike-through with that color. If VALUE | |
3496 | is nil, explicitly don't strike through. | |
3497 | ||
3498 | `:box' | |
3499 | ||
3500 | VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should have a box drawn | |
3501 | around them. If VALUE is nil, explicitly don't draw boxes. If | |
3502 | VALUE is t, draw a box with lines of width 1 in the foreground color | |
3503 | of the face. If VALUE is a string, the string must be a color name, | |
3504 | and the box is drawn in that color with a line width of 1. Otherwise, | |
3505 | VALUE must be a property list of the form `(:line-width WIDTH | |
3506 | :color COLOR :style STYLE)'. If a keyword/value pair is missing from | |
3507 | the property list, a default value will be used for the value, as | |
3508 | specified below. WIDTH specifies the width of the lines to draw; it | |
3509 | defaults to 1. COLOR is the name of the color to draw in, default is | |
3510 | the foreground color of the face for simple boxes, and the background | |
3511 | color of the face for 3D boxes. STYLE specifies whether a 3D box | |
3512 | should be draw. If STYLE is `released-button', draw a box looking | |
3513 | like a released 3D button. If STYLE is `pressed-button' draw a box | |
3514 | that appears like a pressed button. If STYLE is nil, the default if | |
3515 | the property list doesn't contain a style specification, draw a 2D | |
3516 | box. | |
3517 | ||
3518 | `:inverse-video' | |
3519 | ||
3520 | VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be displayed in | |
3521 | inverse video. VALUE must be one of t or nil. | |
3522 | ||
3523 | `:stipple' | |
3524 | ||
3525 | If VALUE is a string, it must be the name of a file of pixmap data. | |
3526 | The directories listed in the `x-bitmap-file-path' variable are | |
3527 | searched. Alternatively, VALUE may be a list of the form (WIDTH | |
3528 | HEIGHT DATA) where WIDTH and HEIGHT are the size in pixels, and DATA | |
3529 | is a string containing the raw bits of the bitmap. VALUE nil means | |
3530 | explicitly don't use a stipple pattern. | |
3531 | ||
3532 | For convenience, attributes `:family', `:width', `:height', `:weight', | |
3533 | and `:slant' may also be set in one step from an X font name: | |
3534 | ||
3535 | `:font' | |
3536 | ||
3537 | Set font-related face attributes from VALUE. VALUE must be a valid | |
3538 | XLFD font name. If it is a font name pattern, the first matching font | |
3539 | is used--this is for compatibility with the behavior of previous | |
3540 | versions of Emacs. | |
3541 | ||
3542 | For compatibility with Emacs 20, keywords `:bold' and `:italic' can | |
3543 | be used to specify that a bold or italic font should be used. VALUE | |
3544 | must be t or nil in that case. A value of `unspecified' is not allowed." | |
3545 | ||
3546 | Please see also the documentation of `set-face-attribute' and | |
3547 | `defface'. | |
3548 | ||
787345ff MB |
3549 | `:inherit' |
3550 | ||
3551 | VALUE is the name of a face from which to inherit attributes, or a list | |
3552 | of face names. Attributes from inherited faces are merged into the face | |
3553 | like an underlying face would be, with higher priority than underlying faces. | |
3554 | ||
a933dad1 DL |
3555 | *** Face attributes and X resources |
3556 | ||
3557 | The following X resource names can be used to set face attributes | |
3558 | from X resources: | |
3559 | ||
3560 | Face attribute X resource class | |
3561 | ----------------------------------------------------------------------- | |
3562 | :family attributeFamily . Face.AttributeFamily | |
3563 | :width attributeWidth Face.AttributeWidth | |
3564 | :height attributeHeight Face.AttributeHeight | |
3565 | :weight attributeWeight Face.AttributeWeight | |
3566 | :slant attributeSlant Face.AttributeSlant | |
3567 | foreground attributeForeground Face.AttributeForeground | |
3568 | :background attributeBackground . Face.AttributeBackground | |
3569 | :overline attributeOverline Face.AttributeOverline | |
3570 | :strike-through attributeStrikeThrough Face.AttributeStrikeThrough | |
3571 | :box attributeBox Face.AttributeBox | |
3572 | :underline attributeUnderline Face.AttributeUnderline | |
3573 | :inverse-video attributeInverse Face.AttributeInverse | |
3574 | :stipple attributeStipple Face.AttributeStipple | |
79214ddf | 3575 | or attributeBackgroundPixmap |
a933dad1 DL |
3576 | Face.AttributeBackgroundPixmap |
3577 | :font attributeFont Face.AttributeFont | |
3578 | :bold attributeBold Face.AttributeBold | |
3579 | :italic attributeItalic . Face.AttributeItalic | |
3580 | :font attributeFont Face.AttributeFont | |
3581 | ||
3582 | +++ | |
3583 | *** Text property `face'. | |
3584 | ||
3585 | The value of the `face' text property can now be a single face | |
3586 | specification or a list of such specifications. Each face | |
3587 | specification can be | |
3588 | ||
3589 | 1. A symbol or string naming a Lisp face. | |
3590 | ||
3591 | 2. A property list of the form (KEYWORD VALUE ...) where each | |
3592 | KEYWORD is a face attribute name, and VALUE is an appropriate value | |
3593 | for that attribute. Please see the doc string of `set-face-attribute' | |
3594 | for face attribute names. | |
3595 | ||
3596 | 3. Conses of the form (FOREGROUND-COLOR . COLOR) or | |
3597 | (BACKGROUND-COLOR . COLOR) where COLOR is a color name. This is | |
3598 | for compatibility with previous Emacs versions. | |
3599 | ||
3600 | +++ | |
3601 | ** Support functions for colors on text-only terminals. | |
3602 | ||
acf3ecb7 EZ |
3603 | The function `tty-color-define' can be used to define colors for use |
3604 | on TTY and MSDOS frames. It maps a color name to a color number on | |
3605 | the terminal. Emacs defines a couple of common color mappings by | |
a933dad1 | 3606 | default. You can get defined colors with a call to |
acf3ecb7 | 3607 | `defined-colors'. The function `tty-color-clear' can be |
a933dad1 DL |
3608 | used to clear the mapping table. |
3609 | ||
acf3ecb7 EZ |
3610 | ** Unified support for colors independent of frame type. |
3611 | ||
3612 | The new functions `defined-colors', `color-defined-p', `color-values', | |
3613 | and `display-color-p' work for any type of frame. On frames whose | |
3614 | type is neither x nor w32, these functions transparently map X-style | |
3615 | color specifications to the closest colors supported by the frame | |
3616 | display. Lisp programs should use these new functions instead of the | |
3617 | old `x-defined-colors', `x-color-defined-p', `x-color-values', and | |
3618 | `x-display-color-p'. (The old function names are still available for | |
3619 | compatibility; they are now aliases of the new names.) Lisp programs | |
3620 | should no more look at the value of the variable window-system to | |
3621 | modify their color-related behavior. | |
3622 | ||
3623 | The primitives `color-gray-p' and `color-supported-p' also work for | |
3624 | any frame type. | |
3625 | ||
8a5719f0 EZ |
3626 | ** Platform-independent functions to describe display capabilities. |
3627 | ||
3628 | The new functions `display-mouse-p', `display-popup-menus-p', | |
3629 | `display-graphic-p', `display-selections-p', `display-screens', | |
3630 | `display-pixel-width', `display-pixel-height', `display-mm-width', | |
3631 | `display-mm-height', `display-backing-store', `display-save-under', | |
3632 | `display-planes', `display-color-cells', `display-visual-class', and | |
3633 | `display-grayscale-p' describe the basic capabilities of a particular | |
3634 | display. Lisp programs should call these functions instead of testing | |
3635 | the value of the variables `window-system' or `system-type', or calling | |
3636 | platform-specific functions such as `x-display-pixel-width'. | |
3637 | ||
a933dad1 DL |
3638 | +++ |
3639 | ** The minibuffer prompt is now actually inserted in the minibuffer. | |
a933dad1 | 3640 | |
463cac2d | 3641 | This makes it possible to scroll through the prompt, if you want to. |
3b51cca0 MB |
3642 | To disallow this completely (like previous versions of emacs), customize |
3643 | the variable `minibuffer-prompt-properties', and turn on the | |
3644 | `Inviolable' option. | |
a933dad1 | 3645 | |
8a33023e | 3646 | The function minibuffer-prompt-end returns the current position of the |
a933dad1 DL |
3647 | end of the minibuffer prompt, if the minibuffer is current. |
3648 | Otherwise, it returns zero. | |
3649 | ||
463cac2d GM |
3650 | ** New `field' abstraction in buffers. |
3651 | ||
3652 | There is now code to support an abstraction called `fields' in emacs | |
3653 | buffers. A field is a contiguous region of text with the same `field' | |
59927f88 | 3654 | property (which can be a text property or an overlay). |
463cac2d | 3655 | |
9a9dfda8 | 3656 | Many emacs functions, such as forward-word, forward-sentence, |
463cac2d | 3657 | forward-paragraph, beginning-of-line, etc., stop moving when they come |
9a9dfda8 | 3658 | to the boundary between fields; beginning-of-line and end-of-line will |
463cac2d | 3659 | not let the point move past the field boundary, but other movement |
fc7ac24f GM |
3660 | commands continue into the next field if repeated. Stopping at field |
3661 | boundaries can be suppressed programmatically by binding | |
3662 | `inhibit-field-text-motion' to a non-nil value around calls to these | |
3663 | functions. | |
463cac2d GM |
3664 | |
3665 | Now that the minibuffer prompt is inserted into the minibuffer, it is in | |
9a9dfda8 | 3666 | a separate field from the user-input part of the buffer, so that common |
463cac2d | 3667 | editing commands treat the user's text separately from the prompt. |
a933dad1 | 3668 | |
9a9dfda8 GM |
3669 | The following functions are defined for operating on fields: |
3670 | ||
59927f88 | 3671 | - Function: constrain-to-field NEW-POS OLD-POS &optional ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE ONLY-IN-LINE INHIBIT-CAPTURE-PROPERTY |
9a9dfda8 GM |
3672 | |
3673 | Return the position closest to NEW-POS that is in the same field as OLD-POS. | |
59927f88 | 3674 | |
9a9dfda8 GM |
3675 | A field is a region of text with the same `field' property. |
3676 | If NEW-POS is nil, then the current point is used instead, and set to the | |
9b2a085d | 3677 | constrained position if that is different. |
9a9dfda8 GM |
3678 | |
3679 | If OLD-POS is at the boundary of two fields, then the allowable | |
3680 | positions for NEW-POS depends on the value of the optional argument | |
3681 | ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE: If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is nil, then NEW-POS is | |
59927f88 | 3682 | constrained to the field that has the same `field' char-property |
9a9dfda8 GM |
3683 | as any new characters inserted at OLD-POS, whereas if ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE |
3684 | is non-nil, NEW-POS is constrained to the union of the two adjacent | |
59927f88 MB |
3685 | fields. Additionally, if two fields are separated by another field with |
3686 | the special value `boundary', then any point within this special field is | |
3687 | also considered to be `on the boundary'. | |
9a9dfda8 GM |
3688 | |
3689 | If the optional argument ONLY-IN-LINE is non-nil and constraining | |
3690 | NEW-POS would move it to a different line, NEW-POS is returned | |
3691 | unconstrained. This useful for commands that move by line, like | |
3692 | C-n or C-a, which should generally respect field boundaries | |
3693 | only in the case where they can still move to the right line. | |
3694 | ||
59927f88 MB |
3695 | If the optional argument INHIBIT-CAPTURE-PROPERTY is non-nil, and OLD-POS has |
3696 | a non-nil property of that name, then any field boundaries are ignored. | |
3697 | ||
3698 | Field boundaries are not noticed if `inhibit-field-text-motion' is non-nil. | |
3699 | ||
3700 | - Function: delete-field &optional POS | |
9a9dfda8 | 3701 | |
59927f88 | 3702 | Delete the field surrounding POS. |
9a9dfda8 | 3703 | A field is a region of text with the same `field' property. |
59927f88 | 3704 | If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS. |
9a9dfda8 GM |
3705 | |
3706 | - Function: field-beginning &optional POS ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE | |
3707 | ||
3708 | Return the beginning of the field surrounding POS. | |
3709 | A field is a region of text with the same `field' property. | |
59927f88 MB |
3710 | If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS. |
3711 | If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is non-nil and POS is at the beginning of its | |
9a9dfda8 GM |
3712 | field, then the beginning of the *previous* field is returned. |
3713 | ||
3714 | - Function: field-end &optional POS ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE | |
3715 | ||
3716 | Return the end of the field surrounding POS. | |
3717 | A field is a region of text with the same `field' property. | |
59927f88 MB |
3718 | If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS. |
3719 | If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is non-nil and POS is at the end of its field, | |
9a9dfda8 GM |
3720 | then the end of the *following* field is returned. |
3721 | ||
3722 | - Function: field-string &optional POS | |
3723 | ||
3724 | Return the contents of the field surrounding POS as a string. | |
3725 | A field is a region of text with the same `field' property. | |
59927f88 | 3726 | If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS. |
9a9dfda8 GM |
3727 | |
3728 | - Function: field-string-no-properties &optional POS | |
3729 | ||
3730 | Return the contents of the field around POS, without text-properties. | |
3731 | A field is a region of text with the same `field' property. | |
59927f88 | 3732 | If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS. |
9a9dfda8 | 3733 | |
a933dad1 DL |
3734 | +++ |
3735 | ** Image support. | |
3736 | ||
3737 | Emacs can now display images. Images are inserted into text by giving | |
3738 | strings or buffer text a `display' text property containing one of | |
3739 | (AREA IMAGE) or IMAGE. The display of the `display' property value | |
3740 | replaces the display of the characters having that property. | |
3741 | ||
3742 | If the property value has the form (AREA IMAGE), AREA must be one of | |
3743 | `(margin left-margin)', `(margin right-margin)' or `(margin nil)'. If | |
3744 | AREA is `(margin nil)', IMAGE will be displayed in the text area of a | |
3745 | window, otherwise it will be displayed in the left or right marginal | |
3746 | area. | |
3747 | ||
3748 | IMAGE is an image specification. | |
3749 | ||
3750 | *** Image specifications | |
3751 | ||
3752 | Image specifications are lists of the form `(image PROPS)' where PROPS | |
3753 | is a property list whose keys are keyword symbols. Each | |
3754 | specifications must contain a property `:type TYPE' with TYPE being a | |
35a5514b GM |
3755 | symbol specifying the image type, e.g. `xbm'. Properties not |
3756 | described below are ignored. | |
a933dad1 DL |
3757 | |
3758 | The following is a list of properties all image types share. | |
3759 | ||
3760 | `:ascent ASCENT' | |
3761 | ||
576da55d GM |
3762 | ASCENT must be a number in the range 0..100, or the symbol `center'. |
3763 | If it is a number, it specifies the percentage of the image's height | |
5d94f558 | 3764 | to use for its ascent. |
576da55d GM |
3765 | |
3766 | If not specified, ASCENT defaults to the value 50 which means that the | |
3767 | image will be centered with the base line of the row it appears in. | |
3768 | ||
5d94f558 | 3769 | If ASCENT is `center' the image is vertically centered around a |
04545643 GM |
3770 | centerline which is the vertical center of text drawn at the position |
3771 | of the image, in the manner specified by the text properties and | |
3772 | overlays that apply to the image. | |
a933dad1 DL |
3773 | |
3774 | `:margin MARGIN' | |
3775 | ||
b30623be GM |
3776 | MARGIN must be either a number >= 0 specifying how many pixels to put |
3777 | as margin around the image, or a pair (X . Y) with X specifying the | |
3778 | horizontal margin and Y specifying the vertical margin. Default is 0. | |
a933dad1 DL |
3779 | |
3780 | `:relief RELIEF' | |
3781 | ||
3782 | RELIEF is analogous to the `:relief' attribute of faces. Puts a relief | |
3783 | around an image. | |
3784 | ||
f864120f | 3785 | `:conversion ALGO' |
a933dad1 | 3786 | |
47e351a3 GM |
3787 | Apply an image algorithm to the image before displaying it. |
3788 | ||
3789 | ALGO `laplace' or `emboss' means apply a Laplace or ``emboss'' | |
3790 | edge-detection algorithm to the image. | |
3791 | ||
3792 | ALGO `(edge-detection :matrix MATRIX :color-adjust ADJUST)' means | |
3793 | apply a general edge-detection algorithm. MATRIX must be either a | |
3794 | nine-element list or a nine-element vector of numbers. A pixel at | |
3795 | position x/y in the transformed image is computed from original pixels | |
3796 | around that position. MATRIX specifies, for each pixel in the | |
3797 | neighborhood of x/y, a factor with which that pixel will influence the | |
3798 | transformed pixel; element 0 specifies the factor for the pixel at | |
3799 | x-1/y-1, element 1 the factor for the pixel at x/y-1 etc. as shown | |
3800 | below. | |
3801 | ||
3802 | (x-1/y-1 x/y-1 x+1/y-1 | |
3803 | x-1/y x/y x+1/y | |
3804 | x-1/y+1 x/y+1 x+1/y+1) | |
3805 | ||
3806 | The resulting pixel is computed from the color intensity of the color | |
3807 | resulting from summing up the RGB values of surrounding pixels, | |
3808 | multiplied by the specified factors, and dividing that sum by the sum | |
3809 | of the factors' absolute values. | |
3810 | ||
327652be | 3811 | Laplace edge-detection currently uses a matrix of |
a933dad1 | 3812 | |
47e351a3 GM |
3813 | (1 0 0 |
3814 | 0 0 0 | |
3815 | 9 9 -1) | |
3816 | ||
3817 | Emboss edge-detection uses a matrix of | |
3818 | ||
3819 | ( 2 -1 0 | |
3820 | -1 0 1 | |
3821 | 0 1 -2) | |
3822 | ||
ba9eeda1 GM |
3823 | ALGO `disabled' means transform the image so that it looks |
3824 | ``disabled''. | |
3825 | ||
47e351a3 GM |
3826 | `:mask MASK' |
3827 | ||
3828 | If MASK is `heuristic' or `(heuristic BG)', build a clipping mask for | |
3829 | the image, so that the background of a frame is visible behind the | |
3830 | image. If BG is not specified, or if BG is t, determine the | |
3831 | background color of the image by looking at the 4 corners of the | |
8a33023e | 3832 | image, assuming the most frequently occurring color from the corners is |
47e351a3 GM |
3833 | the background color of the image. Otherwise, BG must be a list `(RED |
3834 | GREEN BLUE)' specifying the color to assume for the background of the | |
3835 | image. | |
a933dad1 | 3836 | |
47e351a3 GM |
3837 | If MASK is nil, remove a mask from the image, if it has one. Images |
3838 | in some formats include a mask which can be removed by specifying | |
3839 | `:mask nil'. | |
a933dad1 DL |
3840 | |
3841 | `:file FILE' | |
3842 | ||
3843 | Load image from FILE. If FILE is not absolute after expanding it, | |
3844 | search for the image in `data-directory'. Some image types support | |
3845 | building images from data. When this is done, no `:file' property | |
3846 | may be present in the image specification. | |
3847 | ||
518df5c4 GM |
3848 | `:data DATA' |
3849 | ||
3850 | Get image data from DATA. (As of this writing, this is not yet | |
3851 | supported for image type `postscript'). Either :file or :data may be | |
3852 | present in an image specification, but not both. All image types | |
3853 | support strings as DATA, some types allow additional types of DATA. | |
3854 | ||
a933dad1 DL |
3855 | *** Supported image types |
3856 | ||
b246b1f6 | 3857 | **** XBM, image type `xbm'. |
a933dad1 DL |
3858 | |
3859 | XBM images don't require an external library. Additional image | |
3860 | properties supported are | |
3861 | ||
3862 | `:foreground FG' | |
3863 | ||
3864 | FG must be a string specifying the image foreground color. Default | |
3865 | is the frame's foreground. | |
3866 | ||
46c5af7f | 3867 | `:background BG' |
a933dad1 DL |
3868 | |
3869 | BG must be a string specifying the image foreground color. Default is | |
3870 | the frame's background color. | |
3871 | ||
3872 | XBM images can be constructed from data instead of file. In this | |
3873 | case, the image specification must contain the following properties | |
3874 | instead of a `:file' property. | |
3875 | ||
3876 | `:width WIDTH' | |
3877 | ||
3878 | WIDTH specifies the width of the image in pixels. | |
3879 | ||
3880 | `:height HEIGHT' | |
3881 | ||
3882 | HEIGHT specifies the height of the image in pixels. | |
3883 | ||
3884 | `:data DATA' | |
3885 | ||
3886 | DATA must be either | |
3887 | ||
3888 | 1. a string large enough to hold the bitmap data, i.e. it must | |
3889 | have a size >= (WIDTH + 7) / 8 * HEIGHT | |
3890 | ||
3891 | 2. a bool-vector of size >= WIDTH * HEIGHT | |
3892 | ||
3893 | 3. a vector of strings or bool-vectors, one for each line of the | |
3894 | bitmap. | |
3895 | ||
c76e04a8 GM |
3896 | 4. a string that's an in-memory XBM file. Neither width nor |
3897 | height may be specified in this case because these are defined | |
3898 | in the file. | |
3899 | ||
a933dad1 DL |
3900 | **** XPM, image type `xpm' |
3901 | ||
3902 | XPM images require the external library `libXpm', package | |
3903 | `xpm-3.4k.tar.gz', version 3.4k or later. Make sure the library is | |
3904 | found when Emacs is configured by supplying appropriate paths via | |
3905 | `--x-includes' and `--x-libraries'. | |
3906 | ||
3907 | Additional image properties supported are: | |
3908 | ||
3909 | `:color-symbols SYMBOLS' | |
3910 | ||
3911 | SYMBOLS must be a list of pairs (NAME . COLOR), with NAME being the | |
3912 | name of color as it appears in an XPM file, and COLOR being an X color | |
3913 | name. | |
3914 | ||
3915 | XPM images can be built from memory instead of files. In that case, | |
3916 | add a `:data' property instead of a `:file' property. | |
3917 | ||
a933dad1 DL |
3918 | The XPM library uses libz in its implementation so that it is able |
3919 | to display compressed images. | |
3920 | ||
3921 | **** PBM, image type `pbm' | |
3922 | ||
3923 | PBM images don't require an external library. Color, gray-scale and | |
2b8e9c91 GM |
3924 | mono images are supported. Additional image properties supported for |
3925 | mono images are | |
3926 | ||
3927 | `:foreground FG' | |
3928 | ||
3929 | FG must be a string specifying the image foreground color. Default | |
3930 | is the frame's foreground. | |
3931 | ||
3932 | `:background FG' | |
3933 | ||
3934 | BG must be a string specifying the image foreground color. Default is | |
3935 | the frame's background color. | |
a933dad1 DL |
3936 | |
3937 | **** JPEG, image type `jpeg' | |
3938 | ||
3939 | Support for JPEG images requires the external library `libjpeg', | |
3bd37feb GM |
3940 | package `jpegsrc.v6a.tar.gz', or later. Additional image properties |
3941 | are: | |
3942 | ||
a933dad1 DL |
3943 | **** TIFF, image type `tiff' |
3944 | ||
3945 | Support for TIFF images requires the external library `libtiff', | |
3946 | package `tiff-v3.4-tar.gz', or later. There are no additional image | |
3947 | properties defined. | |
3948 | ||
3949 | **** GIF, image type `gif' | |
3950 | ||
3951 | Support for GIF images requires the external library `libungif', package | |
3952 | `libungif-4.1.0', or later. | |
3953 | ||
3954 | Additional image properties supported are: | |
3955 | ||
3956 | `:index INDEX' | |
3957 | ||
3958 | INDEX must be an integer >= 0. Load image number INDEX from a | |
8a33023e | 3959 | multi-image GIF file. An error is signaled if INDEX is too large. |
a933dad1 DL |
3960 | |
3961 | This could be used to implement limited support for animated GIFs. | |
3962 | For example, the following function displays a multi-image GIF file | |
3963 | at point-min in the current buffer, switching between sub-images | |
3964 | every 0.1 seconds. | |
3965 | ||
3966 | (defun show-anim (file max) | |
3967 | "Display multi-image GIF file FILE which contains MAX subimages." | |
3968 | (display-anim (current-buffer) file 0 max t)) | |
3969 | ||
3970 | (defun display-anim (buffer file idx max first-time) | |
3971 | (when (= idx max) | |
3972 | (setq idx 0)) | |
518df5c4 | 3973 | (let ((img (create-image file nil nil :index idx))) |
a933dad1 DL |
3974 | (save-excursion |
3975 | (set-buffer buffer) | |
3976 | (goto-char (point-min)) | |
3977 | (unless first-time (delete-char 1)) | |
3978 | (insert-image img "x")) | |
3979 | (run-with-timer 0.1 nil 'display-anim buffer file (1+ idx) max nil))) | |
3980 | ||
3981 | **** PNG, image type `png' | |
3982 | ||
3983 | Support for PNG images requires the external library `libpng', | |
3984 | package `libpng-1.0.2.tar.gz', or later. There are no additional image | |
3985 | properties defined. | |
3986 | ||
3987 | **** Ghostscript, image type `postscript'. | |
3988 | ||
3989 | Additional image properties supported are: | |
3990 | ||
3991 | `:pt-width WIDTH' | |
3992 | ||
3993 | WIDTH is width of the image in pt (1/72 inch). WIDTH must be an | |
b246b1f6 | 3994 | integer. This is a required property. |
a933dad1 DL |
3995 | |
3996 | `:pt-height HEIGHT' | |
3997 | ||
3998 | HEIGHT specifies the height of the image in pt (1/72 inch). HEIGHT | |
b246b1f6 | 3999 | must be a integer. This is an required property. |
a933dad1 DL |
4000 | |
4001 | `:bounding-box BOX' | |
4002 | ||
4003 | BOX must be a list or vector of 4 integers giving the bounding box of | |
4004 | the PS image, analogous to the `BoundingBox' comment found in PS | |
4005 | files. This is an required property. | |
4006 | ||
4007 | Part of the Ghostscript interface is implemented in Lisp. See | |
4008 | lisp/gs.el. | |
4009 | ||
4010 | *** Lisp interface. | |
4011 | ||
79214ddf FP |
4012 | The variable `image-types' contains a list of those image types |
4013 | which are supported in the current configuration. | |
a933dad1 DL |
4014 | |
4015 | Images are stored in an image cache and removed from the cache when | |
4016 | they haven't been displayed for `image-cache-eviction-delay seconds. | |
4017 | The function `clear-image-cache' can be used to clear the image cache | |
084cec2f GM |
4018 | manually. Images in the cache are compared with `equal', i.e. all |
4019 | images with `equal' specifications share the same image. | |
a933dad1 DL |
4020 | |
4021 | *** Simplified image API, image.el | |
4022 | ||
4023 | The new Lisp package image.el contains functions that simplify image | |
4024 | creation and putting images into text. The function `create-image' | |
4025 | can be used to create images. The macro `defimage' can be used to | |
4026 | define an image based on available image types. The functions | |
4027 | `put-image' and `insert-image' can be used to insert an image into a | |
4028 | buffer. | |
4029 | ||
4030 | +++ | |
4031 | ** Display margins. | |
4032 | ||
4033 | Windows can now have margins which are used for special text | |
4034 | and images. | |
4035 | ||
4036 | To give a window margins, either set the buffer-local variables | |
4037 | `left-margin-width' and `right-margin-width', or call | |
4038 | `set-window-margins'. The function `window-margins' can be used to | |
4039 | obtain the current settings. To make `left-margin-width' and | |
4040 | `right-margin-width' take effect, you must set them before displaying | |
4041 | the buffer in a window, or use `set-window-buffer' to force an update | |
4042 | of the display margins. | |
4043 | ||
4044 | You can put text in margins by giving it a `display' text property | |
4045 | containing a pair of the form `(LOCATION . VALUE)', where LOCATION is | |
4046 | one of `left-margin' or `right-margin' or nil. VALUE can be either a | |
4047 | string, an image specification or a stretch specification (see later | |
4048 | in this file). | |
4049 | ||
4050 | +++ | |
4051 | ** Help display | |
4052 | ||
4053 | Emacs displays short help messages in the echo area, when the mouse | |
4054 | moves over a tool-bar item or a piece of text that has a text property | |
4055 | `help-echo'. This feature also applies to strings in the mode line | |
4056 | that have a `help-echo' property. | |
4057 | ||
9662da0b | 4058 | If the value of the `help-echo' property is a function, that function |
85a8aca9 | 4059 | is called with three arguments WINDOW, OBJECT and POSITION. WINDOW is |
c20aeb83 GM |
4060 | the window in which the help was found. |
4061 | ||
4062 | If OBJECT is a buffer, POS is the position in the buffer where the | |
4063 | `help-echo' text property was found. | |
4064 | ||
4065 | If OBJECT is an overlay, that overlay has a `help-echo' property, and | |
4066 | POS is the position in the overlay's buffer under the mouse. | |
4067 | ||
4068 | If OBJECT is a string (an overlay string or a string displayed with | |
5ed8d5af | 4069 | the `display' property), POS is the position in that string under the |
c20aeb83 | 4070 | mouse. |
d5aa31d8 | 4071 | |
9662da0b GM |
4072 | If the value of the `help-echo' property is neither a function nor a |
4073 | string, it is evaluated to obtain a help string. | |
4074 | ||
4075 | For tool-bar and menu-bar items, their key definition is used to | |
4076 | determine the help to display. If their definition contains a | |
4077 | property `:help FORM', FORM is evaluated to determine the help string. | |
4078 | For tool-bar items without a help form, the caption of the item is | |
4079 | used as help string. | |
a933dad1 DL |
4080 | |
4081 | The hook `show-help-function' can be set to a function that displays | |
f0298744 DL |
4082 | the help string differently. For example, enabling a tooltip window |
4083 | causes the help display to appear there instead of in the echo area. | |
a933dad1 DL |
4084 | |
4085 | +++ | |
4086 | ** Vertical fractional scrolling. | |
4087 | ||
4088 | The display of text in windows can be scrolled smoothly in pixels. | |
4089 | This is useful, for example, for making parts of large images visible. | |
4090 | ||
4091 | The function `window-vscroll' returns the current value of vertical | |
4092 | scrolling, a non-negative fraction of the canonical character height. | |
4093 | The function `set-window-vscroll' can be used to set the vertical | |
4094 | scrolling value. Here is an example of how these function might be | |
4095 | used. | |
4096 | ||
79214ddf FP |
4097 | (global-set-key [A-down] |
4098 | #'(lambda () | |
a933dad1 | 4099 | (interactive) |
79214ddf | 4100 | (set-window-vscroll (selected-window) |
a933dad1 | 4101 | (+ 0.5 (window-vscroll))))) |
79214ddf | 4102 | (global-set-key [A-up] |
a933dad1 DL |
4103 | #'(lambda () |
4104 | (interactive) | |
79214ddf | 4105 | (set-window-vscroll (selected-window) |
a933dad1 DL |
4106 | (- (window-vscroll) 0.5))))) |
4107 | ||
4108 | +++ | |
4109 | ** New hook `fontification-functions'. | |
4110 | ||
4111 | Functions from `fontification-functions' are called from redisplay | |
4112 | when it encounters a region of text that is not yet fontified. This | |
4113 | variable automatically becomes buffer-local when set. Each function | |
4114 | is called with one argument, POS. | |
4115 | ||
4116 | At least one of the hook functions should fontify one or more | |
4117 | characters starting at POS in the current buffer. It should mark them | |
4118 | as fontified by giving them a non-nil value of the `fontified' text | |
4119 | property. It may be reasonable for these functions to check for the | |
4120 | `fontified' property and not put it back on, but they do not have to. | |
4121 | ||
4122 | +++ | |
4123 | ** Tool bar support. | |
4124 | ||
4125 | Emacs supports a tool bar at the top of a frame under X. The frame | |
4126 | parameter `tool-bar-lines' (X resource "toolBar", class "ToolBar") | |
4127 | controls how may lines to reserve for the tool bar. A zero value | |
4128 | suppresses the tool bar. If the value is non-zero and | |
4129 | `auto-resize-tool-bars' is non-nil the tool bar's size will be changed | |
4130 | automatically so that all tool bar items are visible. | |
4131 | ||
4132 | *** Tool bar item definitions | |
4133 | ||
4134 | Tool bar items are defined using `define-key' with a prefix-key | |
4135 | `tool-bar'. For example `(define-key global-map [tool-bar item1] ITEM)' | |
4136 | where ITEM is a list `(menu-item CAPTION BINDING PROPS...)'. | |
79214ddf | 4137 | |
a933dad1 DL |
4138 | CAPTION is the caption of the item, If it's not a string, it is |
4139 | evaluated to get a string. The caption is currently not displayed in | |
4140 | the tool bar, but it is displayed if the item doesn't have a `:help' | |
4141 | property (see below). | |
79214ddf | 4142 | |
a933dad1 DL |
4143 | BINDING is the tool bar item's binding. Tool bar items with keymaps as |
4144 | binding are currently ignored. | |
4145 | ||
4146 | The following properties are recognized: | |
4147 | ||
4148 | `:enable FORM'. | |
79214ddf | 4149 | |
a933dad1 DL |
4150 | FORM is evaluated and specifies whether the tool bar item is enabled |
4151 | or disabled. | |
79214ddf | 4152 | |
a933dad1 | 4153 | `:visible FORM' |
79214ddf | 4154 | |
a933dad1 | 4155 | FORM is evaluated and specifies whether the tool bar item is displayed. |
79214ddf | 4156 | |
a933dad1 DL |
4157 | `:filter FUNCTION' |
4158 | ||
4159 | FUNCTION is called with one parameter, the same list BINDING in which | |
4160 | FUNCTION is specified as the filter. The value FUNCTION returns is | |
4161 | used instead of BINDING to display this item. | |
79214ddf | 4162 | |
a933dad1 DL |
4163 | `:button (TYPE SELECTED)' |
4164 | ||
4165 | TYPE must be one of `:radio' or `:toggle'. SELECTED is evaluated | |
4166 | and specifies whether the button is selected (pressed) or not. | |
79214ddf | 4167 | |
a933dad1 DL |
4168 | `:image IMAGES' |
4169 | ||
4170 | IMAGES is either a single image specification or a vector of four | |
4171 | image specifications. If it is a vector, this table lists the | |
4172 | meaning of each of the four elements: | |
4173 | ||
4174 | Index Use when item is | |
4175 | ---------------------------------------- | |
4176 | 0 enabled and selected | |
4177 | 1 enabled and deselected | |
4178 | 2 disabled and selected | |
4179 | 3 disabled and deselected | |
79214ddf | 4180 | |
4ba7246d GM |
4181 | If IMAGE is a single image specification, a Laplace edge-detection |
4182 | algorithm is used on that image to draw the image in disabled state. | |
4183 | ||
a933dad1 | 4184 | `:help HELP-STRING'. |
79214ddf | 4185 | |
a933dad1 DL |
4186 | Gives a help string to display for the tool bar item. This help |
4187 | is displayed when the mouse is moved over the item. | |
4188 | ||
dab96841 | 4189 | The function `toolbar-add-item' is a convenience function for adding |
d1e68bce DL |
4190 | toolbar items generally, and `tool-bar-add-item-from-menu' can be used |
4191 | to define a toolbar item with a binding copied from an item on the | |
4192 | menu bar. | |
dab96841 | 4193 | |
8628686a DL |
4194 | The default bindings use a menu-item :filter to derive the tool-bar |
4195 | dynamically from variable `tool-bar-map' which may be set | |
4196 | buffer-locally to override the global map. | |
4197 | ||
a933dad1 DL |
4198 | *** Tool-bar-related variables. |
4199 | ||
4200 | If `auto-resize-tool-bar' is non-nil, the tool bar will automatically | |
4201 | resize to show all defined tool bar items. It will never grow larger | |
4202 | than 1/4 of the frame's size. | |
4203 | ||
79214ddf | 4204 | If `auto-raise-tool-bar-buttons' is non-nil, tool bar buttons will be |
a933dad1 DL |
4205 | raised when the mouse moves over them. |
4206 | ||
4207 | You can add extra space between tool bar items by setting | |
4208 | `tool-bar-button-margin' to a positive integer specifying a number of | |
b30623be GM |
4209 | pixels, or a pair of integers (X . Y) specifying horizontal and |
4210 | vertical margins . Default is 1. | |
a933dad1 DL |
4211 | |
4212 | You can change the shadow thickness of tool bar buttons by setting | |
4213 | `tool-bar-button-relief' to an integer. Default is 3. | |
4214 | ||
4215 | *** Tool-bar clicks with modifiers. | |
4216 | ||
4217 | You can bind commands to clicks with control, shift, meta etc. on | |
79214ddf | 4218 | a tool bar item. If |
a933dad1 DL |
4219 | |
4220 | (define-key global-map [tool-bar shell] | |
4221 | '(menu-item "Shell" shell | |
4222 | :image (image :type xpm :file "shell.xpm"))) | |
4223 | ||
4224 | is the original tool bar item definition, then | |
4225 | ||
4226 | (define-key global-map [tool-bar S-shell] 'some-command) | |
4227 | ||
4228 | makes a binding to run `some-command' for a shifted click on the same | |
4229 | item. | |
4230 | ||
4231 | ** Mode line changes. | |
4232 | ||
4233 | +++ | |
4234 | *** Mouse-sensitive mode line. | |
4235 | ||
4236 | The mode line can be made mouse-sensitive by displaying strings there | |
4237 | that have a `local-map' text property. There are three ways to display | |
4238 | a string with a `local-map' property in the mode line. | |
4239 | ||
4240 | 1. The mode line spec contains a variable whose string value has | |
4241 | a `local-map' text property. | |
4242 | ||
4243 | 2. The mode line spec contains a format specifier (e.g. `%12b'), and | |
4244 | that format specifier has a `local-map' property. | |
4245 | ||
4246 | 3. The mode line spec contains a list containing `:eval FORM'. FORM | |
4247 | is evaluated. If the result is a string, and that string has a | |
4248 | `local-map' property. | |
4249 | ||
4250 | The same mechanism is used to determine the `face' and `help-echo' | |
4251 | properties of strings in the mode line. See `bindings.el' for an | |
4252 | example. | |
4253 | ||
54522c9f GM |
4254 | *** If a mode line element has the form `(:eval FORM)', FORM is |
4255 | evaluated and the result is used as mode line element. | |
4256 | ||
a933dad1 DL |
4257 | +++ |
4258 | *** You can suppress mode-line display by setting the buffer-local | |
4259 | variable mode-line-format to nil. | |
4260 | ||
4261 | +++ | |
4262 | *** A headerline can now be displayed at the top of a window. | |
4263 | ||
4264 | This mode line's contents are controlled by the new variable | |
4265 | `header-line-format' and `default-header-line-format' which are | |
4266 | completely analogous to `mode-line-format' and | |
4267 | `default-mode-line-format'. A value of nil means don't display a top | |
4268 | line. | |
4269 | ||
4270 | The appearance of top mode lines is controlled by the face | |
4271 | `header-line'. | |
4272 | ||
4273 | The function `coordinates-in-window-p' returns `header-line' for a | |
4274 | position in the header-line. | |
4275 | ||
4276 | +++ | |
4277 | ** Text property `display' | |
4278 | ||
623a0aae GM |
4279 | The `display' text property is used to insert images into text, |
4280 | replace text with other text, display text in marginal area, and it is | |
4281 | also used to control other aspects of how text displays. The value of | |
4282 | the `display' property should be a display specification, as described | |
a933dad1 DL |
4283 | below, or a list or vector containing display specifications. |
4284 | ||
623a0aae GM |
4285 | *** Replacing text, displaying text in marginal areas |
4286 | ||
4287 | To replace the text having the `display' property with some other | |
4288 | text, use a display specification of the form `(LOCATION STRING)'. | |
4289 | ||
4290 | If LOCATION is `(margin left-margin)', STRING is displayed in the left | |
4291 | marginal area, if it is `(margin right-margin)', it is displayed in | |
4292 | the right marginal area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' STRING | |
4293 | is displayed in the text. In the latter case you can also use the | |
4294 | simpler form STRING as property value. | |
4295 | ||
a933dad1 DL |
4296 | *** Variable width and height spaces |
4297 | ||
4298 | To display a space of fractional width or height, use a display | |
4299 | specification of the form `(LOCATION STRECH)'. If LOCATION is | |
4300 | `(margin left-margin)', the space is displayed in the left marginal | |
4301 | area, if it is `(margin right-margin)', it is displayed in the right | |
4302 | marginal area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' the space is | |
4303 | displayed in the text. In the latter case you can also use the | |
4304 | simpler form STRETCH as property value. | |
4305 | ||
4306 | The stretch specification STRETCH itself is a list of the form `(space | |
4307 | PROPS)', where PROPS is a property list which can contain the | |
4308 | properties described below. | |
4309 | ||
4310 | The display of the fractional space replaces the display of the | |
4311 | characters having the `display' property. | |
4312 | ||
4313 | - :width WIDTH | |
4314 | ||
4315 | Specifies that the space width should be WIDTH times the normal | |
4316 | character width. WIDTH can be an integer or floating point number. | |
4317 | ||
4318 | - :relative-width FACTOR | |
4319 | ||
4320 | Specifies that the width of the stretch should be computed from the | |
4321 | first character in a group of consecutive characters that have the | |
4322 | same `display' property. The computation is done by multiplying the | |
4323 | width of that character by FACTOR. | |
4324 | ||
4325 | - :align-to HPOS | |
4326 | ||
4327 | Specifies that the space should be wide enough to reach HPOS. The | |
4328 | value HPOS is measured in units of the normal character width. | |
4329 | ||
4330 | Exactly one of the above properties should be used. | |
4331 | ||
4332 | - :height HEIGHT | |
4333 | ||
4334 | Specifies the height of the space, as HEIGHT, measured in terms of the | |
4335 | normal line height. | |
4336 | ||
4337 | - :relative-height FACTOR | |
4338 | ||
4339 | The height of the space is computed as the product of the height | |
4340 | of the text having the `display' property and FACTOR. | |
4341 | ||
4342 | - :ascent ASCENT | |
4343 | ||
4344 | Specifies that ASCENT percent of the height of the stretch should be | |
4345 | used for the ascent of the stretch, i.e. for the part above the | |
4346 | baseline. The value of ASCENT must be a non-negative number less or | |
4347 | equal to 100. | |
4348 | ||
4349 | You should not use both `:height' and `:relative-height' together. | |
4350 | ||
4351 | *** Images | |
4352 | ||
4353 | A display specification for an image has the form `(LOCATION | |
4354 | . IMAGE)', where IMAGE is an image specification. The image replaces, | |
4355 | in the display, the characters having this display specification in | |
4356 | their `display' text property. If LOCATION is `(margin left-margin)', | |
4357 | the image will be displayed in the left marginal area, if it is | |
4358 | `(margin right-margin)' it will be displayed in the right marginal | |
4359 | area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' the image will be displayed in | |
4360 | the text. In the latter case you can also use the simpler form IMAGE | |
4361 | as display specification. | |
4362 | ||
4363 | *** Other display properties | |
4364 | ||
c9e73000 | 4365 | - (space-width FACTOR) |
a933dad1 DL |
4366 | |
4367 | Specifies that space characters in the text having that property | |
4368 | should be displayed FACTOR times as wide as normal; FACTOR must be an | |
4369 | integer or float. | |
4370 | ||
c9e73000 | 4371 | - (height HEIGHT) |
a933dad1 DL |
4372 | |
4373 | Display text having this property in a font that is smaller or larger. | |
4374 | ||
4375 | If HEIGHT is a list of the form `(+ N)', where N is an integer, that | |
4376 | means to use a font that is N steps larger. If HEIGHT is a list of | |
4377 | the form `(- N)', that means to use a font that is N steps smaller. A | |
4378 | ``step'' is defined by the set of available fonts; each size for which | |
4379 | a font is available counts as a step. | |
4380 | ||
4381 | If HEIGHT is a number, that means to use a font that is HEIGHT times | |
4382 | as tall as the frame's default font. | |
4383 | ||
4384 | If HEIGHT is a symbol, it is called as a function with the current | |
4385 | height as argument. The function should return the new height to use. | |
4386 | ||
4387 | Otherwise, HEIGHT is evaluated to get the new height, with the symbol | |
4388 | `height' bound to the current specified font height. | |
4389 | ||
c9e73000 | 4390 | - (raise FACTOR) |
a933dad1 DL |
4391 | |
4392 | FACTOR must be a number, specifying a multiple of the current | |
4393 | font's height. If it is positive, that means to display the characters | |
4394 | raised. If it is negative, that means to display them lower down. The | |
4395 | amount of raising or lowering is computed without taking account of the | |
c9e73000 | 4396 | `height' subproperty. |
a933dad1 DL |
4397 | |
4398 | *** Conditional display properties | |
4399 | ||
4400 | All display specifications can be conditionalized. If a specification | |
4401 | has the form `(:when CONDITION . SPEC)', the specification SPEC | |
4402 | applies only when CONDITION yields a non-nil value when evaluated. | |
8a33023e | 4403 | During evaluation, point is temporarily set to the end position of |
a933dad1 DL |
4404 | the text having the `display' property. |
4405 | ||
4406 | The normal specification consisting of SPEC only is equivalent to | |
4407 | `(:when t SPEC)'. | |
4408 | ||
4409 | +++ | |
4410 | ** New menu separator types. | |
4411 | ||
4412 | Emacs now supports more than one menu separator type. Menu items with | |
4413 | item names consisting of dashes only (including zero dashes) are | |
4414 | treated like before. In addition, the following item names are used | |
4415 | to specify other menu separator types. | |
4416 | ||
4417 | - `--no-line' or `--space', or `--:space', or `--:noLine' | |
4418 | ||
4419 | No separator lines are drawn, but a small space is inserted where the | |
4420 | separator occurs. | |
4421 | ||
4422 | - `--single-line' or `--:singleLine' | |
4423 | ||
4424 | A single line in the menu's foreground color. | |
4425 | ||
4426 | - `--double-line' or `--:doubleLine' | |
4427 | ||
4428 | A double line in the menu's foreground color. | |
4429 | ||
4430 | - `--single-dashed-line' or `--:singleDashedLine' | |
4431 | ||
4432 | A single dashed line in the menu's foreground color. | |
4433 | ||
4434 | - `--double-dashed-line' or `--:doubleDashedLine' | |
4435 | ||
4436 | A double dashed line in the menu's foreground color. | |
4437 | ||
4438 | - `--shadow-etched-in' or `--:shadowEtchedIn' | |
4439 | ||
f3780fe4 | 4440 | A single line with 3D sunken appearance. This is the form |
a933dad1 DL |
4441 | displayed for item names consisting of dashes only. |
4442 | ||
4443 | - `--shadow-etched-out' or `--:shadowEtchedOut' | |
4444 | ||
4445 | A single line with 3D raised appearance. | |
4446 | ||
4447 | - `--shadow-etched-in-dash' or `--:shadowEtchedInDash' | |
4448 | ||
4449 | A single dashed line with 3D sunken appearance. | |
4450 | ||
4451 | - `--shadow-etched-out-dash' or `--:shadowEtchedOutDash' | |
4452 | ||
4453 | A single dashed line with 3D raise appearance. | |
4454 | ||
4455 | - `--shadow-double-etched-in' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedIn' | |
4456 | ||
4457 | Two lines with 3D sunken appearance. | |
4458 | ||
4459 | - `--shadow-double-etched-out' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedOut' | |
4460 | ||
4461 | Two lines with 3D raised appearance. | |
4462 | ||
4463 | - `--shadow-double-etched-in-dash' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedInDash' | |
4464 | ||
4465 | Two dashed lines with 3D sunken appearance. | |
4466 | ||
4467 | - `--shadow-double-etched-out-dash' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedOutDash' | |
4468 | ||
4469 | Two dashed lines with 3D raised appearance. | |
4470 | ||
4471 | Under LessTif/Motif, the last four separator types are displayed like | |
4472 | the corresponding single-line separators. | |
4473 | ||
4474 | +++ | |
4475 | ** New frame parameters for scroll bar colors. | |
4476 | ||
4477 | The new frame parameters `scroll-bar-foreground' and | |
4478 | `scroll-bar-background' can be used to change scroll bar colors. | |
4479 | Their value must be either a color name, a string, or nil to specify | |
4480 | that scroll bars should use a default color. For toolkit scroll bars, | |
4481 | default colors are toolkit specific. For non-toolkit scroll bars, the | |
4482 | default background is the background color of the frame, and the | |
4483 | default foreground is black. | |
4484 | ||
4485 | The X resource name of these parameters are `scrollBarForeground' | |
4486 | (class ScrollBarForeground) and `scrollBarBackground' (class | |
4487 | `ScrollBarBackground'). | |
4488 | ||
4489 | Setting these parameters overrides toolkit specific X resource | |
4490 | settings for scroll bar colors. | |
4491 | ||
4492 | +++ | |
4493 | ** You can set `redisplay-dont-pause' to a non-nil value to prevent | |
4494 | display updates from being interrupted when input is pending. | |
4495 | ||
4496 | --- | |
4497 | ** Changing a window's width may now change its window start if it | |
4498 | starts on a continuation line. The new window start is computed based | |
4499 | on the window's new width, starting from the start of the continued | |
4500 | line as the start of the screen line with the minimum distance from | |
4501 | the original window start. | |
4502 | ||
4503 | --- | |
4504 | ** The variable `hscroll-step' and the functions | |
4505 | `hscroll-point-visible' and `hscroll-window-column' have been removed | |
4506 | now that proper horizontal scrolling is implemented. | |
4507 | ||
4508 | +++ | |
4509 | ** Windows can now be made fixed-width and/or fixed-height. | |
4510 | ||
4511 | A window is fixed-size if its buffer has a buffer-local variable | |
4512 | `window-size-fixed' whose value is not nil. A value of `height' makes | |
4513 | windows fixed-height, a value of `width' makes them fixed-width, any | |
4514 | other non-nil value makes them both fixed-width and fixed-height. | |
4515 | ||
4516 | The following code makes all windows displaying the current buffer | |
4517 | fixed-width and fixed-height. | |
4518 | ||
4519 | (set (make-local-variable 'window-size-fixed) t) | |
4520 | ||
4521 | A call to enlarge-window on a window gives an error if that window is | |
4522 | fixed-width and it is tried to change the window's width, or if the | |
4523 | window is fixed-height, and it is tried to change its height. To | |
4524 | change the size of a fixed-size window, bind `window-size-fixed' | |
4525 | temporarily to nil, for example | |
4526 | ||
4527 | (let ((window-size-fixed nil)) | |
4528 | (enlarge-window 10)) | |
4529 | ||
79214ddf | 4530 | Likewise, an attempt to split a fixed-height window vertically, |
a933dad1 | 4531 | or a fixed-width window horizontally results in a error. |
e411ce4b EZ |
4532 | |
4533 | ** The cursor-type frame parameter is now supported on MS-DOS | |
4534 | terminals. When Emacs starts, it by default changes the cursor shape | |
4535 | to a solid box, as it does on Unix. The `cursor-type' frame parameter | |
4536 | overrides this as it does on Unix, except that the bar cursor is | |
4537 | horizontal rather than vertical (since the MS-DOS display doesn't | |
4538 | support a vertical-bar cursor). | |
76299050 | 4539 | |
3787e12e | 4540 | |
0cb146bf | 4541 | |
05197f40 | 4542 | \f |
3787e12e GM |
4543 | * Emacs 20.7 is a bug-fix release with few user-visible changes |
4544 | ||
4545 | ** It is now possible to use CCL-based coding systems for keyboard | |
4546 | input. | |
4547 | ||
4548 | ** ange-ftp now handles FTP security extensions, like Kerberos. | |
4549 | ||
4550 | ** Rmail has been extended to recognize more forms of digest messages. | |
4551 | ||
4552 | ** Now, most coding systems set in keyboard coding system work not | |
4553 | only for character input, but also in incremental search. The | |
4554 | exceptions are such coding systems that handle 2-byte character sets | |
4555 | (e.g euc-kr, euc-jp) and that use ISO's escape sequence | |
4556 | (e.g. iso-2022-jp). They are ignored in incremental search. | |
4557 | ||
4558 | ** Support for Macintosh PowerPC-based machines running GNU/Linux has | |
4559 | been added. | |
4560 | ||
05197f40 | 4561 | \f |
3787e12e GM |
4562 | * Emacs 20.6 is a bug-fix release with one user-visible change |
4563 | ||
4564 | ** Support for ARM-based non-RISCiX machines has been added. | |
4565 | ||
0cb146bf | 4566 | |
05197f40 | 4567 | \f |
3787e12e GM |
4568 | * Emacs 20.5 is a bug-fix release with no user-visible changes. |
4569 | ||
4570 | ** Not new, but not mentioned before: | |
4571 | M-w when Transient Mark mode is enabled disables the mark. | |
05197f40 | 4572 | \f |
3787e12e GM |
4573 | * Changes in Emacs 20.4 |
4574 | ||
4575 | ** Init file may be called .emacs.el. | |
4576 | ||
4577 | You can now call the Emacs init file `.emacs.el'. | |
4578 | Formerly the name had to be `.emacs'. If you use the name | |
4579 | `.emacs.el', you can byte-compile the file in the usual way. | |
4580 | ||
4581 | If both `.emacs' and `.emacs.el' exist, the latter file | |
4582 | is the one that is used. | |
4583 | ||
4584 | ** shell-command, and shell-command-on-region, now return | |
4585 | the exit code of the command (unless it is asynchronous). | |
4586 | Also, you can specify a place to put the error output, | |
4587 | separate from the command's regular output. | |
4588 | Interactively, the variable shell-command-default-error-buffer | |
4589 | says where to put error output; set it to a buffer name. | |
4590 | In calls from Lisp, an optional argument ERROR-BUFFER specifies | |
4591 | the buffer name. | |
4592 | ||
4593 | When you specify a non-nil error buffer (or buffer name), any error | |
4594 | output is inserted before point in that buffer, with \f\n to separate | |
4595 | it from the previous batch of error output. The error buffer is not | |
4596 | cleared, so error output from successive commands accumulates there. | |
4597 | ||
4598 | ** Setting the default value of enable-multibyte-characters to nil in | |
4599 | the .emacs file, either explicitly using setq-default, or via Custom, | |
4600 | is now essentially equivalent to using --unibyte: all buffers | |
4601 | created during startup will be made unibyte after loading .emacs. | |
4602 | ||
4603 | ** C-x C-f now handles the wildcards * and ? in file names. For | |
4604 | example, typing C-x C-f c*.c RET visits all the files whose names | |
4605 | match c*.c. To visit a file whose name contains * or ?, add the | |
4606 | quoting sequence /: to the beginning of the file name. | |
4607 | ||
4608 | ** The M-x commands keep-lines, flush-lines and count-matches | |
4609 | now have the same feature as occur and query-replace: | |
4610 | if the pattern contains any upper case letters, then | |
4611 | they never ignore case. | |
4612 | ||
4613 | ** The end-of-line format conversion feature previously mentioned | |
4614 | under `* Emacs 20.1 changes for MS-DOS and MS-Windows' actually | |
4615 | applies to all operating systems. Emacs recognizes from the contents | |
4616 | of a file what convention it uses to separate lines--newline, CRLF, or | |
4617 | just CR--and automatically converts the contents to the normal Emacs | |
4618 | convention (using newline to separate lines) for editing. This is a | |
4619 | part of the general feature of coding system conversion. | |
4620 | ||
4621 | If you subsequently save the buffer, Emacs converts the text back to | |
4622 | the same format that was used in the file before. | |
4623 | ||
4624 | You can turn off end-of-line conversion by setting the variable | |
4625 | `inhibit-eol-conversion' to non-nil, e.g. with Custom in the MULE group. | |
4626 | ||
4627 | ** The character set property `prefered-coding-system' has been | |
4628 | renamed to `preferred-coding-system', for the sake of correct spelling. | |
4629 | This is a fairly internal feature, so few programs should be affected. | |
4630 | ||
4631 | ** Mode-line display of end-of-line format is changed. | |
4632 | The indication of the end-of-line format of the file visited by a | |
4633 | buffer is now more explicit when that format is not the usual one for | |
4634 | your operating system. For example, the DOS-style end-of-line format | |
4635 | is displayed as "(DOS)" on Unix and GNU/Linux systems. The usual | |
4636 | end-of-line format is still displayed as a single character (colon for | |
4637 | Unix, backslash for DOS and Windows, and forward slash for the Mac). | |
4638 | ||
4639 | The values of the variables eol-mnemonic-unix, eol-mnemonic-dos, | |
4640 | eol-mnemonic-mac, and eol-mnemonic-undecided, which are strings, | |
4641 | control what is displayed in the mode line for each end-of-line | |
4642 | format. You can now customize these variables. | |
4643 | ||
4644 | ** In the previous version of Emacs, tar-mode didn't work well if a | |
4645 | filename contained non-ASCII characters. Now this is fixed. Such a | |
4646 | filename is decoded by file-name-coding-system if the default value of | |
4647 | enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil. | |
4648 | ||
4649 | ** The command temp-buffer-resize-mode toggles a minor mode | |
4650 | in which temporary buffers (such as help buffers) are given | |
4651 | windows just big enough to hold the whole contents. | |
4652 | ||
4653 | ** If you use completion.el, you must now run the function | |
4654 | dynamic-completion-mode to enable it. Just loading the file | |
4655 | doesn't have any effect. | |
4656 | ||
4657 | ** In Flyspell mode, the default is now to make just one Ispell process, | |
4658 | not one per buffer. | |
4659 | ||
4660 | ** If you use iswitchb but do not call (iswitchb-default-keybindings) to | |
4661 | use the default keybindings, you will need to add the following line: | |
4662 | (add-hook 'minibuffer-setup-hook 'iswitchb-minibuffer-setup) | |
4663 | ||
4664 | ** Auto-show mode is no longer enabled just by loading auto-show.el. | |
4665 | To control it, set `auto-show-mode' via Custom or use the | |
4666 | `auto-show-mode' command. | |
4667 | ||
4668 | ** Handling of X fonts' ascent/descent parameters has been changed to | |
4669 | avoid redisplay problems. As a consequence, compared with previous | |
4670 | versions the line spacing and frame size now differ with some font | |
4671 | choices, typically increasing by a pixel per line. This change | |
4672 | occurred in version 20.3 but was not documented then. | |
4673 | ||
4674 | ** If you select the bar cursor style, it uses the frame's | |
4675 | cursor-color, rather than the cursor foreground pixel. | |
4676 | ||
4677 | ** In multibyte mode, Rmail decodes incoming MIME messages using the | |
4678 | character set specified in the message. If you want to disable this | |
4679 | feature, set the variable rmail-decode-mime-charset to nil. | |
4680 | ||
4681 | ** Not new, but not mentioned previously in NEWS: when you use #! at | |
4682 | the beginning of a file to make it executable and specify an | |
4683 | interpreter program, Emacs looks on the second line for the -*- mode | |
4684 | and variable specification, as well as on the first line. | |
4685 | ||
4686 | ** Support for IBM codepage encoding of non-ASCII characters. | |
4687 | ||
4688 | The new command M-x codepage-setup creates a special coding system | |
4689 | that can be used to convert text between a specific IBM codepage and | |
4690 | one of the character sets built into Emacs which matches that | |
4691 | codepage. For example, codepage 850 corresponds to Latin-1 character | |
4692 | set, codepage 855 corresponds to Cyrillic-ISO character set, etc. | |
4693 | ||
4694 | Windows codepages 1250, 1251 and some others, where Windows deviates | |
4695 | from the corresponding ISO character set, are also supported. | |
4696 | ||
4697 | IBM box-drawing characters and other glyphs which don't have | |
4698 | equivalents in the corresponding ISO character set, are converted to | |
4699 | a character defined by dos-unsupported-char-glyph on MS-DOS, and to | |
4700 | `?' on other systems. | |
4701 | ||
4702 | IBM codepages are widely used on MS-DOS and MS-Windows, so this | |
4703 | feature is most useful on those platforms, but it can also be used on | |
4704 | Unix. | |
4705 | ||
4706 | Emacs compiled for MS-DOS automatically loads the support for the | |
4707 | current codepage when it starts. | |
4708 | ||
4709 | ** Mail changes | |
4710 | ||
4711 | *** When mail is sent using compose-mail (C-x m), and if | |
4712 | `mail-send-nonascii' is set to the new default value `mime', | |
4713 | appropriate MIME headers are added. The headers are added only if | |
4714 | non-ASCII characters are present in the body of the mail, and no other | |
4715 | MIME headers are already present. For example, the following three | |
4716 | headers are added if the coding system used in the *mail* buffer is | |
4717 | latin-1: | |
4718 | ||
4719 | MIME-version: 1.0 | |
4720 | Content-type: text/plain; charset=iso-8859-1 | |
4721 | Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit | |
4722 | ||
4723 | *** The new variable default-sendmail-coding-system specifies the | |
4724 | default way to encode outgoing mail. This has higher priority than | |
4725 | default-buffer-file-coding-system but has lower priority than | |
4726 | sendmail-coding-system and the local value of | |
4727 | buffer-file-coding-system. | |
4728 | ||
4729 | You should not set this variable manually. Instead, set | |
4730 | sendmail-coding-system to specify a fixed encoding for all outgoing | |
4731 | mail. | |
4732 | ||
4733 | *** When you try to send a message that contains non-ASCII characters, | |
4734 | if the coding system specified by those variables doesn't handle them, | |
4735 | Emacs will ask you to select a suitable coding system while showing a | |
4736 | list of possible coding systems. | |
4737 | ||
4738 | ** CC Mode changes | |
4739 | ||
4740 | *** c-default-style can now take an association list that maps major | |
4741 | modes to style names. When this variable is an alist, Java mode no | |
4742 | longer hardcodes a setting to "java" style. See the variable's | |
4743 | docstring for details. | |
4744 | ||
4745 | *** It's now possible to put a list as the offset on a syntactic | |
4746 | symbol. The list is evaluated recursively until a non-nil offset is | |
4747 | found. This is useful to combine several lineup functions to act in a | |
4748 | prioritized order on a single line. However, none of the supplied | |
4749 | lineup functions use this feature currently. | |
4750 | ||
4751 | *** New syntactic symbol catch-clause, which is used on the "catch" and | |
4752 | "finally" lines in try-catch constructs in C++ and Java. | |
4753 | ||
4754 | *** New cleanup brace-catch-brace on c-cleanup-list, which does for | |
4755 | "catch" lines what brace-elseif-brace does for "else if" lines. | |
4756 | ||
4757 | *** The braces of Java anonymous inner classes are treated separately | |
4758 | from the braces of other classes in auto-newline mode. Two new | |
4759 | symbols inexpr-class-open and inexpr-class-close may be used on | |
4760 | c-hanging-braces-alist to control the automatic newlines used for | |
4761 | anonymous classes. | |
4762 | ||
4763 | *** Support for the Pike language added, along with new Pike specific | |
4764 | syntactic symbols: inlambda, lambda-intro-cont | |
4765 | ||
4766 | *** Support for Java anonymous classes via new syntactic symbol | |
4767 | inexpr-class. New syntactic symbol inexpr-statement for Pike | |
4768 | support and gcc-style statements inside expressions. New lineup | |
4769 | function c-lineup-inexpr-block. | |
4770 | ||
4771 | *** New syntactic symbol brace-entry-open which is used in brace lists | |
4772 | (i.e. static initializers) when a list entry starts with an open | |
4773 | brace. These used to be recognized as brace-list-entry's. | |
4774 | c-electric-brace also recognizes brace-entry-open braces | |
4775 | (brace-list-entry's can no longer be electrified). | |
4776 | ||
4777 | *** New command c-indent-line-or-region, not bound by default. | |
4778 | ||
4779 | *** `#' is only electric when typed in the indentation of a line. | |
4780 | ||
4781 | *** Parentheses are now electric (via the new command c-electric-paren) | |
4782 | for auto-reindenting lines when parens are typed. | |
4783 | ||
4784 | *** In "gnu" style, inline-open offset is now set to zero. | |
4785 | ||
4786 | *** Uniform handling of the inclass syntactic symbol. The indentation | |
4787 | associated with it is now always relative to the class opening brace. | |
4788 | This means that the indentation behavior has changed in some | |
4789 | circumstances, but only if you've put anything besides 0 on the | |
4790 | class-open syntactic symbol (none of the default styles do that). | |
4791 | ||
4792 | ** Gnus changes. | |
4793 | ||
4794 | *** New functionality for using Gnus as an offline newsreader has been | |
4795 | added. A plethora of new commands and modes have been added. See the | |
4796 | Gnus manual for the full story. | |
4797 | ||
4798 | *** The nndraft backend has returned, but works differently than | |
4799 | before. All Message buffers are now also articles in the nndraft | |
4800 | group, which is created automatically. | |
4801 | ||
4802 | *** `gnus-alter-header-function' can now be used to alter header | |
4803 | values. | |
4804 | ||
4805 | *** `gnus-summary-goto-article' now accept Message-ID's. | |
4806 | ||
4807 | *** A new Message command for deleting text in the body of a message | |
4808 | outside the region: `C-c C-v'. | |
4809 | ||
4810 | *** You can now post to component group in nnvirtual groups with | |
4811 | `C-u C-c C-c'. | |
4812 | ||
4813 | *** `nntp-rlogin-program' -- new variable to ease customization. | |
4814 | ||
4815 | *** `C-u C-c C-c' in `gnus-article-edit-mode' will now inhibit | |
4816 | re-highlighting of the article buffer. | |
4817 | ||
4818 | *** New element in `gnus-boring-article-headers' -- `long-to'. | |
4819 | ||
4820 | *** `M-i' symbolic prefix command. See the section "Symbolic | |
4821 | Prefixes" in the Gnus manual for details. | |
4822 | ||
4823 | *** `L' and `I' in the summary buffer now take the symbolic prefix | |
4824 | `a' to add the score rule to the "all.SCORE" file. | |
4825 | ||
4826 | *** `gnus-simplify-subject-functions' variable to allow greater | |
4827 | control over simplification. | |
4828 | ||
4829 | *** `A T' -- new command for fetching the current thread. | |
4830 | ||
4831 | *** `/ T' -- new command for including the current thread in the | |
4832 | limit. | |
4833 | ||
4834 | *** `M-RET' is a new Message command for breaking cited text. | |
4835 | ||
4836 | *** \\1-expressions are now valid in `nnmail-split-methods'. | |
4837 | ||
4838 | *** The `custom-face-lookup' function has been removed. | |
4839 | If you used this function in your initialization files, you must | |
4840 | rewrite them to use `face-spec-set' instead. | |
4841 | ||
8a33023e | 4842 | *** Canceling now uses the current select method. Symbolic prefix |
3787e12e GM |
4843 | `a' forces normal posting method. |
4844 | ||
4845 | *** New command to translate M******** sm*rtq**t*s into proper text | |
4846 | -- `W d'. | |
4847 | ||
4848 | *** For easier debugging of nntp, you can set `nntp-record-commands' | |
4849 | to a non-nil value. | |
4850 | ||
4851 | *** nntp now uses ~/.authinfo, a .netrc-like file, for controlling | |
4852 | where and how to send AUTHINFO to NNTP servers. | |
4853 | ||
4854 | *** A command for editing group parameters from the summary buffer | |
4855 | has been added. | |
4856 | ||
4857 | *** A history of where mails have been split is available. | |
4858 | ||
4859 | *** A new article date command has been added -- `article-date-iso8601'. | |
4860 | ||
4861 | *** Subjects can be simplified when threading by setting | |
4862 | `gnus-score-thread-simplify'. | |
4863 | ||
4864 | *** A new function for citing in Message has been added -- | |
4865 | `message-cite-original-without-signature'. | |
4866 | ||
4867 | *** `article-strip-all-blank-lines' -- new article command. | |
4868 | ||
4869 | *** A new Message command to kill to the end of the article has | |
4870 | been added. | |
4871 | ||
4872 | *** A minimum adaptive score can be specified by using the | |
4873 | `gnus-adaptive-word-minimum' variable. | |
4874 | ||
4875 | *** The "lapsed date" article header can be kept continually | |
4876 | updated by the `gnus-start-date-timer' command. | |
4877 | ||
4878 | *** Web listserv archives can be read with the nnlistserv backend. | |
4879 | ||
4880 | *** Old dejanews archives can now be read by nnweb. | |
4881 | ||
4882 | *** `gnus-posting-styles' has been re-activated. | |
4883 | ||
4884 | ** Changes to TeX and LaTeX mode | |
4885 | ||
4886 | *** The new variable `tex-start-options-string' can be used to give | |
4887 | options for the TeX run. The default value causes TeX to run in | |
4888 | nonstopmode. For an interactive TeX run set it to nil or "". | |
4889 | ||
4890 | *** The command `tex-feed-input' sends input to the Tex Shell. In a | |
4891 | TeX buffer it is bound to the keys C-RET, C-c RET, and C-c C-m (some | |
4892 | of these keys may not work on all systems). For instance, if you run | |
4893 | TeX interactively and if the TeX run stops because of an error, you | |
4894 | can continue it without leaving the TeX buffer by typing C-RET. | |
4895 | ||
4896 | *** The Tex Shell Buffer is now in `compilation-shell-minor-mode'. | |
4897 | All error-parsing commands of the Compilation major mode are available | |
4898 | but bound to keys that don't collide with the shell. Thus you can use | |
4899 | the Tex Shell for command line executions like a usual shell. | |
4900 | ||
4901 | *** The commands `tex-validate-region' and `tex-validate-buffer' check | |
4902 | the matching of braces and $'s. The errors are listed in a *Occur* | |
4903 | buffer and you can use C-c C-c or mouse-2 to go to a particular | |
4904 | mismatch. | |
4905 | ||
4906 | ** Changes to RefTeX mode | |
4907 | ||
4908 | *** The table of contents buffer can now also display labels and | |
4909 | file boundaries in addition to sections. Use `l', `i', and `c' keys. | |
4910 | ||
4911 | *** Labels derived from context (the section heading) are now | |
4912 | lowercase by default. To make the label legal in LaTeX, latin-1 | |
4913 | characters will lose their accent. All Mule characters will be | |
4914 | removed from the label. | |
4915 | ||
4916 | *** The automatic display of cross reference information can also use | |
4917 | a window instead of the echo area. See variable `reftex-auto-view-crossref'. | |
4918 | ||
4919 | *** kpsewhich can be used by RefTeX to find TeX and BibTeX files. See the | |
4920 | customization group `reftex-finding-files'. | |
4921 | ||
4922 | *** The option `reftex-bibfile-ignore-list' has been renamed to | |
4923 | `reftex-bibfile-ignore-regexps' and indeed can be fed with regular | |
4924 | expressions. | |
4925 | ||
4926 | *** Multiple Selection buffers are now hidden buffers. | |
4927 | ||
4928 | ** New/deleted modes and packages | |
4929 | ||
4930 | *** The package snmp-mode.el provides major modes for editing SNMP and | |
4931 | SNMPv2 MIBs. It has entries on `auto-mode-alist'. | |
4932 | ||
4933 | *** The package sql.el provides a major mode, M-x sql-mode, for | |
4934 | editing SQL files, and M-x sql-interactive-mode for interacting with | |
4935 | SQL interpreters. It has an entry on `auto-mode-alist'. | |
4936 | ||
4937 | *** M-x highlight-changes-mode provides a minor mode displaying buffer | |
4938 | changes with a special face. | |
4939 | ||
4940 | *** ispell4.el has been deleted. It got in the way of ispell.el and | |
4941 | this was hard to fix reliably. It has long been obsolete -- use | |
4942 | Ispell 3.1 and ispell.el. | |
05197f40 | 4943 | \f |
3787e12e GM |
4944 | * MS-DOS changes in Emacs 20.4 |
4945 | ||
4946 | ** Emacs compiled for MS-DOS now supports MULE features better. | |
4947 | This includes support for display of all ISO 8859-N character sets, | |
4948 | conversion to and from IBM codepage encoding of non-ASCII characters, | |
4949 | and automatic setup of the MULE environment at startup. For details, | |
4950 | check out the section `MS-DOS and MULE' in the manual. | |
4951 | ||
4952 | The MS-DOS installation procedure automatically configures and builds | |
4953 | Emacs with input method support if it finds an unpacked Leim | |
4954 | distribution when the config.bat script is run. | |
4955 | ||
4956 | ** Formerly, the value of lpr-command did not affect printing on | |
4957 | MS-DOS unless print-region-function was set to nil, but now it | |
4958 | controls whether an external program is invoked or output is written | |
4959 | directly to a printer port. Similarly, in the previous version of | |
4960 | Emacs, the value of ps-lpr-command did not affect PostScript printing | |
4961 | on MS-DOS unless ps-printer-name was set to something other than a | |
4962 | string (eg. t or `pipe'), but now it controls whether an external | |
4963 | program is used. (These changes were made so that configuration of | |
4964 | printing variables would be almost identical across all platforms.) | |
4965 | ||
4966 | ** In the previous version of Emacs, PostScript and non-PostScript | |
4967 | output was piped to external programs, but because most print programs | |
4968 | available for MS-DOS and MS-Windows cannot read data from their standard | |
4969 | input, on those systems the data to be output is now written to a | |
4970 | temporary file whose name is passed as the last argument to the external | |
4971 | program. | |
4972 | ||
4973 | An exception is made for `print', a standard program on Windows NT, | |
4974 | and `nprint', a standard program on Novell Netware. For both of these | |
4975 | programs, the command line is constructed in the appropriate syntax | |
4976 | automatically, using only the value of printer-name or ps-printer-name | |
4977 | as appropriate--the value of the relevant `-switches' variable is | |
4978 | ignored, as both programs have no useful switches. | |
4979 | ||
4980 | ** The value of the variable dos-printer (cf. dos-ps-printer), if it has | |
4981 | a value, overrides the value of printer-name (cf. ps-printer-name), on | |
4982 | MS-DOS and MS-Windows only. This has been true since version 20.3, but | |
4983 | was not documented clearly before. | |
4984 | ||
4985 | ** All the Emacs games now work on MS-DOS terminals. | |
4986 | This includes Tetris and Snake. | |
05197f40 | 4987 | \f |
3787e12e GM |
4988 | * Lisp changes in Emacs 20.4 |
4989 | ||
4990 | ** New functions line-beginning-position and line-end-position | |
4991 | return the position of the beginning or end of the current line. | |
4992 | They both accept an optional argument, which has the same | |
4993 | meaning as the argument to beginning-of-line or end-of-line. | |
4994 | ||
4995 | ** find-file and allied functions now have an optional argument | |
4996 | WILDCARD. If this is non-nil, they do wildcard processing, | |
4997 | and visit all files that match the wildcard pattern. | |
4998 | ||
4999 | ** Changes in the file-attributes function. | |
5000 | ||
5001 | *** The file size returned by file-attributes may be an integer or a float. | |
5002 | It is an integer if the size fits in a Lisp integer, float otherwise. | |
5003 | ||
5004 | *** The inode number returned by file-attributes may be an integer (if | |
5005 | the number fits in a Lisp integer) or a cons cell containing two | |
5006 | integers. | |
5007 | ||
5008 | ** The new function directory-files-and-attributes returns a list of | |
5009 | files in a directory and their attributes. It accepts the same | |
5010 | arguments as directory-files and has similar semantics, except that | |
5011 | file names and attributes are returned. | |
5012 | ||
5013 | ** The new function file-attributes-lessp is a helper function for | |
5014 | sorting the list generated by directory-files-and-attributes. It | |
8a33023e | 5015 | accepts two arguments, each a list of a file name and its attributes. |
3787e12e GM |
5016 | It compares the file names of each according to string-lessp and |
5017 | returns the result. | |
5018 | ||
5019 | ** The new function file-expand-wildcards expands a wildcard-pattern | |
5020 | to produce a list of existing files that match the pattern. | |
5021 | ||
5022 | ** New functions for base64 conversion: | |
5023 | ||
5024 | The function base64-encode-region converts a part of the buffer | |
5025 | into the base64 code used in MIME. base64-decode-region | |
5026 | performs the opposite conversion. Line-breaking is supported | |
5027 | optionally. | |
5028 | ||
5029 | Functions base64-encode-string and base64-decode-string do a similar | |
5030 | job on the text in a string. They return the value as a new string. | |
5031 | ||
5032 | ** | |
5033 | The new function process-running-child-p | |
5034 | will tell you if a subprocess has given control of its | |
5035 | terminal to its own child process. | |
5036 | ||
5037 | ** interrupt-process and such functions have a new feature: | |
5038 | when the second argument is `lambda', they send a signal | |
5039 | to the running child of the subshell, if any, but if the shell | |
5040 | itself owns its terminal, no signal is sent. | |
5041 | ||
5042 | ** There are new widget types `plist' and `alist' which can | |
5043 | be used for customizing variables whose values are plists or alists. | |
5044 | ||
5045 | ** easymenu.el Now understands `:key-sequence' and `:style button'. | |
5046 | :included is an alias for :visible. | |
5047 | ||
5048 | easy-menu-add-item now understands the values returned by | |
5049 | easy-menu-remove-item and easy-menu-item-present-p. This can be used | |
5050 | to move or copy menu entries. | |
5051 | ||
5052 | ** Multibyte editing changes | |
5053 | ||
5054 | *** The definitions of sref and char-bytes are changed. Now, sref is | |
5055 | an alias of aref and char-bytes always returns 1. This change is to | |
5056 | make some Emacs Lisp code which works on 20.2 and earlier also | |
5057 | work on the latest Emacs. Such code uses a combination of sref and | |
5058 | char-bytes in a loop typically as below: | |
5059 | (setq char (sref str idx) | |
5060 | idx (+ idx (char-bytes idx))) | |
5061 | The byte-compiler now warns that this is obsolete. | |
5062 | ||
5063 | If you want to know how many bytes a specific multibyte character | |
5064 | (say, CH) occupies in a multibyte buffer, use this code: | |
5065 | (charset-bytes (char-charset ch)) | |
5066 | ||
5067 | *** In multibyte mode, when you narrow a buffer to some region, and the | |
5068 | region is preceded or followed by non-ASCII codes, inserting or | |
5069 | deleting at the head or the end of the region may signal this error: | |
5070 | ||
8a33023e | 5071 | Byte combining across boundary of accessible buffer text inhibited |
3787e12e GM |
5072 | |
5073 | This is to avoid some bytes being combined together into a character | |
5074 | across the boundary. | |
5075 | ||
5076 | *** The functions find-charset-region and find-charset-string include | |
5077 | `unknown' in the returned list in the following cases: | |
5078 | o The current buffer or the target string is unibyte and | |
5079 | contains 8-bit characters. | |
5080 | o The current buffer or the target string is multibyte and | |
5081 | contains invalid characters. | |
5082 | ||
5083 | *** The functions decode-coding-region and encode-coding-region remove | |
5084 | text properties of the target region. Ideally, they should correctly | |
5085 | preserve text properties, but for the moment, it's hard. Removing | |
5086 | text properties is better than preserving them in a less-than-correct | |
5087 | way. | |
5088 | ||
5089 | *** prefer-coding-system sets EOL conversion of default coding systems. | |
5090 | If the argument to prefer-coding-system specifies a certain type of | |
5091 | end of line conversion, the default coding systems set by | |
5092 | prefer-coding-system will specify that conversion type for end of line. | |
5093 | ||
5094 | *** The new function thai-compose-string can be used to properly | |
5095 | compose Thai characters in a string. | |
5096 | ||
5097 | ** The primitive `define-prefix-command' now takes an optional third | |
5098 | argument NAME, which should be a string. It supplies the menu name | |
5099 | for the created keymap. Keymaps created in order to be displayed as | |
5100 | menus should always use the third argument. | |
5101 | ||
5102 | ** The meanings of optional second arguments for read-char, | |
5103 | read-event, and read-char-exclusive are flipped. Now the second | |
5104 | arguments are INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD. These functions use the current | |
5105 | input method (if any) if and only if INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD is non-nil. | |
5106 | ||
5107 | ** The new function clear-this-command-keys empties out the contents | |
5108 | of the vector that (this-command-keys) returns. This is useful in | |
5109 | programs that read passwords, to prevent the passwords from echoing | |
5110 | inadvertently as part of the next command in certain cases. | |
5111 | ||
5112 | ** The new macro `with-temp-message' displays a temporary message in | |
5113 | the echo area, while executing some Lisp code. Like `progn', it | |
5114 | returns the value of the last form, but it also restores the previous | |
5115 | echo area contents. | |
5116 | ||
5117 | (with-temp-message MESSAGE &rest BODY) | |
5118 | ||
5119 | ** The function `require' now takes an optional third argument | |
5120 | NOERROR. If it is non-nil, then there is no error if the | |
5121 | requested feature cannot be loaded. | |
5122 | ||
5123 | ** In the function modify-face, an argument of (nil) for the | |
5124 | foreground color, background color or stipple pattern | |
5125 | means to clear out that attribute. | |
5126 | ||
5127 | ** The `outer-window-id' frame property of an X frame | |
5128 | gives the window number of the outermost X window for the frame. | |
5129 | ||
5130 | ** Temporary buffers made with with-output-to-temp-buffer are now | |
5131 | read-only by default, and normally use the major mode Help mode | |
5132 | unless you put them in some other non-Fundamental mode before the | |
5133 | end of with-output-to-temp-buffer. | |
5134 | ||
5135 | ** The new functions gap-position and gap-size return information on | |
5136 | the gap of the current buffer. | |
5137 | ||
5138 | ** The new functions position-bytes and byte-to-position provide a way | |
5139 | to convert between character positions and byte positions in the | |
5140 | current buffer. | |
5141 | ||
5142 | ** vc.el defines two new macros, `edit-vc-file' and `with-vc-file', to | |
5143 | facilitate working with version-controlled files from Lisp programs. | |
5144 | These macros check out a given file automatically if needed, and check | |
5145 | it back in after any modifications have been made. | |
05197f40 | 5146 | \f |
3787e12e GM |
5147 | * Installation Changes in Emacs 20.3 |
5148 | ||
5149 | ** The default value of load-path now includes most subdirectories of | |
5150 | the site-specific directories /usr/local/share/emacs/site-lisp and | |
5151 | /usr/local/share/emacs/VERSION/site-lisp, in addition to those | |
5152 | directories themselves. Both immediate subdirectories and | |
5153 | subdirectories multiple levels down are added to load-path. | |
5154 | ||
5155 | Not all subdirectories are included, though. Subdirectories whose | |
5156 | names do not start with a letter or digit are excluded. | |
5157 | Subdirectories named RCS or CVS are excluded. Also, a subdirectory | |
5158 | which contains a file named `.nosearch' is excluded. You can use | |
5159 | these methods to prevent certain subdirectories from being searched. | |
5160 | ||
5161 | Emacs finds these subdirectories and adds them to load-path when it | |
5162 | starts up. While it would be cleaner to find the subdirectories each | |
5163 | time Emacs loads a file, that would be much slower. | |
5164 | ||
5165 | This feature is an incompatible change. If you have stored some Emacs | |
5166 | Lisp files in a subdirectory of the site-lisp directory specifically | |
5167 | to prevent them from being used, you will need to rename the | |
5168 | subdirectory to start with a non-alphanumeric character, or create a | |
5169 | `.nosearch' file in it, in order to continue to achieve the desired | |
5170 | results. | |
5171 | ||
5172 | ** Emacs no longer includes an old version of the C preprocessor from | |
5173 | GCC. This was formerly used to help compile Emacs with C compilers | |
5174 | that had limits on the significant length of an identifier, but in | |
5175 | fact we stopped supporting such compilers some time ago. | |
05197f40 | 5176 | \f |
3787e12e GM |
5177 | * Changes in Emacs 20.3 |
5178 | ||
5179 | ** The new command C-x z (repeat) repeats the previous command | |
5180 | including its argument. If you repeat the z afterward, | |
5181 | it repeats the command additional times; thus, you can | |
5182 | perform many repetitions with one keystroke per repetition. | |
5183 | ||
5184 | ** Emacs now supports "selective undo" which undoes only within a | |
5185 | specified region. To do this, set point and mark around the desired | |
5186 | region and type C-u C-x u (or C-u C-_). You can then continue undoing | |
5187 | further, within the same region, by repeating the ordinary undo | |
5188 | command C-x u or C-_. This will keep undoing changes that were made | |
5189 | within the region you originally specified, until either all of them | |
5190 | are undone, or it encounters a change which crosses the edge of that | |
5191 | region. | |
5192 | ||
5193 | In Transient Mark mode, undoing when a region is active requests | |
5194 | selective undo. | |
5195 | ||
5196 | ** If you specify --unibyte when starting Emacs, then all buffers are | |
5197 | unibyte, except when a Lisp program specifically creates a multibyte | |
5198 | buffer. Setting the environment variable EMACS_UNIBYTE has the same | |
5199 | effect. The --no-unibyte option overrides EMACS_UNIBYTE and directs | |
5200 | Emacs to run normally in multibyte mode. | |
5201 | ||
5202 | The option --unibyte does not affect the reading of Emacs Lisp files, | |
5203 | though. If you want a Lisp file to be read in unibyte mode, use | |
5204 | -*-unibyte: t;-*- on its first line. That will force Emacs to | |
5205 | load that file in unibyte mode, regardless of how Emacs was started. | |
5206 | ||
5207 | ** toggle-enable-multibyte-characters no longer has a key binding and | |
5208 | no longer appears in the menu bar. We've realized that changing the | |
5209 | enable-multibyte-characters variable in an existing buffer is | |
5210 | something that most users not do. | |
5211 | ||
5212 | ** You can specify a coding system to use for the next cut or paste | |
5213 | operations through the window system with the command C-x RET X. | |
5214 | The coding system can make a difference for communication with other | |
5215 | applications. | |
5216 | ||
5217 | C-x RET x specifies a coding system for all subsequent cutting and | |
5218 | pasting operations. | |
5219 | ||
5220 | ** You can specify the printer to use for commands that do printing by | |
5221 | setting the variable `printer-name'. Just what a printer name looks | |
5222 | like depends on your operating system. You can specify a different | |
5223 | printer for the Postscript printing commands by setting | |
5224 | `ps-printer-name'. | |
5225 | ||
5226 | ** Emacs now supports on-the-fly spell checking by the means of a | |
5227 | minor mode. It is called M-x flyspell-mode. You don't have to remember | |
5228 | any other special commands to use it, and you will hardly notice it | |
5229 | except when you make a spelling error. Flyspell works by highlighting | |
5230 | incorrect words as soon as they are completed or as soon as the cursor | |
5231 | hits a new word. | |
5232 | ||
5233 | Flyspell mode works with whichever dictionary you have selected for | |
5234 | Ispell in Emacs. In TeX mode, it understands TeX syntax so as not | |
5235 | to be confused by TeX commands. | |
5236 | ||
5237 | You can correct a misspelled word by editing it into something | |
5238 | correct. You can also correct it, or accept it as correct, by | |
5239 | clicking on the word with Mouse-2; that gives you a pop-up menu | |
5240 | of various alternative replacements and actions. | |
5241 | ||
5242 | Flyspell mode also proposes "automatic" corrections. M-TAB replaces | |
5243 | the current misspelled word with a possible correction. If several | |
5244 | corrections are made possible, M-TAB cycles through them in | |
5245 | alphabetical order, or in order of decreasing likelihood if | |
5246 | flyspell-sort-corrections is nil. | |
5247 | ||
5248 | Flyspell mode also flags an error when a word is repeated, if | |
5249 | flyspell-mark-duplications-flag is non-nil. | |
5250 | ||
5251 | ** Changes in input method usage. | |
5252 | ||
5253 | Now you can use arrow keys (right, left, down, up) for selecting among | |
5254 | the alternatives just the same way as you do by C-f, C-b, C-n, and C-p | |
5255 | respectively. | |
5256 | ||
5257 | You can use the ENTER key to accept the current conversion. | |
5258 | ||
5259 | If you type TAB to display a list of alternatives, you can select one | |
5260 | of the alternatives with Mouse-2. | |
5261 | ||
5262 | The meaning of the variable `input-method-verbose-flag' is changed so | |
5263 | that you can set it to t, nil, `default', or `complex-only'. | |
5264 | ||
5265 | If the value is nil, extra guidance is never given. | |
5266 | ||
5267 | If the value is t, extra guidance is always given. | |
5268 | ||
5269 | If the value is `complex-only', extra guidance is always given only | |
5270 | when you are using complex input methods such as chinese-py. | |
5271 | ||
5272 | If the value is `default' (this is the default), extra guidance is | |
5273 | given in the following case: | |
5274 | o When you are using a complex input method. | |
5275 | o When you are using a simple input method but not in the minibuffer. | |
5276 | ||
5277 | If you are using Emacs through a very slow line, setting | |
5278 | input-method-verbose-flag to nil or to complex-only is a good choice, | |
5279 | and if you are using an input method you are not familiar with, | |
5280 | setting it to t is helpful. | |
5281 | ||
5282 | The old command select-input-method is now called set-input-method. | |
5283 | ||
5284 | In the language environment "Korean", you can use the following | |
5285 | keys: | |
5286 | Shift-SPC toggle-korean-input-method | |
5287 | C-F9 quail-hangul-switch-symbol-ksc | |
5288 | F9 quail-hangul-switch-hanja | |
5289 | These key bindings are canceled when you switch to another language | |
5290 | environment. | |
5291 | ||
5292 | ** The minibuffer history of file names now records the specified file | |
5293 | names, not the entire minibuffer input. For example, if the | |
5294 | minibuffer starts out with /usr/foo/, you might type in /etc/passwd to | |
5295 | get | |
5296 | ||
5297 | /usr/foo//etc/passwd | |
5298 | ||
5299 | which stands for the file /etc/passwd. | |
5300 | ||
5301 | Formerly, this used to put /usr/foo//etc/passwd in the history list. | |
5302 | Now this puts just /etc/passwd in the history list. | |
5303 | ||
5304 | ** If you are root, Emacs sets backup-by-copying-when-mismatch to t | |
5305 | at startup, so that saving a file will be sure to preserve | |
5306 | its owner and group. | |
5307 | ||
5308 | ** find-func.el can now also find the place of definition of Emacs | |
5309 | Lisp variables in user-loaded libraries. | |
5310 | ||
5311 | ** C-x r t (string-rectangle) now deletes the existing rectangle | |
5312 | contents before inserting the specified string on each line. | |
5313 | ||
5314 | ** There is a new command delete-whitespace-rectangle | |
5315 | which deletes whitespace starting from a particular column | |
5316 | in all the lines on a rectangle. The column is specified | |
5317 | by the left edge of the rectangle. | |
5318 | ||
5319 | ** You can now store a number into a register with C-u NUMBER C-x r n REG, | |
5320 | increment it by INC with C-u INC C-x r + REG (to increment by one, omit | |
5321 | C-u INC), and insert it in the buffer with C-x r g REG. This is useful | |
5322 | for writing keyboard macros. | |
5323 | ||
5324 | ** The new command M-x speedbar displays a frame in which directories, | |
5325 | files, and tags can be displayed, manipulated, and jumped to. The | |
5326 | frame defaults to 20 characters in width, and is the same height as | |
5327 | the frame that it was started from. Some major modes define | |
5328 | additional commands for the speedbar, including Rmail, GUD/GDB, and | |
5329 | info. | |
5330 | ||
5331 | ** query-replace-regexp is now bound to C-M-%. | |
5332 | ||
5333 | ** In Transient Mark mode, when the region is active, M-x | |
5334 | query-replace and the other replace commands now operate on the region | |
5335 | contents only. | |
5336 | ||
5337 | ** M-x write-region, when used interactively, now asks for | |
5338 | confirmation before overwriting an existing file. When you call | |
5339 | the function from a Lisp program, a new optional argument CONFIRM | |
5340 | says whether to ask for confirmation in this case. | |
5341 | ||
5342 | ** If you use find-file-literally and the file is already visited | |
5343 | non-literally, the command asks you whether to revisit the file | |
5344 | literally. If you say no, it signals an error. | |
5345 | ||
5346 | ** Major modes defined with the "derived mode" feature | |
5347 | now use the proper name for the mode hook: WHATEVER-mode-hook. | |
5348 | Formerly they used the name WHATEVER-mode-hooks, but that is | |
5349 | inconsistent with Emacs conventions. | |
5350 | ||
5351 | ** shell-command-on-region (and shell-command) reports success or | |
5352 | failure if the command produces no output. | |
5353 | ||
5354 | ** Set focus-follows-mouse to nil if your window system or window | |
5355 | manager does not transfer focus to another window when you just move | |
5356 | the mouse. | |
5357 | ||
5358 | ** mouse-menu-buffer-maxlen has been renamed to | |
5359 | mouse-buffer-menu-maxlen to be consistent with the other related | |
5360 | function and variable names. | |
5361 | ||
5362 | ** The new variable auto-coding-alist specifies coding systems for | |
5363 | reading specific files. This has higher priority than | |
5364 | file-coding-system-alist. | |
5365 | ||
5366 | ** If you set the variable unibyte-display-via-language-environment to | |
5367 | t, then Emacs displays non-ASCII characters are displayed by | |
5368 | converting them to the equivalent multibyte characters according to | |
5369 | the current language environment. As a result, they are displayed | |
5370 | according to the current fontset. | |
5371 | ||
5372 | ** C-q's handling of codes in the range 0200 through 0377 is changed. | |
5373 | ||
5374 | The codes in the range 0200 through 0237 are inserted as one byte of | |
5375 | that code regardless of the values of nonascii-translation-table and | |
5376 | nonascii-insert-offset. | |
5377 | ||
5378 | For the codes in the range 0240 through 0377, if | |
5379 | enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil and nonascii-translation-table | |
5380 | nor nonascii-insert-offset can't convert them to valid multibyte | |
5381 | characters, they are converted to Latin-1 characters. | |
5382 | ||
5383 | ** If you try to find a file that is not read-accessible, you now get | |
5384 | an error, rather than an empty buffer and a warning. | |
5385 | ||
5386 | ** In the minibuffer history commands M-r and M-s, an upper case | |
5387 | letter in the regular expression forces case-sensitive search. | |
5388 | ||
5389 | ** In the *Help* buffer, cross-references to commands and variables | |
5390 | are inferred and hyperlinked. Use C-h m in Help mode for the relevant | |
5391 | command keys. | |
5392 | ||
5393 | ** M-x apropos-command, with a prefix argument, no longer looks for | |
5394 | user option variables--instead it looks for noninteractive functions. | |
5395 | ||
5396 | Meanwhile, the command apropos-variable normally searches for | |
5397 | user option variables; with a prefix argument, it looks at | |
5398 | all variables that have documentation. | |
5399 | ||
5400 | ** When you type a long line in the minibuffer, and the minibuffer | |
5401 | shows just one line, automatically scrolling works in a special way | |
5402 | that shows you overlap with the previous line of text. The variable | |
5403 | minibuffer-scroll-overlap controls how many characters of overlap | |
5404 | it should show; the default is 20. | |
5405 | ||
5406 | Meanwhile, Resize Minibuffer mode is still available; in that mode, | |
5407 | the minibuffer grows taller (up to a point) as needed to show the whole | |
5408 | of your input. | |
5409 | ||
5410 | ** The new command M-x customize-changed-options lets you customize | |
5411 | all the options whose meanings or default values have changed in | |
5412 | recent Emacs versions. You specify a previous Emacs version number as | |
5413 | argument, and the command creates a customization buffer showing all | |
5414 | the customizable options which were changed since that version. | |
5415 | Newly added options are included as well. | |
5416 | ||
5417 | If you don't specify a particular version number argument, | |
5418 | then the customization buffer shows all the customizable options | |
5419 | for which Emacs versions of changes are recorded. | |
5420 | ||
5421 | This function is also bound to the Changed Options entry in the | |
5422 | Customize menu. | |
5423 | ||
5424 | ** When you run M-x grep with a prefix argument, it figures out | |
5425 | the tag around point and puts that into the default grep command. | |
5426 | ||
5427 | ** The new command M-* (pop-tag-mark) pops back through a history of | |
5428 | buffer positions from which M-. or other tag-finding commands were | |
5429 | invoked. | |
5430 | ||
5431 | ** The new variable comment-padding specifies the number of spaces | |
5432 | that `comment-region' will insert before the actual text of the comment. | |
5433 | The default is 1. | |
5434 | ||
5435 | ** In Fortran mode the characters `.', `_' and `$' now have symbol | |
5436 | syntax, not word syntax. Fortran mode now supports `imenu' and has | |
5437 | new commands fortran-join-line (M-^) and fortran-narrow-to-subprogram | |
5438 | (C-x n d). M-q can be used to fill a statement or comment block | |
5439 | sensibly. | |
5440 | ||
5441 | ** GUD now supports jdb, the Java debugger, and pdb, the Python debugger. | |
5442 | ||
5443 | ** If you set the variable add-log-keep-changes-together to a non-nil | |
5444 | value, the command `C-x 4 a' will automatically notice when you make | |
5445 | two entries in one day for one file, and combine them. | |
5446 | ||
5447 | ** You can use the command M-x diary-mail-entries to mail yourself a | |
5448 | reminder about upcoming diary entries. See the documentation string | |
5449 | for a sample shell script for calling this function automatically | |
5450 | every night. | |
5451 | ||
5452 | ** Desktop changes | |
5453 | ||
5454 | *** All you need to do to enable use of the Desktop package, is to set | |
5455 | the variable desktop-enable to t with Custom. | |
5456 | ||
5457 | *** Minor modes are now restored. Which minor modes are restored | |
5458 | and how modes are restored is controlled by `desktop-minor-mode-table'. | |
5459 | ||
5460 | ** There is no need to do anything special, now, to enable Gnus to | |
5461 | read and post multi-lingual articles. | |
5462 | ||
5463 | ** Outline mode has now support for showing hidden outlines when | |
5464 | doing an isearch. In order for this to happen search-invisible should | |
5465 | be set to open (the default). If an isearch match is inside a hidden | |
5466 | outline the outline is made visible. If you continue pressing C-s and | |
5467 | the match moves outside the formerly invisible outline, the outline is | |
5468 | made invisible again. | |
5469 | ||
5470 | ** Mail reading and sending changes | |
5471 | ||
5472 | *** The Rmail e command now switches to displaying the whole header of | |
5473 | the message before it lets you edit the message. This is so that any | |
5474 | changes you make in the header will not be lost if you subsequently | |
5475 | toggle. | |
5476 | ||
5477 | *** The w command in Rmail, which writes the message body into a file, | |
5478 | now works in the summary buffer as well. (The command to delete the | |
5479 | summary buffer is now Q.) The default file name for the w command, if | |
5480 | the message has no subject, is stored in the variable | |
5481 | rmail-default-body-file. | |
5482 | ||
5483 | *** Most of the commands and modes that operate on mail and netnews no | |
5484 | longer depend on the value of mail-header-separator. Instead, they | |
5485 | handle whatever separator the buffer happens to use. | |
5486 | ||
5487 | *** If you set mail-signature to a value which is not t, nil, or a string, | |
5488 | it should be an expression. When you send a message, this expression | |
5489 | is evaluated to insert the signature. | |
5490 | ||
5491 | *** The new Lisp library feedmail.el (version 8) enhances processing of | |
5492 | outbound email messages. It works in coordination with other email | |
5493 | handling packages (e.g., rmail, VM, gnus) and is responsible for | |
5494 | putting final touches on messages and actually submitting them for | |
5495 | transmission. Users of the emacs program "fakemail" might be | |
5496 | especially interested in trying feedmail. | |
5497 | ||
5498 | feedmail is not enabled by default. See comments at the top of | |
5499 | feedmail.el for set-up instructions. Among the bigger features | |
5500 | provided by feedmail are: | |
5501 | ||
5502 | **** you can park outgoing messages into a disk-based queue and | |
5503 | stimulate sending some or all of them later (handy for laptop users); | |
5504 | there is also a queue for draft messages | |
5505 | ||
5506 | **** you can get one last look at the prepped outbound message and | |
5507 | be prompted for confirmation | |
5508 | ||
5509 | **** does smart filling of address headers | |
5510 | ||
5511 | **** can generate a MESSAGE-ID: line and a DATE: line; the date can be | |
5512 | the time the message was written or the time it is being sent; this | |
5513 | can make FCC copies more closely resemble copies that recipients get | |
5514 | ||
5515 | **** you can specify an arbitrary function for actually transmitting | |
5516 | the message; included in feedmail are interfaces for /bin/[r]mail, | |
5517 | /usr/lib/sendmail, and elisp smtpmail; it's easy to write a new | |
5518 | function for something else (10-20 lines of elisp) | |
5519 | ||
5520 | ** Dired changes | |
5521 | ||
5522 | *** The Dired function dired-do-toggle, which toggles marked and unmarked | |
5523 | files, is now bound to "t" instead of "T". | |
5524 | ||
5525 | *** dired-at-point has been added to ffap.el. It allows one to easily | |
5526 | run Dired on the directory name at point. | |
5527 | ||
5528 | *** Dired has a new command: %g. It searches the contents of | |
5529 | files in the directory and marks each file that contains a match | |
5530 | for a specified regexp. | |
5531 | ||
5532 | ** VC Changes | |
5533 | ||
5534 | *** New option vc-ignore-vc-files lets you turn off version control | |
5535 | conveniently. | |
5536 | ||
5537 | *** VC Dired has been completely rewritten. It is now much | |
5538 | faster, especially for CVS, and works very similar to ordinary | |
5539 | Dired. | |
5540 | ||
5541 | VC Dired is invoked by typing C-x v d and entering the name of the | |
5542 | directory to display. By default, VC Dired gives you a recursive | |
5543 | listing of all files at or below the given directory which are | |
5544 | currently locked (for CVS, all files not up-to-date are shown). | |
5545 | ||
5546 | You can change the listing format by setting vc-dired-recurse to nil, | |
5547 | then it shows only the given directory, and you may also set | |
5548 | vc-dired-terse-display to nil, then it shows all files under version | |
5549 | control plus the names of any subdirectories, so that you can type `i' | |
5550 | on such lines to insert them manually, as in ordinary Dired. | |
5551 | ||
5552 | All Dired commands operate normally in VC Dired, except for `v', which | |
5553 | is redefined as the version control prefix. That means you may type | |
5554 | `v l', `v =' etc. to invoke `vc-print-log', `vc-diff' and the like on | |
5555 | the file named in the current Dired buffer line. `v v' invokes | |
5556 | `vc-next-action' on this file, or on all files currently marked. | |
5557 | ||
5558 | The new command `v t' (vc-dired-toggle-terse-mode) allows you to | |
5559 | toggle between terse display (only locked files) and full display (all | |
5560 | VC files plus subdirectories). There is also a special command, | |
5561 | `* l', to mark all files currently locked. | |
5562 | ||
5563 | Giving a prefix argument to C-x v d now does the same thing as in | |
5564 | ordinary Dired: it allows you to supply additional options for the ls | |
5565 | command in the minibuffer, to fine-tune VC Dired's output. | |
5566 | ||
5567 | *** Under CVS, if you merge changes from the repository into a working | |
5568 | file, and CVS detects conflicts, VC now offers to start an ediff | |
5569 | session to resolve them. | |
5570 | ||
5571 | Alternatively, you can use the new command `vc-resolve-conflicts' to | |
5572 | resolve conflicts in a file at any time. It works in any buffer that | |
5573 | contains conflict markers as generated by rcsmerge (which is what CVS | |
5574 | uses as well). | |
5575 | ||
5576 | *** You can now transfer changes between branches, using the new | |
5577 | command vc-merge (C-x v m). It is implemented for RCS and CVS. When | |
5578 | you invoke it in a buffer under version-control, you can specify | |
5579 | either an entire branch or a pair of versions, and the changes on that | |
5580 | branch or between the two versions are merged into the working file. | |
5581 | If this results in any conflicts, they may be resolved interactively, | |
5582 | using ediff. | |
5583 | ||
5584 | ** Changes in Font Lock | |
5585 | ||
5586 | *** The face and variable previously known as font-lock-reference-face | |
5587 | are now called font-lock-constant-face to better reflect their typical | |
5588 | use for highlighting constants and labels. (Its face properties are | |
5589 | unchanged.) The variable font-lock-reference-face remains for now for | |
5590 | compatibility reasons, but its value is font-lock-constant-face. | |
5591 | ||
5592 | ** Frame name display changes | |
5593 | ||
5594 | *** The command set-frame-name lets you set the name of the current | |
5595 | frame. You can use the new command select-frame-by-name to select and | |
5596 | raise a frame; this is mostly useful on character-only terminals, or | |
5597 | when many frames are invisible or iconified. | |
5598 | ||
5599 | *** On character-only terminal (not a window system), changing the | |
5600 | frame name is now reflected on the mode line and in the Buffers/Frames | |
5601 | menu. | |
5602 | ||
5603 | ** Comint (subshell) changes | |
5604 | ||
5605 | *** In Comint modes, the commands to kill, stop or interrupt a | |
5606 | subjob now also kill pending input. This is for compatibility | |
5607 | with ordinary shells, where the signal characters do this. | |
5608 | ||
5609 | *** There are new commands in Comint mode. | |
5610 | ||
5611 | C-c C-x fetches the "next" line from the input history; | |
5612 | that is, the line after the last line you got. | |
5613 | You can use this command to fetch successive lines, one by one. | |
5614 | ||
5615 | C-c SPC accumulates lines of input. More precisely, it arranges to | |
5616 | send the current line together with the following line, when you send | |
5617 | the following line. | |
5618 | ||
5619 | C-c C-a if repeated twice consecutively now moves to the process mark, | |
5620 | which separates the pending input from the subprocess output and the | |
5621 | previously sent input. | |
5622 | ||
5623 | C-c M-r now runs comint-previous-matching-input-from-input; | |
5624 | it searches for a previous command, using the current pending input | |
5625 | as the search string. | |
5626 | ||
5627 | *** New option compilation-scroll-output can be set to scroll | |
5628 | automatically in compilation-mode windows. | |
5629 | ||
5630 | ** C mode changes | |
5631 | ||
5632 | *** Multiline macros are now handled, both as they affect indentation, | |
5633 | and as recognized syntax. New syntactic symbol cpp-macro-cont is | |
5634 | assigned to second and subsequent lines of a multiline macro | |
5635 | definition. | |
5636 | ||
5637 | *** A new style "user" which captures all non-hook-ified | |
5638 | (i.e. top-level) .emacs file variable settings and customizations. | |
5639 | Style "cc-mode" is an alias for "user" and is deprecated. "gnu" | |
5640 | style is still the default however. | |
5641 | ||
5642 | *** "java" style now conforms to Sun's JDK coding style. | |
5643 | ||
5644 | *** There are new commands c-beginning-of-defun, c-end-of-defun which | |
5645 | are alternatives which you could bind to C-M-a and C-M-e if you prefer | |
5646 | them. They do not have key bindings by default. | |
5647 | ||
5648 | *** New and improved implementations of M-a (c-beginning-of-statement) | |
5649 | and M-e (c-end-of-statement). | |
5650 | ||
5651 | *** C++ namespace blocks are supported, with new syntactic symbols | |
5652 | namespace-open, namespace-close, and innamespace. | |
5653 | ||
5654 | *** File local variable settings of c-file-style and c-file-offsets | |
5655 | makes the style variables local to that buffer only. | |
5656 | ||
5657 | *** New indentation functions c-lineup-close-paren, | |
5658 | c-indent-one-line-block, c-lineup-dont-change. | |
5659 | ||
5660 | *** Improvements (hopefully!) to the way CC Mode is loaded. You | |
5661 | should now be able to do a (require 'cc-mode) to get the entire | |
5662 | package loaded properly for customization in your .emacs file. A new | |
5663 | variable c-initialize-on-load controls this and is t by default. | |
5664 | ||
5665 | ** Changes to hippie-expand. | |
5666 | ||
5667 | *** New customization variable `hippie-expand-dabbrev-skip-space'. If | |
5668 | non-nil, trailing spaces may be included in the abbreviation to search for, | |
5669 | which then gives the same behavior as the original `dabbrev-expand'. | |
5670 | ||
5671 | *** New customization variable `hippie-expand-dabbrev-as-symbol'. If | |
5672 | non-nil, characters of syntax '_' is considered part of the word when | |
5673 | expanding dynamically. | |
5674 | ||
5675 | *** New customization variable `hippie-expand-no-restriction'. If | |
5676 | non-nil, narrowed buffers are widened before they are searched. | |
5677 | ||
5678 | *** New customization variable `hippie-expand-only-buffers'. If | |
5679 | non-empty, buffers searched are restricted to the types specified in | |
5680 | this list. Useful for example when constructing new special-purpose | |
5681 | expansion functions with `make-hippie-expand-function'. | |
5682 | ||
5683 | *** Text properties of the expansion are no longer copied. | |
5684 | ||
5685 | ** Changes in BibTeX mode. | |
5686 | ||
5687 | *** Any titleword matching a regexp in the new variable | |
5688 | bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore (case sensitive) is ignored during | |
5689 | automatic key generation. This replaces variable | |
5690 | bibtex-autokey-titleword-first-ignore, which only checked for matches | |
5691 | against the first word in the title. | |
5692 | ||
5693 | *** Autokey generation now uses all words from the title, not just | |
5694 | capitalized words. To avoid conflicts with existing customizations, | |
5695 | bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore is set up such that words starting with | |
5696 | lowerkey characters will still be ignored. Thus, if you want to use | |
5697 | lowercase words from the title, you will have to overwrite the | |
5698 | bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore standard setting. | |
5699 | ||
5700 | *** Case conversion of names and title words for automatic key | |
5701 | generation is more flexible. Variable bibtex-autokey-preserve-case is | |
5702 | replaced by bibtex-autokey-titleword-case-convert and | |
5703 | bibtex-autokey-name-case-convert. | |
5704 | ||
5705 | ** Changes in vcursor.el. | |
5706 | ||
5707 | *** Support for character terminals is available: there is a new keymap | |
5708 | and the vcursor will appear as an arrow between buffer text. A | |
5709 | variable `vcursor-interpret-input' allows input from the vcursor to be | |
5710 | entered exactly as if typed. Numerous functions, including | |
5711 | `vcursor-compare-windows', have been rewritten to improve consistency | |
5712 | in the selection of windows and corresponding keymaps. | |
5713 | ||
5714 | *** vcursor options can now be altered with M-x customize under the | |
5715 | Editing group once the package is loaded. | |
5716 | ||
5717 | *** Loading vcursor now does not define keys by default, as this is | |
5718 | generally a bad side effect. Use M-x customize to set | |
8a33023e | 5719 | vcursor-key-bindings to t to restore the old behavior. |
3787e12e GM |
5720 | |
5721 | *** vcursor-auto-disable can be `copy', which turns off copying from the | |
5722 | vcursor, but doesn't disable it, after any non-vcursor command. | |
5723 | ||
5724 | ** Ispell changes. | |
5725 | ||
5726 | *** You can now spell check comments and strings in the current | |
5727 | buffer with M-x ispell-comments-and-strings. Comments and strings | |
5728 | are identified by syntax tables in effect. | |
5729 | ||
5730 | *** Generic region skipping implemented. | |
5731 | A single buffer can be broken into a number of regions where text will | |
5732 | and will not be checked. The definitions of the regions can be user | |
5733 | defined. New applications and improvements made available by this | |
5734 | include: | |
5735 | ||
5736 | o URLs are automatically skipped | |
5737 | o EMail message checking is vastly improved. | |
5738 | ||
5739 | *** Ispell can highlight the erroneous word even on non-window terminals. | |
5740 | ||
5741 | ** Changes to RefTeX mode | |
5742 | ||
5743 | RefTeX has been updated in order to make it more usable with very | |
5744 | large projects (like a several volume math book). The parser has been | |
5745 | re-written from scratch. To get maximum speed from RefTeX, check the | |
5746 | section `Optimizations' in the manual. | |
5747 | ||
5748 | *** New recursive parser. | |
5749 | ||
5750 | The old version of RefTeX created a single large buffer containing the | |
5751 | entire multifile document in order to parse the document. The new | |
5752 | recursive parser scans the individual files. | |
5753 | ||
5754 | *** Parsing only part of a document. | |
5755 | ||
5756 | Reparsing of changed document parts can now be made faster by enabling | |
5757 | partial scans. To use this feature, read the documentation string of | |
5758 | the variable `reftex-enable-partial-scans' and set the variable to t. | |
5759 | ||
5760 | (setq reftex-enable-partial-scans t) | |
5761 | ||
5762 | *** Storing parsing information in a file. | |
5763 | ||
5764 | This can improve startup times considerably. To turn it on, use | |
5765 | ||
5766 | (setq reftex-save-parse-info t) | |
5767 | ||
5768 | *** Using multiple selection buffers | |
5769 | ||
5770 | If the creation of label selection buffers is too slow (this happens | |
5771 | for large documents), you can reuse these buffers by setting | |
5772 | ||
5773 | (setq reftex-use-multiple-selection-buffers t) | |
5774 | ||
5775 | *** References to external documents. | |
5776 | ||
5777 | The LaTeX package `xr' allows to cross-reference labels in external | |
5778 | documents. RefTeX can provide information about the external | |
5779 | documents as well. To use this feature, set up the \externaldocument | |
5780 | macros required by the `xr' package and rescan the document with | |
5781 | RefTeX. The external labels can then be accessed with the `x' key in | |
5782 | the selection buffer provided by `reftex-reference' (bound to `C-c )'). | |
5783 | The `x' key also works in the table of contents buffer. | |
5784 | ||
5785 | *** Many more labeled LaTeX environments are recognized by default. | |
5786 | ||
8a33023e | 5787 | The built-in command list now covers all the standard LaTeX commands, |
3787e12e GM |
5788 | and all of the major packages included in the LaTeX distribution. |
5789 | ||
5790 | Also, RefTeX now understands the \appendix macro and changes | |
5791 | the enumeration of sections in the *toc* buffer accordingly. | |
5792 | ||
5793 | *** Mouse support for selection and *toc* buffers | |
5794 | ||
5795 | The mouse can now be used to select items in the selection and *toc* | |
5796 | buffers. See also the new option `reftex-highlight-selection'. | |
5797 | ||
5798 | *** New keymaps for selection and table of contents modes. | |
5799 | ||
5800 | The selection processes for labels and citation keys, and the table of | |
5801 | contents buffer now have their own keymaps: `reftex-select-label-map', | |
5802 | `reftex-select-bib-map', `reftex-toc-map'. The selection processes | |
5803 | have a number of new keys predefined. In particular, TAB lets you | |
5804 | enter a label with completion. Check the on-the-fly help (press `?' | |
5805 | at the selection prompt) or read the Info documentation to find out | |
5806 | more. | |
5807 | ||
5808 | *** Support for the varioref package | |
5809 | ||
5810 | The `v' key in the label selection buffer toggles \ref versus \vref. | |
5811 | ||
5812 | *** New hooks | |
5813 | ||
5814 | Three new hooks can be used to redefine the way labels, references, | |
5815 | and citations are created. These hooks are | |
5816 | `reftex-format-label-function', `reftex-format-ref-function', | |
5817 | `reftex-format-cite-function'. | |
5818 | ||
5819 | *** Citations outside LaTeX | |
5820 | ||
5821 | The command `reftex-citation' may also be used outside LaTeX (e.g. in | |
5822 | a mail buffer). See the Info documentation for details. | |
5823 | ||
5824 | *** Short context is no longer fontified. | |
5825 | ||
5826 | The short context in the label menu no longer copies the | |
5827 | fontification from the text in the buffer. If you prefer it to be | |
5828 | fontified, use | |
5829 | ||
5830 | (setq reftex-refontify-context t) | |
5831 | ||
5832 | ** file-cache-minibuffer-complete now accepts a prefix argument. | |
5833 | With a prefix argument, it does not try to do completion of | |
5834 | the file name within its directory; it only checks for other | |
5835 | directories that contain the same file name. | |
5836 | ||
5837 | Thus, given the file name Makefile, and assuming that a file | |
5838 | Makefile.in exists in the same directory, ordinary | |
5839 | file-cache-minibuffer-complete will try to complete Makefile to | |
5840 | Makefile.in and will therefore never look for other directories that | |
5841 | have Makefile. A prefix argument tells it not to look for longer | |
5842 | names such as Makefile.in, so that instead it will look for other | |
5843 | directories--just as if the name were already complete in its present | |
5844 | directory. | |
5845 | ||
5846 | ** New modes and packages | |
5847 | ||
5848 | *** There is a new alternative major mode for Perl, Cperl mode. | |
5849 | It has many more features than Perl mode, and some people prefer | |
5850 | it, but some do not. | |
5851 | ||
5852 | *** There is a new major mode, M-x vhdl-mode, for editing files of VHDL | |
5853 | code. | |
5854 | ||
5855 | *** M-x which-function-mode enables a minor mode that displays the | |
5856 | current function name continuously in the mode line, as you move | |
5857 | around in a buffer. | |
5858 | ||
5859 | Which Function mode is effective in major modes which support Imenu. | |
5860 | ||
5861 | *** Gametree is a major mode for editing game analysis trees. The author | |
5862 | uses it for keeping notes about his postal Chess games, but it should | |
5863 | be helpful for other two-player games as well, as long as they have an | |
5864 | established system of notation similar to Chess. | |
5865 | ||
5866 | *** The new minor mode checkdoc-minor-mode provides Emacs Lisp | |
5867 | documentation string checking for style and spelling. The style | |
5868 | guidelines are found in the Emacs Lisp programming manual. | |
5869 | ||
5870 | *** The net-utils package makes some common networking features | |
5871 | available in Emacs. Some of these functions are wrappers around | |
5872 | system utilities (ping, nslookup, etc); others are implementations of | |
5873 | simple protocols (finger, whois) in Emacs Lisp. There are also | |
5874 | functions to make simple connections to TCP/IP ports for debugging and | |
5875 | the like. | |
5876 | ||
5877 | *** highlight-changes-mode is a minor mode that uses colors to | |
5878 | identify recently changed parts of the buffer text. | |
5879 | ||
5880 | *** The new package `midnight' lets you specify things to be done | |
5881 | within Emacs at midnight--by default, kill buffers that you have not | |
5882 | used in a considerable time. To use this feature, customize | |
5883 | the user option `midnight-mode' to t. | |
5884 | ||
5885 | *** The file generic-x.el defines a number of simple major modes. | |
5886 | ||
5887 | apache-generic-mode: For Apache and NCSA httpd configuration files | |
5888 | samba-generic-mode: Samba configuration files | |
5889 | fvwm-generic-mode: For fvwm initialization files | |
5890 | x-resource-generic-mode: For X resource files | |
5891 | hosts-generic-mode: For hosts files (.rhosts, /etc/hosts, etc) | |
5892 | mailagent-rules-generic-mode: For mailagent .rules files | |
5893 | javascript-generic-mode: For JavaScript files | |
5894 | vrml-generic-mode: For VRML files | |
5895 | java-manifest-generic-mode: For Java MANIFEST files | |
5896 | java-properties-generic-mode: For Java property files | |
5897 | mailrc-generic-mode: For .mailrc files | |
5898 | ||
5899 | Platform-specific modes: | |
5900 | ||
5901 | prototype-generic-mode: For Solaris/Sys V prototype files | |
5902 | pkginfo-generic-mode: For Solaris/Sys V pkginfo files | |
5903 | alias-generic-mode: For C shell alias files | |
5904 | inf-generic-mode: For MS-Windows INF files | |
5905 | ini-generic-mode: For MS-Windows INI files | |
5906 | reg-generic-mode: For MS-Windows Registry files | |
5907 | bat-generic-mode: For MS-Windows BAT scripts | |
5908 | rc-generic-mode: For MS-Windows Resource files | |
5909 | rul-generic-mode: For InstallShield scripts | |
05197f40 | 5910 | \f |
3787e12e GM |
5911 | * Lisp changes in Emacs 20.3 since the Emacs Lisp Manual was published |
5912 | ||
5913 | ** If you want a Lisp file to be read in unibyte mode, | |
5914 | use -*-unibyte: t;-*- on its first line. | |
5915 | That will force Emacs to read that file in unibyte mode. | |
5916 | Otherwise, the file will be loaded and byte-compiled in multibyte mode. | |
5917 | ||
5918 | Thus, each lisp file is read in a consistent way regardless of whether | |
5919 | you started Emacs with --unibyte, so that a Lisp program gives | |
5920 | consistent results regardless of how Emacs was started. | |
5921 | ||
5922 | ** The new function assoc-default is useful for searching an alist, | |
5923 | and using a default value if the key is not found there. You can | |
5924 | specify a comparison predicate, so this function is useful for | |
5925 | searching comparing a string against an alist of regular expressions. | |
5926 | ||
5927 | ** The functions unibyte-char-to-multibyte and | |
5928 | multibyte-char-to-unibyte convert between unibyte and multibyte | |
5929 | character codes, in a way that is appropriate for the current language | |
5930 | environment. | |
5931 | ||
5932 | ** The functions read-event, read-char and read-char-exclusive now | |
5933 | take two optional arguments. PROMPT, if non-nil, specifies a prompt | |
5934 | string. SUPPRESS-INPUT-METHOD, if non-nil, says to disable the | |
5935 | current input method for reading this one event. | |
5936 | ||
5937 | ** Two new variables print-escape-nonascii and print-escape-multibyte | |
5938 | now control whether to output certain characters as | |
5939 | backslash-sequences. print-escape-nonascii applies to single-byte | |
5940 | non-ASCII characters; print-escape-multibyte applies to multibyte | |
5941 | characters. Both of these variables are used only when printing | |
5942 | in readable fashion (prin1 uses them, princ does not). | |
05197f40 | 5943 | \f |
3787e12e GM |
5944 | * Lisp changes in Emacs 20.3 before the Emacs Lisp Manual was published |
5945 | ||
5946 | ** Compiled Emacs Lisp files made with the modified "MBSK" version | |
5947 | of Emacs 20.2 do not work in Emacs 20.3. | |
5948 | ||
5949 | ** Buffer positions are now measured in characters, as they were | |
5950 | in Emacs 19 and before. This means that (forward-char 1) | |
5951 | always increases point by 1. | |
5952 | ||
5953 | The function chars-in-region now just subtracts its arguments. It is | |
5954 | considered obsolete. The function char-boundary-p has been deleted. | |
5955 | ||
5956 | See below for additional changes relating to multibyte characters. | |
5957 | ||
5958 | ** defcustom, defface and defgroup now accept the keyword `:version'. | |
5959 | Use this to specify in which version of Emacs a certain variable's | |
5960 | default value changed. For example, | |
5961 | ||
5962 | (defcustom foo-max 34 "*Maximum number of foo's allowed." | |
5963 | :type 'integer | |
5964 | :group 'foo | |
5965 | :version "20.3") | |
5966 | ||
5967 | (defgroup foo-group nil "The foo group." | |
5968 | :version "20.3") | |
5969 | ||
5970 | If an entire new group is added or the variables in it have the | |
5971 | default values changed, then just add a `:version' to that group. It | |
5972 | is recommended that new packages added to the distribution contain a | |
5973 | `:version' in the top level group. | |
5974 | ||
5975 | This information is used to control the customize-changed-options command. | |
5976 | ||
5977 | ** It is now an error to change the value of a symbol whose name | |
5978 | starts with a colon--if it is interned in the standard obarray. | |
5979 | ||
5980 | However, setting such a symbol to its proper value, which is that | |
5981 | symbol itself, is not an error. This is for the sake of programs that | |
5982 | support previous Emacs versions by explicitly setting these variables | |
5983 | to themselves. | |
5984 | ||
5985 | If you set the variable keyword-symbols-constant-flag to nil, | |
5986 | this error is suppressed, and you can set these symbols to any | |
5987 | values whatever. | |
5988 | ||
5989 | ** There is a new debugger command, R. | |
5990 | It evaluates an expression like e, but saves the result | |
5991 | in the buffer *Debugger-record*. | |
5992 | ||
5993 | ** Frame-local variables. | |
5994 | ||
5995 | You can now make a variable local to various frames. To do this, call | |
5996 | the function make-variable-frame-local; this enables frames to have | |
5997 | local bindings for that variable. | |
5998 | ||
5999 | These frame-local bindings are actually frame parameters: you create a | |
6000 | frame-local binding in a specific frame by calling | |
6001 | modify-frame-parameters and specifying the variable name as the | |
6002 | parameter name. | |
6003 | ||
6004 | Buffer-local bindings take precedence over frame-local bindings. | |
6005 | Thus, if the current buffer has a buffer-local binding, that binding is | |
6006 | active; otherwise, if the selected frame has a frame-local binding, | |
6007 | that binding is active; otherwise, the default binding is active. | |
6008 | ||
6009 | It would not be hard to implement window-local bindings, but it is not | |
6010 | clear that this would be very useful; windows tend to come and go in a | |
6011 | very transitory fashion, so that trying to produce any specific effect | |
6012 | through a window-local binding would not be very robust. | |
6013 | ||
6014 | ** `sregexq' and `sregex' are two new functions for constructing | |
6015 | "symbolic regular expressions." These are Lisp expressions that, when | |
6016 | evaluated, yield conventional string-based regexps. The symbolic form | |
6017 | makes it easier to construct, read, and maintain complex patterns. | |
6018 | See the documentation in sregex.el. | |
6019 | ||
6020 | ** parse-partial-sexp's return value has an additional element which | |
6021 | is used to pass information along if you pass it to another call to | |
6022 | parse-partial-sexp, starting its scan where the first call ended. | |
6023 | The contents of this field are not yet finalized. | |
6024 | ||
6025 | ** eval-region now accepts a fourth optional argument READ-FUNCTION. | |
6026 | If it is non-nil, that function is used instead of `read'. | |
6027 | ||
6028 | ** unload-feature by default removes the feature's functions from | |
6029 | known hooks to avoid trouble, but a package providing FEATURE can | |
6030 | define a hook FEATURE-unload-hook to be run by unload-feature instead. | |
6031 | ||
6032 | ** read-from-minibuffer no longer returns the argument DEFAULT-VALUE | |
6033 | when the user enters empty input. It now returns the null string, as | |
6034 | it did in Emacs 19. The default value is made available in the | |
6035 | history via M-n, but it is not applied here as a default. | |
6036 | ||
6037 | The other, more specialized minibuffer-reading functions continue to | |
6038 | return the default value (not the null string) when the user enters | |
6039 | empty input. | |
6040 | ||
6041 | ** The new variable read-buffer-function controls which routine to use | |
6042 | for selecting buffers. For example, if you set this variable to | |
6043 | `iswitchb-read-buffer', iswitchb will be used to read buffer names. | |
6044 | Other functions can also be used if they accept the same arguments as | |
6045 | `read-buffer' and return the selected buffer name as a string. | |
6046 | ||
6047 | ** The new function read-passwd reads a password from the terminal, | |
6048 | echoing a period for each character typed. It takes three arguments: | |
6049 | a prompt string, a flag which says "read it twice to make sure", and a | |
6050 | default password to use if the user enters nothing. | |
6051 | ||
6052 | ** The variable fill-nobreak-predicate gives major modes a way to | |
6053 | specify not to break a line at certain places. Its value is a | |
6054 | function which is called with no arguments, with point located at the | |
6055 | place where a break is being considered. If the function returns | |
6056 | non-nil, then the line won't be broken there. | |
6057 | ||
6058 | ** window-end now takes an optional second argument, UPDATE. | |
6059 | If this is non-nil, then the function always returns an accurate | |
6060 | up-to-date value for the buffer position corresponding to the | |
6061 | end of the window, even if this requires computation. | |
6062 | ||
6063 | ** other-buffer now takes an optional argument FRAME | |
6064 | which specifies which frame's buffer list to use. | |
6065 | If it is nil, that means use the selected frame's buffer list. | |
6066 | ||
6067 | ** The new variable buffer-display-time, always local in every buffer, | |
6068 | holds the value of (current-time) as of the last time that a window | |
6069 | was directed to display this buffer. | |
6070 | ||
6071 | ** It is now meaningful to compare two window-configuration objects | |
6072 | with `equal'. Two window-configuration objects are equal if they | |
6073 | describe equivalent arrangements of windows, in the same frame--in | |
6074 | other words, if they would give the same results if passed to | |
6075 | set-window-configuration. | |
6076 | ||
6077 | ** compare-window-configurations is a new function that compares two | |
6078 | window configurations loosely. It ignores differences in saved buffer | |
6079 | positions and scrolling, and considers only the structure and sizes of | |
6080 | windows and the choice of buffers to display. | |
6081 | ||
6082 | ** The variable minor-mode-overriding-map-alist allows major modes to | |
6083 | override the key bindings of a minor mode. The elements of this alist | |
6084 | look like the elements of minor-mode-map-alist: (VARIABLE . KEYMAP). | |
6085 | ||
6086 | If the VARIABLE in an element of minor-mode-overriding-map-alist has a | |
6087 | non-nil value, the paired KEYMAP is active, and totally overrides the | |
6088 | map (if any) specified for the same variable in minor-mode-map-alist. | |
6089 | ||
6090 | minor-mode-overriding-map-alist is automatically local in all buffers, | |
6091 | and it is meant to be set by major modes. | |
6092 | ||
6093 | ** The function match-string-no-properties is like match-string | |
6094 | except that it discards all text properties from the result. | |
6095 | ||
6096 | ** The function load-average now accepts an optional argument | |
6097 | USE-FLOATS. If it is non-nil, the load average values are returned as | |
6098 | floating point numbers, rather than as integers to be divided by 100. | |
6099 | ||
6100 | ** The new variable temporary-file-directory specifies the directory | |
6101 | to use for creating temporary files. The default value is determined | |
6102 | in a reasonable way for your operating system; on GNU and Unix systems | |
6103 | it is based on the TMP and TMPDIR environment variables. | |
6104 | ||
6105 | ** Menu changes | |
6106 | ||
6107 | *** easymenu.el now uses the new menu item format and supports the | |
6108 | keywords :visible and :filter. The existing keyword :keys is now | |
6109 | better supported. | |
6110 | ||
6111 | The variable `easy-menu-precalculate-equivalent-keybindings' controls | |
6112 | a new feature which calculates keyboard equivalents for the menu when | |
6113 | you define the menu. The default is t. If you rarely use menus, you | |
6114 | can set the variable to nil to disable this precalculation feature; | |
6115 | then the calculation is done only if you use the menu bar. | |
6116 | ||
6117 | *** A new format for menu items is supported. | |
6118 | ||
6119 | In a keymap, a key binding that has the format | |
6120 | (STRING . REAL-BINDING) or (STRING HELP-STRING . REAL-BINDING) | |
6121 | defines a menu item. Now a menu item definition may also be a list that | |
6122 | starts with the symbol `menu-item'. | |
6123 | ||
6124 | The format is: | |
6125 | (menu-item ITEM-NAME) or | |
6126 | (menu-item ITEM-NAME REAL-BINDING . ITEM-PROPERTY-LIST) | |
6127 | where ITEM-NAME is an expression which evaluates to the menu item | |
6128 | string, and ITEM-PROPERTY-LIST has the form of a property list. | |
6129 | The supported properties include | |
6130 | ||
6131 | :enable FORM Evaluate FORM to determine whether the | |
6132 | item is enabled. | |
6133 | :visible FORM Evaluate FORM to determine whether the | |
6134 | item should appear in the menu. | |
6135 | :filter FILTER-FN | |
6136 | FILTER-FN is a function of one argument, | |
6137 | which will be REAL-BINDING. | |
6138 | It should return a binding to use instead. | |
6139 | :keys DESCRIPTION | |
6140 | DESCRIPTION is a string that describes an equivalent keyboard | |
f3780fe4 | 6141 | binding for REAL-BINDING. DESCRIPTION is expanded with |
3787e12e GM |
6142 | `substitute-command-keys' before it is used. |
6143 | :key-sequence KEY-SEQUENCE | |
6144 | KEY-SEQUENCE is a key-sequence for an equivalent | |
6145 | keyboard binding. | |
6146 | :key-sequence nil | |
6147 | This means that the command normally has no | |
6148 | keyboard equivalent. | |
6149 | :help HELP HELP is the extra help string (not currently used). | |
6150 | :button (TYPE . SELECTED) | |
6151 | TYPE is :toggle or :radio. | |
6152 | SELECTED is a form, to be evaluated, and its | |
6153 | value says whether this button is currently selected. | |
6154 | ||
6155 | Buttons are at the moment only simulated by prefixes in the menu. | |
6156 | Eventually ordinary X-buttons may be supported. | |
6157 | ||
6158 | (menu-item ITEM-NAME) defines unselectable item. | |
6159 | ||
6160 | ** New event types | |
6161 | ||
6162 | *** The new event type `mouse-wheel' is generated by a wheel on a | |
6163 | mouse (such as the MS Intellimouse). The event contains a delta that | |
6164 | corresponds to the amount and direction that the wheel is rotated, | |
6165 | which is typically used to implement a scroll or zoom. The format is: | |
6166 | ||
6167 | (mouse-wheel POSITION DELTA) | |
6168 | ||
6169 | where POSITION is a list describing the position of the event in the | |
6170 | same format as a mouse-click event, and DELTA is a signed number | |
6171 | indicating the number of increments by which the wheel was rotated. A | |
6172 | negative DELTA indicates that the wheel was rotated backwards, towards | |
6173 | the user, and a positive DELTA indicates that the wheel was rotated | |
6174 | forward, away from the user. | |
6175 | ||
6176 | As of now, this event type is generated only on MS Windows. | |
6177 | ||
6178 | *** The new event type `drag-n-drop' is generated when a group of | |
6179 | files is selected in an application outside of Emacs, and then dragged | |
6180 | and dropped onto an Emacs frame. The event contains a list of | |
6181 | filenames that were dragged and dropped, which are then typically | |
6182 | loaded into Emacs. The format is: | |
6183 | ||
6184 | (drag-n-drop POSITION FILES) | |
6185 | ||
6186 | where POSITION is a list describing the position of the event in the | |
6187 | same format as a mouse-click event, and FILES is the list of filenames | |
6188 | that were dragged and dropped. | |
6189 | ||
6190 | As of now, this event type is generated only on MS Windows. | |
6191 | ||
6192 | ** Changes relating to multibyte characters. | |
6193 | ||
6194 | *** The variable enable-multibyte-characters is now read-only; | |
6195 | any attempt to set it directly signals an error. The only way | |
6196 | to change this value in an existing buffer is with set-buffer-multibyte. | |
6197 | ||
6198 | *** In a string constant, `\ ' now stands for "nothing at all". You | |
6199 | can use it to terminate a hex escape which is followed by a character | |
6200 | that could otherwise be read as part of the hex escape. | |
6201 | ||
6202 | *** String indices are now measured in characters, as they were | |
6203 | in Emacs 19 and before. | |
6204 | ||
6205 | The function chars-in-string has been deleted. | |
6206 | The function concat-chars has been renamed to `string'. | |
6207 | ||
6208 | *** The function set-buffer-multibyte sets the flag in the current | |
6209 | buffer that says whether the buffer uses multibyte representation or | |
6210 | unibyte representation. If the argument is nil, it selects unibyte | |
6211 | representation. Otherwise it selects multibyte representation. | |
6212 | ||
6213 | This function does not change the contents of the buffer, viewed | |
6214 | as a sequence of bytes. However, it does change the contents | |
6215 | viewed as characters; a sequence of two bytes which is treated as | |
6216 | one character when the buffer uses multibyte representation | |
6217 | will count as two characters using unibyte representation. | |
6218 | ||
6219 | This function sets enable-multibyte-characters to record which | |
6220 | representation is in use. It also adjusts various data in the buffer | |
6221 | (including its markers, overlays and text properties) so that they are | |
6222 | consistent with the new representation. | |
6223 | ||
6224 | *** string-make-multibyte takes a string and converts it to multibyte | |
6225 | representation. Most of the time, you don't need to care | |
6226 | about the representation, because Emacs converts when necessary; | |
6227 | however, it makes a difference when you compare strings. | |
6228 | ||
6229 | The conversion of non-ASCII characters works by adding the value of | |
6230 | nonascii-insert-offset to each character, or by translating them | |
6231 | using the table nonascii-translation-table. | |
6232 | ||
6233 | *** string-make-unibyte takes a string and converts it to unibyte | |
6234 | representation. Most of the time, you don't need to care about the | |
6235 | representation, but it makes a difference when you compare strings. | |
6236 | ||
6237 | The conversion from multibyte to unibyte representation | |
6238 | loses information; the only time Emacs performs it automatically | |
6239 | is when inserting a multibyte string into a unibyte buffer. | |
6240 | ||
6241 | *** string-as-multibyte takes a string, and returns another string | |
6242 | which contains the same bytes, but treats them as multibyte. | |
6243 | ||
6244 | *** string-as-unibyte takes a string, and returns another string | |
6245 | which contains the same bytes, but treats them as unibyte. | |
6246 | ||
6247 | *** The new function compare-strings lets you compare | |
6248 | portions of two strings. Unibyte strings are converted to multibyte, | |
6249 | so that a unibyte string can match a multibyte string. | |
6250 | You can specify whether to ignore case or not. | |
6251 | ||
6252 | *** assoc-ignore-case now uses compare-strings so that | |
6253 | it can treat unibyte and multibyte strings as equal. | |
6254 | ||
6255 | *** Regular expression operations and buffer string searches now | |
6256 | convert the search pattern to multibyte or unibyte to accord with the | |
6257 | buffer or string being searched. | |
6258 | ||
6259 | One consequence is that you cannot always use \200-\377 inside of | |
6260 | [...] to match all non-ASCII characters. This does still work when | |
6261 | searching or matching a unibyte buffer or string, but not when | |
6262 | searching or matching a multibyte string. Unfortunately, there is no | |
6263 | obvious choice of syntax to use within [...] for that job. But, what | |
6264 | you want is just to match all non-ASCII characters, the regular | |
6265 | expression [^\0-\177] works for it. | |
6266 | ||
6267 | *** Structure of coding system changed. | |
6268 | ||
6269 | All coding systems (including aliases and subsidiaries) are named | |
6270 | by symbols; the symbol's `coding-system' property is a vector | |
6271 | which defines the coding system. Aliases share the same vector | |
6272 | as the principal name, so that altering the contents of this | |
6273 | vector affects the principal name and its aliases. You can define | |
6274 | your own alias name of a coding system by the function | |
6275 | define-coding-system-alias. | |
6276 | ||
6277 | The coding system definition includes a property list of its own. Use | |
6278 | the new functions `coding-system-get' and `coding-system-put' to | |
6279 | access such coding system properties as post-read-conversion, | |
6280 | pre-write-conversion, character-translation-table-for-decode, | |
6281 | character-translation-table-for-encode, mime-charset, and | |
6282 | safe-charsets. For instance, (coding-system-get 'iso-latin-1 | |
6283 | 'mime-charset) gives the corresponding MIME-charset parameter | |
6284 | `iso-8859-1'. | |
6285 | ||
6286 | Among the coding system properties listed above, safe-charsets is new. | |
6287 | The value of this property is a list of character sets which this | |
6288 | coding system can correctly encode and decode. For instance: | |
6289 | (coding-system-get 'iso-latin-1 'safe-charsets) => (ascii latin-iso8859-1) | |
6290 | ||
6291 | Here, "correctly encode" means that the encoded character sets can | |
6292 | also be handled safely by systems other than Emacs as far as they | |
6293 | are capable of that coding system. Though, Emacs itself can encode | |
6294 | the other character sets and read it back correctly. | |
6295 | ||
6296 | *** The new function select-safe-coding-system can be used to find a | |
6297 | proper coding system for encoding the specified region or string. | |
6298 | This function requires a user interaction. | |
6299 | ||
6300 | *** The new functions find-coding-systems-region and | |
6301 | find-coding-systems-string are helper functions used by | |
6302 | select-safe-coding-system. They return a list of all proper coding | |
6303 | systems to encode a text in some region or string. If you don't want | |
6304 | a user interaction, use one of these functions instead of | |
6305 | select-safe-coding-system. | |
6306 | ||
6307 | *** The explicit encoding and decoding functions, such as | |
6308 | decode-coding-region and encode-coding-string, now set | |
6309 | last-coding-system-used to reflect the actual way encoding or decoding | |
6310 | was done. | |
6311 | ||
6312 | *** The new function detect-coding-with-language-environment can be | |
6313 | used to detect a coding system of text according to priorities of | |
6314 | coding systems used by some specific language environment. | |
6315 | ||
6316 | *** The functions detect-coding-region and detect-coding-string always | |
6317 | return a list if the arg HIGHEST is nil. Thus, if only ASCII | |
6318 | characters are found, they now return a list of single element | |
6319 | `undecided' or its subsidiaries. | |
6320 | ||
6321 | *** The new functions coding-system-change-eol-conversion and | |
6322 | coding-system-change-text-conversion can be used to get a different | |
6323 | coding system than what specified only in how end-of-line or text is | |
6324 | converted. | |
6325 | ||
6326 | *** The new function set-selection-coding-system can be used to set a | |
6327 | coding system for communicating with other X clients. | |
6328 | ||
6329 | *** The function `map-char-table' now passes as argument only valid | |
6330 | character codes, plus generic characters that stand for entire | |
6331 | character sets or entire subrows of a character set. In other words, | |
6332 | each time `map-char-table' calls its FUNCTION argument, the key value | |
6333 | either will be a valid individual character code, or will stand for a | |
6334 | range of characters. | |
6335 | ||
6336 | *** The new function `char-valid-p' can be used for checking whether a | |
6337 | Lisp object is a valid character code or not. | |
6338 | ||
6339 | *** The new function `charset-after' returns a charset of a character | |
6340 | in the current buffer at position POS. | |
6341 | ||
6342 | *** Input methods are now implemented using the variable | |
6343 | input-method-function. If this is non-nil, its value should be a | |
6344 | function; then, whenever Emacs reads an input event that is a printing | |
6345 | character with no modifier bits, it calls that function, passing the | |
6346 | event as an argument. Often this function will read more input, first | |
6347 | binding input-method-function to nil. | |
6348 | ||
6349 | The return value should be a list of the events resulting from input | |
6350 | method processing. These events will be processed sequentially as | |
6351 | input, before resorting to unread-command-events. Events returned by | |
6352 | the input method function are not passed to the input method function, | |
6353 | not even if they are printing characters with no modifier bits. | |
6354 | ||
6355 | The input method function is not called when reading the second and | |
6356 | subsequent events of a key sequence. | |
6357 | ||
6358 | *** You can customize any language environment by using | |
6359 | set-language-environment-hook and exit-language-environment-hook. | |
6360 | ||
6361 | The hook `exit-language-environment-hook' should be used to undo | |
6362 | customizations that you made with set-language-environment-hook. For | |
6363 | instance, if you set up a special key binding for a specific language | |
6364 | environment by set-language-environment-hook, you should set up | |
6365 | exit-language-environment-hook to restore the normal key binding. | |
05197f40 | 6366 | \f |
3787e12e GM |
6367 | * Changes in Emacs 20.1 |
6368 | ||
6369 | ** Emacs has a new facility for customization of its many user | |
6370 | options. It is called M-x customize. With this facility you can look | |
6371 | at the many user options in an organized way; they are grouped into a | |
6372 | tree structure. | |
6373 | ||
6374 | M-x customize also knows what sorts of values are legitimate for each | |
6375 | user option and ensures that you don't use invalid values. | |
6376 | ||
6377 | With M-x customize, you can set options either for the present Emacs | |
6378 | session or permanently. (Permanent settings are stored automatically | |
6379 | in your .emacs file.) | |
6380 | ||
6381 | ** Scroll bars are now on the left side of the window. | |
6382 | You can change this with M-x customize-option scroll-bar-mode. | |
6383 | ||
6384 | ** The mode line no longer includes the string `Emacs'. | |
6385 | This makes more space in the mode line for other information. | |
6386 | ||
6387 | ** When you select a region with the mouse, it is highlighted | |
6388 | immediately afterward. At that time, if you type the DELETE key, it | |
6389 | kills the region. | |
6390 | ||
6391 | The BACKSPACE key, and the ASCII character DEL, do not do this; they | |
6392 | delete the character before point, as usual. | |
6393 | ||
6394 | ** In an incremental search the whole current match is highlighted | |
6395 | on terminals which support this. (You can disable this feature | |
6396 | by setting search-highlight to nil.) | |
6397 | ||
6398 | ** In the minibuffer, in some cases, you can now use M-n to | |
6399 | insert the default value into the minibuffer as text. In effect, | |
6400 | the default value (if the minibuffer routines know it) is tacked | |
6401 | onto the history "in the future". (The more normal use of the | |
6402 | history list is to use M-p to insert minibuffer input used in the | |
6403 | past.) | |
6404 | ||
6405 | ** In Text mode, now only blank lines separate paragraphs. | |
6406 | This makes it possible to get the full benefit of Adaptive Fill mode | |
6407 | in Text mode, and other modes derived from it (such as Mail mode). | |
6408 | TAB in Text mode now runs the command indent-relative; this | |
6409 | makes a practical difference only when you use indented paragraphs. | |
6410 | ||
6411 | As a result, the old Indented Text mode is now identical to Text mode, | |
6412 | and is an alias for it. | |
6413 | ||
6414 | If you want spaces at the beginning of a line to start a paragraph, | |
6415 | use the new mode, Paragraph Indent Text mode. | |
6416 | ||
6417 | ** Scrolling changes | |
6418 | ||
6419 | *** Scroll commands to scroll a whole screen now preserve the screen | |
6420 | position of the cursor, if scroll-preserve-screen-position is non-nil. | |
6421 | ||
6422 | In this mode, if you scroll several screens back and forth, finishing | |
6423 | on the same screen where you started, the cursor goes back to the line | |
6424 | where it started. | |
6425 | ||
6426 | *** If you set scroll-conservatively to a small number, then when you | |
6427 | move point a short distance off the screen, Emacs will scroll the | |
6428 | screen just far enough to bring point back on screen, provided that | |
6429 | does not exceed `scroll-conservatively' lines. | |
6430 | ||
6431 | *** The new variable scroll-margin says how close point can come to the | |
6432 | top or bottom of a window. It is a number of screen lines; if point | |
6433 | comes within that many lines of the top or bottom of the window, Emacs | |
6434 | recenters the window. | |
6435 | ||
6436 | ** International character set support (MULE) | |
6437 | ||
6438 | Emacs now supports a wide variety of international character sets, | |
6439 | including European variants of the Latin alphabet, as well as Chinese, | |
6440 | Devanagari (Hindi and Marathi), Ethiopian, Greek, IPA, Japanese, | |
6441 | Korean, Lao, Russian, Thai, Tibetan, and Vietnamese scripts. These | |
6442 | features have been merged from the modified version of Emacs known as | |
6443 | MULE (for "MULti-lingual Enhancement to GNU Emacs") | |
6444 | ||
6445 | Users of these scripts have established many more-or-less standard | |
6446 | coding systems for storing files. Emacs uses a single multibyte | |
6447 | character encoding within Emacs buffers; it can translate from a wide | |
6448 | variety of coding systems when reading a file and can translate back | |
6449 | into any of these coding systems when saving a file. | |
6450 | ||
6451 | Keyboards, even in the countries where these character sets are used, | |
6452 | generally don't have keys for all the characters in them. So Emacs | |
6453 | supports various "input methods", typically one for each script or | |
6454 | language, to make it possible to type them. | |
6455 | ||
6456 | The Emacs internal multibyte encoding represents a non-ASCII | |
6457 | character as a sequence of bytes in the range 0200 through 0377. | |
6458 | ||
6459 | The new prefix key C-x RET is used for commands that pertain | |
6460 | to multibyte characters, coding systems, and input methods. | |
6461 | ||
6462 | You can disable multibyte character support as follows: | |
6463 | ||
6464 | (setq-default enable-multibyte-characters nil) | |
6465 | ||
6466 | Calling the function standard-display-european turns off multibyte | |
6467 | characters, unless you specify a non-nil value for the second | |
6468 | argument, AUTO. This provides compatibility for people who are | |
6469 | already using standard-display-european to continue using unibyte | |
6470 | characters for their work until they want to change. | |
6471 | ||
6472 | *** Input methods | |
6473 | ||
6474 | An input method is a kind of character conversion which is designed | |
6475 | specifically for interactive input. In Emacs, typically each language | |
6476 | has its own input method (though sometimes several languages which use | |
6477 | the same characters can share one input method). Some languages | |
6478 | support several input methods. | |
6479 | ||
6480 | The simplest kind of input method works by mapping ASCII letters into | |
6481 | another alphabet. This is how the Greek and Russian input methods | |
6482 | work. | |
6483 | ||
6484 | A more powerful technique is composition: converting sequences of | |
6485 | characters into one letter. Many European input methods use | |
6486 | composition to produce a single non-ASCII letter from a sequence which | |
6487 | consists of a letter followed by diacritics. For example, a' is one | |
6488 | sequence of two characters that might be converted into a single | |
6489 | letter. | |
6490 | ||
6491 | The input methods for syllabic scripts typically use mapping followed | |
6492 | by conversion. The input methods for Thai and Korean work this way. | |
6493 | First, letters are mapped into symbols for particular sounds or tone | |
6494 | marks; then, sequences of these which make up a whole syllable are | |
6495 | mapped into one syllable sign--most often a "composite character". | |
6496 | ||
6497 | None of these methods works very well for Chinese and Japanese, so | |
6498 | they are handled specially. First you input a whole word using | |
6499 | phonetic spelling; then, after the word is in the buffer, Emacs | |
6500 | converts it into one or more characters using a large dictionary. | |
6501 | ||
6502 | Since there is more than one way to represent a phonetically spelled | |
6503 | word using Chinese characters, Emacs can only guess which one to use; | |
6504 | typically these input methods give you a way to say "guess again" if | |
6505 | the first guess is wrong. | |
6506 | ||
6507 | *** The command C-x RET m (toggle-enable-multibyte-characters) | |
6508 | turns multibyte character support on or off for the current buffer. | |
6509 | ||
6510 | If multibyte character support is turned off in a buffer, then each | |
6511 | byte is a single character, even codes 0200 through 0377--exactly as | |
6512 | they did in Emacs 19.34. This includes the features for support for | |
6513 | the European characters, ISO Latin-1 and ISO Latin-2. | |
6514 | ||
6515 | However, there is no need to turn off multibyte character support to | |
6516 | use ISO Latin-1 or ISO Latin-2; the Emacs multibyte character set | |
6517 | includes all the characters in these character sets, and Emacs can | |
6518 | translate automatically to and from either one. | |
6519 | ||
6520 | *** Visiting a file in unibyte mode. | |
6521 | ||
6522 | Turning off multibyte character support in the buffer after visiting a | |
6523 | file with multibyte code conversion will display the multibyte | |
6524 | sequences already in the buffer, byte by byte. This is probably not | |
6525 | what you want. | |
6526 | ||
6527 | If you want to edit a file of unibyte characters (Latin-1, for | |
6528 | example), you can do it by specifying `no-conversion' as the coding | |
6529 | system when reading the file. This coding system also turns off | |
6530 | multibyte characters in that buffer. | |
6531 | ||
6532 | If you turn off multibyte character support entirely, this turns off | |
6533 | character conversion as well. | |
6534 | ||
6535 | *** Displaying international characters on X Windows. | |
6536 | ||
6537 | A font for X typically displays just one alphabet or script. | |
6538 | Therefore, displaying the entire range of characters Emacs supports | |
6539 | requires using many fonts. | |
6540 | ||
6541 | Therefore, Emacs now supports "fontsets". Each fontset is a | |
6542 | collection of fonts, each assigned to a range of character codes. | |
6543 | ||
6544 | A fontset has a name, like a font. Individual fonts are defined by | |
6545 | the X server; fontsets are defined within Emacs itself. But once you | |
6546 | have defined a fontset, you can use it in a face or a frame just as | |
6547 | you would use a font. | |
6548 | ||
6549 | If a fontset specifies no font for a certain character, or if it | |
6550 | specifies a font that does not exist on your system, then it cannot | |
6551 | display that character. It will display an empty box instead. | |
6552 | ||
6553 | The fontset height and width are determined by the ASCII characters | |
6554 | (that is, by the font in the fontset which is used for ASCII | |
6555 | characters). If another font in the fontset has a different height, | |
6556 | or the wrong width, then characters assigned to that font are clipped, | |
6557 | and displayed within a box if highlight-wrong-size-font is non-nil. | |
6558 | ||
6559 | *** Defining fontsets. | |
6560 | ||
6561 | Emacs does not use any fontset by default. Its default font is still | |
6562 | chosen as in previous versions. You can tell Emacs to use a fontset | |
6563 | with the `-fn' option or the `Font' X resource. | |
6564 | ||
6565 | Emacs creates a standard fontset automatically according to the value | |
6566 | of standard-fontset-spec. This fontset's short name is | |
6567 | `fontset-standard'. Bold, italic, and bold-italic variants of the | |
6568 | standard fontset are created automatically. | |
6569 | ||
6570 | If you specify a default ASCII font with the `Font' resource or `-fn' | |
6571 | argument, a fontset is generated from it. This works by replacing the | |
6572 | FOUNDARY, FAMILY, ADD_STYLE, and AVERAGE_WIDTH fields of the font name | |
6573 | with `*' then using this to specify a fontset. This fontset's short | |
6574 | name is `fontset-startup'. | |
6575 | ||
6576 | Emacs checks resources of the form Fontset-N where N is 0, 1, 2... | |
6577 | The resource value should have this form: | |
6578 | FONTSET-NAME, [CHARSET-NAME:FONT-NAME]... | |
6579 | FONTSET-NAME should have the form of a standard X font name, except: | |
6580 | * most fields should be just the wild card "*". | |
6581 | * the CHARSET_REGISTRY field should be "fontset" | |
6582 | * the CHARSET_ENCODING field can be any nickname of the fontset. | |
6583 | The construct CHARSET-NAME:FONT-NAME can be repeated any number | |
6584 | of times; each time specifies the font for one character set. | |
0969bd6a EZ |
6585 | CHARSET-NAME should be the name of a character set, and FONT-NAME |
6586 | should specify an actual font to use for that character set. | |
3787e12e GM |
6587 | |
6588 | Each of these fontsets has an alias which is made from the | |
6589 | last two font name fields, CHARSET_REGISTRY and CHARSET_ENCODING. | |
6590 | You can refer to the fontset by that alias or by its full name. | |
6591 | ||
6592 | For any character sets that you don't mention, Emacs tries to choose a | |
6593 | font by substituting into FONTSET-NAME. For instance, with the | |
6594 | following resource, | |
6595 | Emacs*Fontset-0: -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-*-*-*-*-fontset-24 | |
6596 | the font for ASCII is generated as below: | |
6597 | -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-ISO8859-1 | |
6598 | Here is the substitution rule: | |
6599 | Change CHARSET_REGISTRY and CHARSET_ENCODING to that of the charset | |
6600 | defined in the variable x-charset-registries. For instance, ASCII has | |
6601 | the entry (ascii . "ISO8859-1") in this variable. Then, reduce | |
6602 | sequences of wild cards -*-...-*- with a single wildcard -*-. | |
6603 | (This is to prevent use of auto-scaled fonts.) | |
6604 | ||
6605 | The function which processes the fontset resource value to create the | |
6606 | fontset is called create-fontset-from-fontset-spec. You can also call | |
6607 | that function explicitly to create a fontset. | |
6608 | ||
6609 | With the X resource Emacs.Font, you can specify a fontset name just | |
6610 | like an actual font name. But be careful not to specify a fontset | |
6611 | name in a wildcard resource like Emacs*Font--that tries to specify the | |
6612 | fontset for other purposes including menus, and they cannot handle | |
6613 | fontsets. | |
6614 | ||
6615 | *** The command M-x set-language-environment sets certain global Emacs | |
6616 | defaults for a particular choice of language. | |
6617 | ||
6618 | Selecting a language environment typically specifies a default input | |
6619 | method and which coding systems to recognize automatically when | |
6620 | visiting files. However, it does not try to reread files you have | |
6621 | already visited; the text in those buffers is not affected. The | |
6622 | language environment may also specify a default choice of coding | |
6623 | system for new files that you create. | |
6624 | ||
6625 | It makes no difference which buffer is current when you use | |
6626 | set-language-environment, because these defaults apply globally to the | |
6627 | whole Emacs session. | |
6628 | ||
6629 | For example, M-x set-language-environment RET Latin-1 RET | |
6630 | chooses the Latin-1 character set. In the .emacs file, you can do this | |
6631 | with (set-language-environment "Latin-1"). | |
6632 | ||
6633 | *** The command C-x RET f (set-buffer-file-coding-system) | |
6634 | specifies the file coding system for the current buffer. This | |
6635 | specifies what sort of character code translation to do when saving | |
6636 | the file. As an argument, you must specify the name of one of the | |
6637 | coding systems that Emacs supports. | |
6638 | ||
6639 | *** The command C-x RET c (universal-coding-system-argument) | |
6640 | lets you specify a coding system when you read or write a file. | |
6641 | This command uses the minibuffer to read a coding system name. | |
6642 | After you exit the minibuffer, the specified coding system | |
6643 | is used for *the immediately following command*. | |
6644 | ||
6645 | So if the immediately following command is a command to read or | |
6646 | write a file, it uses the specified coding system for that file. | |
6647 | ||
6648 | If the immediately following command does not use the coding system, | |
6649 | then C-x RET c ultimately has no effect. | |
6650 | ||
6651 | For example, C-x RET c iso-8859-1 RET C-x C-f temp RET | |
6652 | visits the file `temp' treating it as ISO Latin-1. | |
6653 | ||
6654 | *** You can specify the coding system for a file using the -*- | |
6655 | construct. Include `coding: CODINGSYSTEM;' inside the -*-...-*- | |
6656 | to specify use of coding system CODINGSYSTEM. You can also | |
6657 | specify the coding system in a local variable list at the end | |
6658 | of the file. | |
6659 | ||
6660 | *** The command C-x RET t (set-terminal-coding-system) specifies | |
6661 | the coding system for terminal output. If you specify a character | |
6662 | code for terminal output, all characters output to the terminal are | |
6663 | translated into that character code. | |
6664 | ||
6665 | This feature is useful for certain character-only terminals built in | |
6666 | various countries to support the languages of those countries. | |
6667 | ||
6668 | By default, output to the terminal is not translated at all. | |
6669 | ||
6670 | *** The command C-x RET k (set-keyboard-coding-system) specifies | |
6671 | the coding system for keyboard input. | |
6672 | ||
6673 | Character code translation of keyboard input is useful for terminals | |
6674 | with keys that send non-ASCII graphic characters--for example, | |
6675 | some terminals designed for ISO Latin-1 or subsets of it. | |
6676 | ||
6677 | By default, keyboard input is not translated at all. | |
6678 | ||
6679 | Character code translation of keyboard input is similar to using an | |
6680 | input method, in that both define sequences of keyboard input that | |
6681 | translate into single characters. However, input methods are designed | |
6682 | to be convenient for interactive use, while the code translations are | |
6683 | designed to work with terminals. | |
6684 | ||
6685 | *** The command C-x RET p (set-buffer-process-coding-system) | |
6686 | specifies the coding system for input and output to a subprocess. | |
6687 | This command applies to the current buffer; normally, each subprocess | |
6688 | has its own buffer, and thus you can use this command to specify | |
6689 | translation to and from a particular subprocess by giving the command | |
6690 | in the corresponding buffer. | |
6691 | ||
6692 | By default, process input and output are not translated at all. | |
6693 | ||
6694 | *** The variable file-name-coding-system specifies the coding system | |
6695 | to use for encoding file names before operating on them. | |
6696 | It is also used for decoding file names obtained from the system. | |
6697 | ||
6698 | *** The command C-\ (toggle-input-method) activates or deactivates | |
6699 | an input method. If no input method has been selected before, the | |
6700 | command prompts for you to specify the language and input method you | |
6701 | want to use. | |
6702 | ||
6703 | C-u C-\ (select-input-method) lets you switch to a different input | |
6704 | method. C-h C-\ (or C-h I) describes the current input method. | |
6705 | ||
6706 | *** Some input methods remap the keyboard to emulate various keyboard | |
6707 | layouts commonly used for particular scripts. How to do this | |
6708 | remapping properly depends on your actual keyboard layout. To specify | |
6709 | which layout your keyboard has, use M-x quail-set-keyboard-layout. | |
6710 | ||
6711 | *** The command C-h C (describe-coding-system) displays | |
6712 | the coding systems currently selected for various purposes, plus | |
6713 | related information. | |
6714 | ||
6715 | *** The command C-h h (view-hello-file) displays a file called | |
6716 | HELLO, which has examples of text in many languages, using various | |
6717 | scripts. | |
6718 | ||
6719 | *** The command C-h L (describe-language-support) displays | |
6720 | information about the support for a particular language. | |
6721 | You specify the language as an argument. | |
6722 | ||
6723 | *** The mode line now contains a letter or character that identifies | |
6724 | the coding system used in the visited file. It normally follows the | |
6725 | first dash. | |
6726 | ||
6727 | A dash indicates the default state of affairs: no code conversion | |
6728 | (except CRLF => newline if appropriate). `=' means no conversion | |
6729 | whatsoever. The ISO 8859 coding systems are represented by digits | |
6730 | 1 through 9. Other coding systems are represented by letters: | |
6731 | ||
6732 | A alternativnyj (Russian) | |
6733 | B big5 (Chinese) | |
6734 | C cn-gb-2312 (Chinese) | |
6735 | C iso-2022-cn (Chinese) | |
6736 | D in-is13194-devanagari (Indian languages) | |
6737 | E euc-japan (Japanese) | |
6738 | I iso-2022-cjk or iso-2022-ss2 (Chinese, Japanese, Korean) | |
6739 | J junet (iso-2022-7) or old-jis (iso-2022-jp-1978-irv) (Japanese) | |
6740 | K euc-korea (Korean) | |
6741 | R koi8 (Russian) | |
6742 | Q tibetan | |
6743 | S shift_jis (Japanese) | |
6744 | T lao | |
6745 | T tis620 (Thai) | |
6746 | V viscii or vscii (Vietnamese) | |
6747 | i iso-2022-lock (Chinese, Japanese, Korean) | |
6748 | k iso-2022-kr (Korean) | |
6749 | v viqr (Vietnamese) | |
6750 | z hz (Chinese) | |
6751 | ||
6752 | When you are using a character-only terminal (not a window system), | |
6753 | two additional characters appear in between the dash and the file | |
6754 | coding system. These two characters describe the coding system for | |
6755 | keyboard input, and the coding system for terminal output. | |
6756 | ||
6757 | *** The new variable rmail-file-coding-system specifies the code | |
6758 | conversion to use for RMAIL files. The default value is nil. | |
6759 | ||
6760 | When you read mail with Rmail, each message is decoded automatically | |
6761 | into Emacs' internal format. This has nothing to do with | |
6762 | rmail-file-coding-system. That variable controls reading and writing | |
6763 | Rmail files themselves. | |
6764 | ||
6765 | *** The new variable sendmail-coding-system specifies the code | |
6766 | conversion for outgoing mail. The default value is nil. | |
6767 | ||
6768 | Actually, there are three different ways of specifying the coding system | |
6769 | for sending mail: | |
6770 | ||
6771 | - If you use C-x RET f in the mail buffer, that takes priority. | |
6772 | - Otherwise, if you set sendmail-coding-system non-nil, that specifies it. | |
6773 | - Otherwise, the default coding system for new files is used, | |
6774 | if that is non-nil. That comes from your language environment. | |
6775 | - Otherwise, Latin-1 is used. | |
6776 | ||
6777 | *** The command C-h t (help-with-tutorial) accepts a prefix argument | |
6778 | to specify the language for the tutorial file. Currently, English, | |
6779 | Japanese, Korean and Thai are supported. We welcome additional | |
6780 | translations. | |
6781 | ||
6782 | ** An easy new way to visit a file with no code or format conversion | |
6783 | of any kind: Use M-x find-file-literally. There is also a command | |
6784 | insert-file-literally which inserts a file into the current buffer | |
6785 | without any conversion. | |
6786 | ||
6787 | ** C-q's handling of octal character codes is changed. | |
6788 | You can now specify any number of octal digits. | |
6789 | RET terminates the digits and is discarded; | |
6790 | any other non-digit terminates the digits and is then used as input. | |
6791 | ||
6792 | ** There are new commands for looking up Info documentation for | |
6793 | functions, variables and file names used in your programs. | |
6794 | ||
6795 | Type M-x info-lookup-symbol to look up a symbol in the buffer at point. | |
6796 | Type M-x info-lookup-file to look up a file in the buffer at point. | |
6797 | ||
6798 | Precisely which Info files are used to look it up depends on the major | |
6799 | mode. For example, in C mode, the GNU libc manual is used. | |
6800 | ||
6801 | ** M-TAB in most programming language modes now runs the command | |
6802 | complete-symbol. This command performs completion on the symbol name | |
6803 | in the buffer before point. | |
6804 | ||
6805 | With a numeric argument, it performs completion based on the set of | |
6806 | symbols documented in the Info files for the programming language that | |
6807 | you are using. | |
6808 | ||
6809 | With no argument, it does completion based on the current tags tables, | |
6810 | just like the old binding of M-TAB (complete-tag). | |
6811 | ||
6812 | ** File locking works with NFS now. | |
6813 | ||
6814 | The lock file for FILENAME is now a symbolic link named .#FILENAME, | |
6815 | in the same directory as FILENAME. | |
6816 | ||
6817 | This means that collision detection between two different machines now | |
6818 | works reasonably well; it also means that no file server or directory | |
6819 | can become a bottleneck. | |
6820 | ||
6821 | The new method does have drawbacks. It means that collision detection | |
6822 | does not operate when you edit a file in a directory where you cannot | |
6823 | create new files. Collision detection also doesn't operate when the | |
6824 | file server does not support symbolic links. But these conditions are | |
6825 | rare, and the ability to have collision detection while using NFS is | |
6826 | so useful that the change is worth while. | |
6827 | ||
6828 | When Emacs or a system crashes, this may leave behind lock files which | |
6829 | are stale. So you may occasionally get warnings about spurious | |
6830 | collisions. When you determine that the collision is spurious, just | |
6831 | tell Emacs to go ahead anyway. | |
6832 | ||
6833 | ** If you wish to use Show Paren mode to display matching parentheses, | |
6834 | it is no longer sufficient to load paren.el. Instead you must call | |
6835 | show-paren-mode. | |
6836 | ||
6837 | ** If you wish to use Delete Selection mode to replace a highlighted | |
6838 | selection when you insert new text, it is no longer sufficient to load | |
6839 | delsel.el. Instead you must call the function delete-selection-mode. | |
6840 | ||
6841 | ** If you wish to use Partial Completion mode to complete partial words | |
6842 | within symbols or filenames, it is no longer sufficient to load | |
6843 | complete.el. Instead you must call the function partial-completion-mode. | |
6844 | ||
6845 | ** If you wish to use uniquify to rename buffers for you, | |
6846 | it is no longer sufficient to load uniquify.el. You must also | |
6847 | set uniquify-buffer-name-style to one of the non-nil legitimate values. | |
6848 | ||
6849 | ** Changes in View mode. | |
6850 | ||
6851 | *** Several new commands are available in View mode. | |
6852 | Do H in view mode for a list of commands. | |
6853 | ||
6854 | *** There are two new commands for entering View mode: | |
6855 | view-file-other-frame and view-buffer-other-frame. | |
6856 | ||
6857 | *** Exiting View mode does a better job of restoring windows to their | |
6858 | previous state. | |
6859 | ||
6860 | *** New customization variable view-scroll-auto-exit. If non-nil, | |
6861 | scrolling past end of buffer makes view mode exit. | |
6862 | ||
6863 | *** New customization variable view-exits-all-viewing-windows. If | |
6864 | non-nil, view-mode will at exit restore all windows viewing buffer, | |
6865 | not just the selected window. | |
6866 | ||
6867 | *** New customization variable view-read-only. If non-nil, visiting a | |
6868 | read-only file automatically enters View mode, and toggle-read-only | |
6869 | turns View mode on or off. | |
6870 | ||
6871 | *** New customization variable view-remove-frame-by-deleting controls | |
6872 | how to remove a not needed frame at view mode exit. If non-nil, | |
6873 | delete the frame, if nil make an icon of it. | |
6874 | ||
6875 | ** C-x v l, the command to print a file's version control log, | |
6876 | now positions point at the entry for the file's current branch version. | |
6877 | ||
6878 | ** C-x v =, the command to compare a file with the last checked-in version, | |
6879 | has a new feature. If the file is currently not locked, so that it is | |
6880 | presumably identical to the last checked-in version, the command now asks | |
6881 | which version to compare with. | |
6882 | ||
6883 | ** When using hideshow.el, incremental search can temporarily show hidden | |
6884 | blocks if a match is inside the block. | |
6885 | ||
6886 | The block is hidden again if the search is continued and the next match | |
6887 | is outside the block. By customizing the variable | |
6888 | isearch-hide-immediately you can choose to hide all the temporarily | |
6889 | shown blocks only when exiting from incremental search. | |
6890 | ||
6891 | By customizing the variable hs-isearch-open you can choose what kind | |
6892 | of blocks to temporarily show during isearch: comment blocks, code | |
6893 | blocks, all of them or none. | |
6894 | ||
6895 | ** The new command C-x 4 0 (kill-buffer-and-window) kills the | |
6896 | current buffer and deletes the selected window. It asks for | |
6897 | confirmation first. | |
6898 | ||
6899 | ** C-x C-w, which saves the buffer into a specified file name, | |
6900 | now changes the major mode according to that file name. | |
6901 | However, the mode will not be changed if | |
6902 | (1) a local variables list or the `-*-' line specifies a major mode, or | |
6903 | (2) the current major mode is a "special" mode, | |
6904 | not suitable for ordinary files, or | |
6905 | (3) the new file name does not particularly specify any mode. | |
6906 | ||
6907 | This applies to M-x set-visited-file-name as well. | |
6908 | ||
6909 | However, if you set change-major-mode-with-file-name to nil, then | |
6910 | these commands do not change the major mode. | |
6911 | ||
6912 | ** M-x occur changes. | |
6913 | ||
6914 | *** If the argument to M-x occur contains upper case letters, | |
6915 | it performs a case-sensitive search. | |
6916 | ||
6917 | *** In the *Occur* buffer made by M-x occur, | |
6918 | if you type g or M-x revert-buffer, this repeats the search | |
6919 | using the same regular expression and the same buffer as before. | |
6920 | ||
6921 | ** In Transient Mark mode, the region in any one buffer is highlighted | |
6922 | in just one window at a time. At first, it is highlighted in the | |
6923 | window where you set the mark. The buffer's highlighting remains in | |
6924 | that window unless you select to another window which shows the same | |
6925 | buffer--then the highlighting moves to that window. | |
6926 | ||
6927 | ** The feature to suggest key bindings when you use M-x now operates | |
6928 | after the command finishes. The message suggesting key bindings | |
6929 | appears temporarily in the echo area. The previous echo area contents | |
6930 | come back after a few seconds, in case they contain useful information. | |
6931 | ||
6932 | ** Each frame now independently records the order for recently | |
6933 | selected buffers, so that the default for C-x b is now based on the | |
6934 | buffers recently selected in the selected frame. | |
6935 | ||
6936 | ** Outline mode changes. | |
6937 | ||
6938 | *** Outline mode now uses overlays (this is the former noutline.el). | |
6939 | ||
6940 | *** Incremental searches skip over invisible text in Outline mode. | |
6941 | ||
6942 | ** When a minibuffer window is active but not the selected window, if | |
6943 | you try to use the minibuffer, you used to get a nested minibuffer. | |
6944 | Now, this not only gives an error, it also cancels the minibuffer that | |
6945 | was already active. | |
6946 | ||
6947 | The motive for this change is so that beginning users do not | |
6948 | unknowingly move away from minibuffers, leaving them active, and then | |
6949 | get confused by it. | |
6950 | ||
6951 | If you want to be able to have recursive minibuffers, you must | |
6952 | set enable-recursive-minibuffers to non-nil. | |
6953 | ||
6954 | ** Changes in dynamic abbrevs. | |
6955 | ||
6956 | *** Expanding dynamic abbrevs with M-/ is now smarter about case | |
6957 | conversion. If the expansion has mixed case not counting the first | |
6958 | character, and the abbreviation matches the beginning of the expansion | |
6959 | including case, then the expansion is copied verbatim. | |
6960 | ||
6961 | The expansion is also copied verbatim if the abbreviation itself has | |
6962 | mixed case. And using SPC M-/ to copy an additional word always | |
6963 | copies it verbatim except when the previous copied word is all caps. | |
6964 | ||
6965 | *** The values of `dabbrev-case-replace' and `dabbrev-case-fold-search' | |
6966 | are no longer Lisp expressions. They have simply three possible | |
6967 | values. | |
6968 | ||
6969 | `dabbrev-case-replace' has these three values: nil (don't preserve | |
6970 | case), t (do), or `case-replace' (do like M-x query-replace). | |
6971 | `dabbrev-case-fold-search' has these three values: nil (don't ignore | |
6972 | case), t (do), or `case-fold-search' (do like search). | |
6973 | ||
6974 | ** Minibuffer history lists are truncated automatically now to a | |
6975 | certain length. The variable history-length specifies how long they | |
6976 | can be. The default value is 30. | |
6977 | ||
6978 | ** Changes in Mail mode. | |
6979 | ||
6980 | *** The key C-x m no longer runs the `mail' command directly. | |
6981 | Instead, it runs the command `compose-mail', which invokes the mail | |
6982 | composition mechanism you have selected with the variable | |
6983 | `mail-user-agent'. The default choice of user agent is | |
6984 | `sendmail-user-agent', which gives behavior compatible with the old | |
6985 | behavior. | |
6986 | ||
6987 | C-x 4 m now runs compose-mail-other-window, and C-x 5 m runs | |
6988 | compose-mail-other-frame. | |
6989 | ||
6990 | *** While composing a reply to a mail message, from Rmail, you can use | |
6991 | the command C-c C-r to cite just the region from the message you are | |
6992 | replying to. This copies the text which is the selected region in the | |
6993 | buffer that shows the original message. | |
6994 | ||
6995 | *** The command C-c C-i inserts a file at the end of the message, | |
6996 | with separator lines around the contents. | |
6997 | ||
6998 | *** The command M-x expand-mail-aliases expands all mail aliases | |
6999 | in suitable mail headers. Emacs automatically extracts mail alias | |
7000 | definitions from your mail alias file (e.g., ~/.mailrc). You do not | |
7001 | need to expand mail aliases yourself before sending mail. | |
7002 | ||
7003 | *** New features in the mail-complete command. | |
7004 | ||
7005 | **** The mail-complete command now inserts the user's full name, | |
7006 | for local users or if that is known. The variable mail-complete-style | |
7007 | controls the style to use, and whether to do this at all. | |
7008 | Its values are like those of mail-from-style. | |
7009 | ||
7010 | **** The variable mail-passwd-command lets you specify a shell command | |
7011 | to run to fetch a set of password-entries that add to the ones in | |
7012 | /etc/passwd. | |
7013 | ||
7014 | **** The variable mail-passwd-file now specifies a list of files to read | |
7015 | to get the list of user ids. By default, one file is used: | |
7016 | /etc/passwd. | |
7017 | ||
7018 | ** You can "quote" a file name to inhibit special significance of | |
7019 | special syntax, by adding `/:' to the beginning. Thus, if you have a | |
7020 | directory named `/foo:', you can prevent it from being treated as a | |
7021 | reference to a remote host named `foo' by writing it as `/:/foo:'. | |
7022 | ||
7023 | Emacs uses this new construct automatically when necessary, such as | |
7024 | when you start it with a working directory whose name might otherwise | |
7025 | be taken to be magic. | |
7026 | ||
7027 | ** There is a new command M-x grep-find which uses find to select | |
7028 | files to search through, and grep to scan them. The output is | |
7029 | available in a Compile mode buffer, as with M-x grep. | |
7030 | ||
7031 | M-x grep now uses the -e option if the grep program supports that. | |
7032 | (-e prevents problems if the search pattern starts with a dash.) | |
7033 | ||
7034 | ** In Dired, the & command now flags for deletion the files whose names | |
7035 | suggest they are probably not needed in the long run. | |
7036 | ||
7037 | In Dired, * is now a prefix key for mark-related commands. | |
7038 | ||
7039 | new key dired.el binding old key | |
7040 | ------- ---------------- ------- | |
7041 | * c dired-change-marks c | |
7042 | * m dired-mark m | |
7043 | * * dired-mark-executables * (binding deleted) | |
7044 | * / dired-mark-directories / (binding deleted) | |
7045 | * @ dired-mark-symlinks @ (binding deleted) | |
7046 | * u dired-unmark u | |
7047 | * DEL dired-unmark-backward DEL | |
7048 | * ? dired-unmark-all-files M-C-? | |
7049 | * ! dired-unmark-all-marks | |
7050 | * % dired-mark-files-regexp % m | |
7051 | * C-n dired-next-marked-file M-} | |
7052 | * C-p dired-prev-marked-file M-{ | |
7053 | ||
7054 | ** Rmail changes. | |
7055 | ||
7056 | *** When Rmail cannot convert your incoming mail into Babyl format, it | |
7057 | saves the new mail in the file RMAILOSE.n, where n is an integer | |
7058 | chosen to make a unique name. This way, Rmail will not keep crashing | |
7059 | each time you run it. | |
7060 | ||
7061 | *** In Rmail, the variable rmail-summary-line-count-flag now controls | |
7062 | whether to include the line count in the summary. Non-nil means yes. | |
7063 | ||
7064 | *** In Rmail summary buffers, d and C-d (the commands to delete | |
7065 | messages) now take repeat counts as arguments. A negative argument | |
7066 | means to move in the opposite direction. | |
7067 | ||
7068 | *** In Rmail, the t command now takes an optional argument which lets | |
7069 | you specify whether to show the message headers in full or pruned. | |
7070 | ||
7071 | *** In Rmail, the new command w (rmail-output-body-to-file) writes | |
7072 | just the body of the current message into a file, without the headers. | |
7073 | It takes the file name from the message subject, by default, but you | |
7074 | can edit that file name in the minibuffer before it is actually used | |
7075 | for output. | |
7076 | ||
7077 | ** Gnus changes. | |
7078 | ||
7079 | *** nntp.el has been totally rewritten in an asynchronous fashion. | |
7080 | ||
7081 | *** Article prefetching functionality has been moved up into | |
7082 | Gnus. | |
7083 | ||
7084 | *** Scoring can now be performed with logical operators like | |
7085 | `and', `or', `not', and parent redirection. | |
7086 | ||
7087 | *** Article washing status can be displayed in the | |
7088 | article mode line. | |
7089 | ||
7090 | *** gnus.el has been split into many smaller files. | |
7091 | ||
7092 | *** Suppression of duplicate articles based on Message-ID. | |
7093 | ||
7094 | (setq gnus-suppress-duplicates t) | |
7095 | ||
7096 | *** New variables for specifying what score and adapt files | |
7097 | are to be considered home score and adapt files. See | |
7098 | `gnus-home-score-file' and `gnus-home-adapt-files'. | |
7099 | ||
7100 | *** Groups can inherit group parameters from parent topics. | |
7101 | ||
7102 | *** Article editing has been revamped and is now usable. | |
7103 | ||
7104 | *** Signatures can be recognized in more intelligent fashions. | |
7105 | See `gnus-signature-separator' and `gnus-signature-limit'. | |
7106 | ||
7107 | *** Summary pick mode has been made to look more nn-like. | |
7108 | Line numbers are displayed and the `.' command can be | |
7109 | used to pick articles. | |
7110 | ||
7111 | *** Commands for moving the .newsrc.eld from one server to | |
7112 | another have been added. | |
7113 | ||
7114 | `M-x gnus-change-server' | |
7115 | ||
7116 | *** A way to specify that "uninteresting" fields be suppressed when | |
7117 | generating lines in buffers. | |
7118 | ||
7119 | *** Several commands in the group buffer can be undone with | |
7120 | `M-C-_'. | |
7121 | ||
7122 | *** Scoring can be done on words using the new score type `w'. | |
7123 | ||
7124 | *** Adaptive scoring can be done on a Subject word-by-word basis: | |
7125 | ||
7126 | (setq gnus-use-adaptive-scoring '(word)) | |
7127 | ||
7128 | *** Scores can be decayed. | |
7129 | ||
7130 | (setq gnus-decay-scores t) | |
7131 | ||
7132 | *** Scoring can be performed using a regexp on the Date header. The | |
7133 | Date is normalized to compact ISO 8601 format first. | |
7134 | ||
7135 | *** A new command has been added to remove all data on articles from | |
7136 | the native server. | |
7137 | ||
7138 | `M-x gnus-group-clear-data-on-native-groups' | |
7139 | ||
7140 | *** A new command for reading collections of documents | |
7141 | (nndoc with nnvirtual on top) has been added -- `M-C-d'. | |
7142 | ||
7143 | *** Process mark sets can be pushed and popped. | |
7144 | ||
7145 | *** A new mail-to-news backend makes it possible to post | |
7146 | even when the NNTP server doesn't allow posting. | |
7147 | ||
7148 | *** A new backend for reading searches from Web search engines | |
7149 | (DejaNews, Alta Vista, InReference) has been added. | |
7150 | ||
7151 | Use the `G w' command in the group buffer to create such | |
7152 | a group. | |
7153 | ||
7154 | *** Groups inside topics can now be sorted using the standard | |
7155 | sorting functions, and each topic can be sorted independently. | |
7156 | ||
7157 | See the commands under the `T S' submap. | |
7158 | ||
7159 | *** Subsets of the groups can be sorted independently. | |
7160 | ||
7161 | See the commands under the `G P' submap. | |
7162 | ||
7163 | *** Cached articles can be pulled into the groups. | |
7164 | ||
7165 | Use the `Y c' command. | |
7166 | ||
7167 | *** Score files are now applied in a more reliable order. | |
7168 | ||
7169 | *** Reports on where mail messages end up can be generated. | |
7170 | ||
7171 | `M-x nnmail-split-history' | |
7172 | ||
7173 | *** More hooks and functions have been added to remove junk | |
7174 | from incoming mail before saving the mail. | |
7175 | ||
7176 | See `nnmail-prepare-incoming-header-hook'. | |
7177 | ||
7178 | *** The nnml mail backend now understands compressed article files. | |
7179 | ||
7180 | *** To enable Gnus to read/post multi-lingual articles, you must execute | |
7181 | the following code, for instance, in your .emacs. | |
7182 | ||
7183 | (add-hook 'gnus-startup-hook 'gnus-mule-initialize) | |
7184 | ||
7185 | Then, when you start Gnus, it will decode non-ASCII text automatically | |
7186 | and show appropriate characters. (Note: if you are using gnus-mime | |
7187 | from the SEMI package, formerly known as TM, you should NOT add this | |
7188 | hook to gnus-startup-hook; gnus-mime has its own method of handling | |
7189 | this issue.) | |
7190 | ||
7191 | Since it is impossible to distinguish all coding systems | |
7192 | automatically, you may need to specify a choice of coding system for a | |
7193 | particular news group. This can be done by: | |
7194 | ||
7195 | (gnus-mule-add-group NEWSGROUP 'CODING-SYSTEM) | |
7196 | ||
7197 | Here NEWSGROUP should be a string which names a newsgroup or a tree | |
7198 | of newsgroups. If NEWSGROUP is "XXX.YYY", all news groups under | |
7199 | "XXX.YYY" (including "XXX.YYY.ZZZ") will use the specified coding | |
7200 | system. CODING-SYSTEM specifies which coding system to use (for both | |
7201 | for reading and posting). | |
7202 | ||
7203 | CODING-SYSTEM can also be a cons cell of the form | |
7204 | (READ-CODING-SYSTEM . POST-CODING-SYSTEM) | |
7205 | Then READ-CODING-SYSTEM is used when you read messages from the | |
7206 | newsgroups, while POST-CODING-SYSTEM is used when you post messages | |
7207 | there. | |
7208 | ||
7209 | Emacs knows the right coding systems for certain newsgroups by | |
7210 | default. Here are some of these default settings: | |
7211 | ||
7212 | (gnus-mule-add-group "fj" 'iso-2022-7) | |
7213 | (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.chinese.text" 'hz-gb-2312) | |
7214 | (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.hk" 'hz-gb-2312) | |
7215 | (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.chinese.text.big5" 'cn-big5) | |
7216 | (gnus-mule-add-group "soc.culture.vietnamese" '(nil . viqr)) | |
7217 | ||
7218 | When you reply by mail to an article, these settings are ignored; | |
7219 | the mail is encoded according to sendmail-coding-system, as usual. | |
7220 | ||
7221 | ** CC mode changes. | |
7222 | ||
7223 | *** If you edit primarily one style of C (or C++, Objective-C, Java) | |
7224 | code, you may want to make the CC Mode style variables have global | |
7225 | values so that you can set them directly in your .emacs file. To do | |
7226 | this, set c-style-variables-are-local-p to nil in your .emacs file. | |
7227 | Note that this only takes effect if you do it *before* cc-mode.el is | |
7228 | loaded. | |
7229 | ||
7230 | If you typically edit more than one style of C (or C++, Objective-C, | |
7231 | Java) code in a single Emacs session, you may want to make the CC Mode | |
7232 | style variables have buffer local values. By default, all buffers | |
7233 | share the same style variable settings; to make them buffer local, set | |
7234 | c-style-variables-are-local-p to t in your .emacs file. Note that you | |
7235 | must do this *before* CC Mode is loaded. | |
7236 | ||
7237 | *** The new variable c-indentation-style holds the C style name | |
7238 | of the current buffer. | |
7239 | ||
7240 | *** The variable c-block-comments-indent-p has been deleted, because | |
7241 | it is no longer necessary. C mode now handles all the supported styles | |
7242 | of block comments, with no need to say which one you will use. | |
7243 | ||
7244 | *** There is a new indentation style "python", which specifies the C | |
7245 | style that the Python developers like. | |
7246 | ||
7247 | *** There is a new c-cleanup-list option: brace-elseif-brace. | |
7248 | This says to put ...} else if (...) {... on one line, | |
7249 | just as brace-else-brace says to put ...} else {... on one line. | |
7250 | ||
7251 | ** VC Changes [new] | |
7252 | ||
9614842d | 7253 | *** In vc-retrieve-snapshot (C-x v r), if you don't specify a snapshot |
3787e12e GM |
7254 | name, it retrieves the *latest* versions of all files in the current |
7255 | directory and its subdirectories (aside from files already locked). | |
7256 | ||
7257 | This feature is useful if your RCS directory is a link to a common | |
7258 | master directory, and you want to pick up changes made by other | |
7259 | developers. | |
7260 | ||
7261 | You can do the same thing for an individual file by typing C-u C-x C-q | |
7262 | RET in a buffer visiting that file. | |
7263 | ||
7264 | *** VC can now handle files under CVS that are being "watched" by | |
7265 | other developers. Such files are made read-only by CVS. To get a | |
7266 | writable copy, type C-x C-q in a buffer visiting such a file. VC then | |
7267 | calls "cvs edit", which notifies the other developers of it. | |
7268 | ||
7269 | *** vc-version-diff (C-u C-x v =) now suggests reasonable defaults for | |
7270 | version numbers, based on the current state of the file. | |
7271 | ||
7272 | ** Calendar changes. | |
7273 | ||
9614842d JW |
7274 | *** A new function, list-holidays, allows you list holidays or |
7275 | subclasses of holidays for ranges of years. Related menu items allow | |
7276 | you do this for the year of the selected date, or the | |
7277 | following/previous years. | |
7278 | ||
7279 | *** There is now support for the Baha'i calendar system. Use `pb' in | |
7280 | the *Calendar* buffer to display the current Baha'i date. The Baha'i | |
7281 | calendar, or "Badi calendar" is a system of 19 months with 19 days | |
7282 | each, and 4 intercalary days (5 during a Gregorian leap year). The | |
7283 | calendar begins May 23, 1844, with each of the months named after a | |
7284 | supposed attribute of God. | |
3787e12e GM |
7285 | |
7286 | ** ps-print changes | |
7287 | ||
7288 | There are some new user variables for customizing the page layout. | |
7289 | ||
7290 | *** Paper size, paper orientation, columns | |
7291 | ||
7292 | The variable `ps-paper-type' determines the size of paper ps-print | |
7293 | formats for; it should contain one of the symbols: | |
7294 | `a4' `a3' `letter' `legal' `letter-small' `tabloid' | |
7295 | `ledger' `statement' `executive' `a4small' `b4' `b5' | |
7296 | It defaults to `letter'. | |
7297 | If you need other sizes, see the variable `ps-page-dimensions-database'. | |
7298 | ||
7299 | The variable `ps-landscape-mode' determines the orientation | |
7300 | of the printing on the page. nil, the default, means "portrait" mode, | |
7301 | non-nil means "landscape" mode. | |
7302 | ||
7303 | The variable `ps-number-of-columns' must be a positive integer. | |
7304 | It determines the number of columns both in landscape and portrait mode. | |
7305 | It defaults to 1. | |
7306 | ||
7307 | *** Horizontal layout | |
7308 | ||
7309 | The horizontal layout is determined by the variables | |
7310 | `ps-left-margin', `ps-inter-column', and `ps-right-margin'. | |
7311 | All are measured in points. | |
7312 | ||
7313 | *** Vertical layout | |
7314 | ||
7315 | The vertical layout is determined by the variables | |
7316 | `ps-bottom-margin', `ps-top-margin', and `ps-header-offset'. | |
7317 | All are measured in points. | |
7318 | ||
7319 | *** Headers | |
7320 | ||
7321 | If the variable `ps-print-header' is nil, no header is printed. Then | |
7322 | `ps-header-offset' is not relevant and `ps-top-margin' represents the | |
7323 | margin above the text. | |
7324 | ||
7325 | If the variable `ps-print-header-frame' is non-nil, a gaudy | |
7326 | framing box is printed around the header. | |
7327 | ||
7328 | The contents of the header are determined by `ps-header-lines', | |
7329 | `ps-show-n-of-n', `ps-left-header' and `ps-right-header'. | |
7330 | ||
7331 | The height of the header is determined by `ps-header-line-pad', | |
7332 | `ps-header-font-family', `ps-header-title-font-size' and | |
7333 | `ps-header-font-size'. | |
7334 | ||
7335 | *** Font managing | |
7336 | ||
7337 | The variable `ps-font-family' determines which font family is to be | |
7338 | used for ordinary text. Its value must be a key symbol in the alist | |
7339 | `ps-font-info-database'. You can add other font families by adding | |
7340 | elements to this alist. | |
7341 | ||
7342 | The variable `ps-font-size' determines the size of the font | |
7343 | for ordinary text. It defaults to 8.5 points. | |
7344 | ||
7345 | ** hideshow changes. | |
7346 | ||
7347 | *** now supports hiding of blocks of single line comments (like // for | |
7348 | C++, ; for lisp). | |
7349 | ||
7350 | *** Support for java-mode added. | |
7351 | ||
7352 | *** When doing `hs-hide-all' it is now possible to also hide the comments | |
7353 | in the file if `hs-hide-comments-when-hiding-all' is set. | |
7354 | ||
f3780fe4 | 7355 | *** The new function `hs-hide-initial-comment' hides the comments at |
3787e12e GM |
7356 | the beginning of the files. Finally those huge RCS logs don't stay in your |
7357 | way! This is run by default when entering the `hs-minor-mode'. | |
7358 | ||
7359 | *** Now uses overlays instead of `selective-display', so is more | |
7360 | robust and a lot faster. | |
7361 | ||
7362 | *** A block beginning can span multiple lines. | |
7363 | ||
7364 | *** The new variable `hs-show-hidden-short-form' if t, directs hideshow | |
7365 | to show only the beginning of a block when it is hidden. See the | |
7366 | documentation for more details. | |
7367 | ||
7368 | ** Changes in Enriched mode. | |
7369 | ||
7370 | *** When you visit a file in enriched-mode, Emacs will make sure it is | |
7371 | filled to the current fill-column. This behavior is now independent | |
7372 | of the size of the window. When you save the file, the fill-column in | |
7373 | use is stored as well, so that the whole buffer need not be refilled | |
7374 | the next time unless the fill-column is different. | |
7375 | ||
7376 | *** use-hard-newlines is now a minor mode. When it is enabled, Emacs | |
7377 | distinguishes between hard and soft newlines, and treats hard newlines | |
7378 | as paragraph boundaries. Otherwise all newlines inserted are marked | |
7379 | as soft, and paragraph boundaries are determined solely from the text. | |
7380 | ||
7381 | ** Font Lock mode | |
7382 | ||
7383 | *** Custom support | |
7384 | ||
7385 | The variables font-lock-face-attributes, font-lock-display-type and | |
7386 | font-lock-background-mode are now obsolete; the recommended way to specify the | |
7387 | faces to use for Font Lock mode is with M-x customize-group on the new custom | |
7388 | group font-lock-highlighting-faces. If you set font-lock-face-attributes in | |
7389 | your ~/.emacs file, Font Lock mode will respect its value. However, you should | |
7390 | consider converting from setting that variable to using M-x customize. | |
7391 | ||
7392 | You can still use X resources to specify Font Lock face appearances. | |
7393 | ||
7394 | *** Maximum decoration | |
7395 | ||
7396 | Fontification now uses the maximum level of decoration supported by | |
7397 | default. Previously, fontification used a mode-specific default level | |
7398 | of decoration, which is typically the minimum level of decoration | |
7399 | supported. You can set font-lock-maximum-decoration to nil | |
7400 | to get the old behavior. | |
7401 | ||
7402 | *** New support | |
7403 | ||
7404 | Support is now provided for Java, Objective-C, AWK and SIMULA modes. | |
7405 | ||
7406 | Note that Font Lock mode can be turned on without knowing exactly what modes | |
7407 | support Font Lock mode, via the command global-font-lock-mode. | |
7408 | ||
7409 | *** Configurable support | |
7410 | ||
7411 | Support for C, C++, Objective-C and Java can be more easily configured for | |
7412 | additional types and classes via the new variables c-font-lock-extra-types, | |
7413 | c++-font-lock-extra-types, objc-font-lock-extra-types and, you guessed it, | |
7414 | java-font-lock-extra-types. These value of each of these variables should be a | |
7415 | list of regexps matching the extra type names. For example, the default value | |
7416 | of c-font-lock-extra-types is ("\\sw+_t") which means fontification follows the | |
7417 | convention that C type names end in _t. This results in slower fontification. | |
7418 | ||
7419 | Of course, you can change the variables that specify fontification in whatever | |
7420 | way you wish, typically by adding regexps. However, these new variables make | |
7421 | it easier to make specific and common changes for the fontification of types. | |
7422 | ||
7423 | *** Adding highlighting patterns to existing support | |
7424 | ||
7425 | You can use the new function font-lock-add-keywords to add your own | |
7426 | highlighting patterns, such as for project-local or user-specific constructs, | |
7427 | for any mode. | |
7428 | ||
7429 | For example, to highlight `FIXME:' words in C comments, put: | |
7430 | ||
7431 | (font-lock-add-keywords 'c-mode '(("\\<FIXME:" 0 font-lock-warning-face t))) | |
7432 | ||
7433 | in your ~/.emacs. | |
7434 | ||
7435 | *** New faces | |
7436 | ||
7437 | Font Lock now defines two new faces, font-lock-builtin-face and | |
7438 | font-lock-warning-face. These are intended to highlight builtin keywords, | |
7439 | distinct from a language's normal keywords, and objects that should be brought | |
7440 | to user attention, respectively. Various modes now use these new faces. | |
7441 | ||
7442 | *** Changes to fast-lock support mode | |
7443 | ||
7444 | The fast-lock package, one of the two Font Lock support modes, can now process | |
7445 | cache files silently. You can use the new variable fast-lock-verbose, in the | |
7446 | same way as font-lock-verbose, to control this feature. | |
7447 | ||
7448 | *** Changes to lazy-lock support mode | |
7449 | ||
7450 | The lazy-lock package, one of the two Font Lock support modes, can now fontify | |
7451 | according to the true syntactic context relative to other lines. You can use | |
7452 | the new variable lazy-lock-defer-contextually to control this feature. If | |
7453 | non-nil, changes to the buffer will cause subsequent lines in the buffer to be | |
7454 | refontified after lazy-lock-defer-time seconds of idle time. If nil, then only | |
7455 | the modified lines will be refontified; this is the same as the previous Lazy | |
7456 | Lock mode behaviour and the behaviour of Font Lock mode. | |
7457 | ||
7458 | This feature is useful in modes where strings or comments can span lines. | |
7459 | For example, if a string or comment terminating character is deleted, then if | |
7460 | this feature is enabled subsequent lines in the buffer will be correctly | |
7461 | refontified to reflect their new syntactic context. Previously, only the line | |
7462 | containing the deleted character would be refontified and you would have to use | |
7463 | the command M-g M-g (font-lock-fontify-block) to refontify some lines. | |
7464 | ||
7465 | As a consequence of this new feature, two other variables have changed: | |
7466 | ||
7467 | Variable `lazy-lock-defer-driven' is renamed `lazy-lock-defer-on-scrolling'. | |
7468 | Variable `lazy-lock-defer-time' can now only be a time, i.e., a number. | |
7469 | Buffer modes for which on-the-fly deferral applies can be specified via the | |
7470 | new variable `lazy-lock-defer-on-the-fly'. | |
7471 | ||
7472 | If you set these variables in your ~/.emacs, then you may have to change those | |
7473 | settings. | |
7474 | ||
7475 | ** Ada mode changes. | |
7476 | ||
7477 | *** There is now better support for using find-file.el with Ada mode. | |
7478 | If you switch between spec and body, the cursor stays in the same | |
7479 | procedure (modulo overloading). If a spec has no body file yet, but | |
7480 | you try to switch to its body file, Ada mode now generates procedure | |
7481 | stubs. | |
7482 | ||
7483 | *** There are two new commands: | |
7484 | - `ada-make-local' : invokes gnatmake on the current buffer | |
7485 | - `ada-check-syntax' : check syntax of current buffer. | |
7486 | ||
7487 | The user options `ada-compiler-make', `ada-make-options', | |
7488 | `ada-language-version', `ada-compiler-syntax-check', and | |
7489 | `ada-compile-options' are used within these commands. | |
7490 | ||
7491 | *** Ada mode can now work with Outline minor mode. The outline level | |
7492 | is calculated from the indenting, not from syntactic constructs. | |
7493 | Outlining does not work if your code is not correctly indented. | |
7494 | ||
7495 | *** The new function `ada-gnat-style' converts the buffer to the style of | |
7496 | formatting used in GNAT. It places two blanks after a comment start, | |
7497 | places one blank between a word end and an opening '(', and puts one | |
7498 | space between a comma and the beginning of a word. | |
7499 | ||
7500 | ** Scheme mode changes. | |
7501 | ||
7502 | *** Scheme mode indentation now uses many of the facilities of Lisp | |
7503 | mode; therefore, the variables to customize it are the variables used | |
7504 | for Lisp mode which have names starting with `lisp-'. The variables | |
7505 | with names starting with `scheme-' which used to do this no longer | |
7506 | have any effect. | |
7507 | ||
7508 | If you want to use different indentation for Scheme and Lisp, this is | |
7509 | still possible, but now you must do it by adding a hook to | |
7510 | scheme-mode-hook, which could work by setting the `lisp-' indentation | |
7511 | variables as buffer-local variables. | |
7512 | ||
7513 | *** DSSSL mode is a variant of Scheme mode, for editing DSSSL scripts. | |
7514 | Use M-x dsssl-mode. | |
7515 | ||
7516 | ** Changes to the emacsclient program | |
7517 | ||
7518 | *** If a socket can't be found, and environment variables LOGNAME or | |
7519 | USER are set, emacsclient now looks for a socket based on the UID | |
7520 | associated with the name. That is an emacsclient running as root | |
7521 | can connect to an Emacs server started by a non-root user. | |
7522 | ||
7523 | *** The emacsclient program now accepts an option --no-wait which tells | |
7524 | it to return immediately without waiting for you to "finish" the | |
7525 | buffer in Emacs. | |
7526 | ||
7527 | *** The new option --alternate-editor allows to specify an editor to | |
7528 | use if Emacs is not running. The environment variable | |
7529 | ALTERNATE_EDITOR can be used for the same effect; the command line | |
7530 | option takes precedence. | |
7531 | ||
7532 | ** M-x eldoc-mode enables a minor mode in which the echo area | |
7533 | constantly shows the parameter list for function being called at point | |
7534 | (in Emacs Lisp and Lisp Interaction modes only). | |
7535 | ||
7536 | ** C-x n d now runs the new command narrow-to-defun, | |
7537 | which narrows the accessible parts of the buffer to just | |
7538 | the current defun. | |
7539 | ||
7540 | ** Emacs now handles the `--' argument in the standard way; all | |
7541 | following arguments are treated as ordinary file names. | |
7542 | ||
7543 | ** On MSDOS and Windows, the bookmark file is now called _emacs.bmk, | |
7544 | and the saved desktop file is now called _emacs.desktop (truncated if | |
7545 | necessary). | |
7546 | ||
7547 | ** When you kill a buffer that visits a file, | |
7548 | if there are any registers that save positions in the file, | |
7549 | these register values no longer become completely useless. | |
7550 | If you try to go to such a register with C-x j, then you are | |
7551 | asked whether to visit the file again. If you say yes, | |
7552 | it visits the file and then goes to the same position. | |
7553 | ||
7554 | ** When you visit a file that changes frequently outside Emacs--for | |
7555 | example, a log of output from a process that continues to run--it may | |
7556 | be useful for Emacs to revert the file without querying you whenever | |
7557 | you visit the file afresh with C-x C-f. | |
7558 | ||
7559 | You can request this behavior for certain files by setting the | |
7560 | variable revert-without-query to a list of regular expressions. If a | |
7561 | file's name matches any of these regular expressions, find-file and | |
7562 | revert-buffer revert the buffer without asking for permission--but | |
7563 | only if you have not edited the buffer text yourself. | |
7564 | ||
7565 | ** set-default-font has been renamed to set-frame-font | |
7566 | since it applies only to the current frame. | |
7567 | ||
7568 | ** In TeX mode, you can use the variable tex-main-file to specify the | |
7569 | file for tex-file to run TeX on. (By default, tex-main-file is nil, | |
7570 | and tex-file runs TeX on the current visited file.) | |
7571 | ||
7572 | This is useful when you are editing a document that consists of | |
7573 | multiple files. In each of the included files, you can set up a local | |
7574 | variable list which specifies the top-level file of your document for | |
7575 | tex-main-file. Then tex-file will run TeX on the whole document | |
7576 | instead of just the file you are editing. | |
7577 | ||
7578 | ** RefTeX mode | |
7579 | ||
7580 | RefTeX mode is a new minor mode with special support for \label, \ref | |
7581 | and \cite macros in LaTeX documents. RefTeX distinguishes labels of | |
7582 | different environments (equation, figure, ...) and has full support for | |
7583 | multifile documents. To use it, select a buffer with a LaTeX document and | |
7584 | turn the mode on with M-x reftex-mode. Here are the main user commands: | |
7585 | ||
7586 | C-c ( reftex-label | |
7587 | Creates a label semi-automatically. RefTeX is context sensitive and | |
7588 | knows which kind of label is needed. | |
7589 | ||
7590 | C-c ) reftex-reference | |
7591 | Offers in a menu all labels in the document, along with context of the | |
7592 | label definition. The selected label is referenced as \ref{LABEL}. | |
7593 | ||
7594 | C-c [ reftex-citation | |
7595 | Prompts for a regular expression and displays a list of matching BibTeX | |
7596 | database entries. The selected entry is cited with a \cite{KEY} macro. | |
7597 | ||
7598 | C-c & reftex-view-crossref | |
7599 | Views the cross reference of a \ref or \cite command near point. | |
7600 | ||
7601 | C-c = reftex-toc | |
7602 | Shows a table of contents of the (multifile) document. From there you | |
7603 | can quickly jump to every section. | |
7604 | ||
7605 | Under X, RefTeX installs a "Ref" menu in the menu bar, with additional | |
7606 | commands. Press `?' to get help when a prompt mentions this feature. | |
7607 | Full documentation and customization examples are in the file | |
7608 | reftex.el. You can use the finder to view the file documentation: | |
7609 | C-h p --> tex --> reftex.el | |
7610 | ||
7611 | ** Changes in BibTeX mode. | |
7612 | ||
7613 | *** Info documentation is now available. | |
7614 | ||
7615 | *** Don't allow parentheses in string constants anymore. This confused | |
7616 | both the BibTeX program and Emacs BibTeX mode. | |
7617 | ||
7618 | *** Renamed variable bibtex-mode-user-optional-fields to | |
7619 | bibtex-user-optional-fields. | |
7620 | ||
7621 | *** Removed variable bibtex-include-OPTannote | |
7622 | (use bibtex-user-optional-fields instead). | |
7623 | ||
7624 | *** New interactive functions to copy and kill fields and complete | |
7625 | entries to the BibTeX kill ring, from where they can be yanked back by | |
7626 | appropriate functions. | |
7627 | ||
7628 | *** New interactive functions for repositioning and marking of | |
7629 | entries. They are bound by default to M-C-l and M-C-h. | |
7630 | ||
7631 | *** New hook bibtex-clean-entry-hook. It is called after entry has | |
7632 | been cleaned. | |
7633 | ||
7634 | *** New variable bibtex-field-delimiters, which replaces variables | |
7635 | bibtex-field-{left|right}-delimiter. | |
7636 | ||
7637 | *** New variable bibtex-entry-delimiters to determine how entries | |
7638 | shall be delimited. | |
7639 | ||
7640 | *** Allow preinitialization of fields. See documentation of | |
7641 | bibtex-user-optional-fields, bibtex-entry-field-alist, and | |
7642 | bibtex-include-OPTkey for details. | |
7643 | ||
7644 | *** Book and InBook entries require either an author or an editor | |
7645 | field. This is now supported by bibtex.el. Alternative fields are | |
7646 | prefixed with `ALT'. | |
7647 | ||
7648 | *** New variable bibtex-entry-format, which replaces variable | |
7649 | bibtex-clean-entry-zap-empty-opts and allows specification of many | |
7650 | formatting options performed on cleaning an entry (see variable | |
7651 | documentation). | |
7652 | ||
7653 | *** Even more control on how automatic keys are generated. See | |
7654 | documentation of bibtex-generate-autokey for details. Transcriptions | |
7655 | for foreign languages other than German are now handled, too. | |
7656 | ||
7657 | *** New boolean user option bibtex-comma-after-last-field to decide if | |
7658 | comma should be inserted at end of last field. | |
7659 | ||
7660 | *** New boolean user option bibtex-align-at-equal-sign to determine if | |
7661 | alignment should be made at left side of field contents or at equal | |
7662 | signs. New user options to control entry layout (e.g. indentation). | |
7663 | ||
7664 | *** New function bibtex-fill-entry to realign entries. | |
7665 | ||
7666 | *** New function bibtex-reformat to reformat region or buffer. | |
7667 | ||
7668 | *** New function bibtex-convert-alien to convert a BibTeX database | |
7669 | from alien sources. | |
7670 | ||
7671 | *** New function bibtex-complete-key (similar to bibtex-complete-string) | |
7672 | to complete prefix to a key defined in buffer. Mainly useful in | |
7673 | crossref entries. | |
7674 | ||
7675 | *** New function bibtex-count-entries to count entries in buffer or | |
7676 | region. | |
7677 | ||
7678 | *** Added support for imenu. | |
7679 | ||
7680 | *** The function `bibtex-validate' now checks current region instead | |
7681 | of buffer if mark is active. Now it shows all errors of buffer in a | |
7682 | `compilation mode' buffer. You can use the normal commands (e.g. | |
7683 | `next-error') for compilation modes to jump to errors. | |
7684 | ||
7685 | *** New variable `bibtex-string-file-path' to determine where the files | |
7686 | from `bibtex-string-files' are searched. | |
7687 | ||
7688 | ** Iso Accents mode now supports Latin-3 as an alternative. | |
7689 | ||
7690 | ** The command next-error now opens blocks hidden by hideshow. | |
7691 | ||
7692 | ** The function using-unix-filesystems has been replaced by the | |
7693 | functions add-untranslated-filesystem and remove-untranslated-filesystem. | |
7694 | Each of these functions takes the name of a drive letter or directory | |
7695 | as an argument. | |
7696 | ||
7697 | When a filesystem is added as untranslated, all files on it are read | |
7698 | and written in binary mode (no cr/lf translation is performed). | |
7699 | ||
7700 | ** browse-url changes | |
7701 | ||
7702 | *** New methods for: Grail (browse-url-generic), MMM (browse-url-mmm), | |
7703 | Lynx in a separate xterm (browse-url-lynx-xterm) or in an Emacs window | |
7704 | (browse-url-lynx-emacs), remote W3 (browse-url-w3-gnudoit), generic | |
7705 | non-remote-controlled browsers (browse-url-generic) and associated | |
7706 | customization variables. | |
7707 | ||
7708 | *** New commands `browse-url-of-region' and `browse-url'. | |
7709 | ||
7710 | *** URLs marked up with <URL:...> (RFC1738) work if broken across | |
7711 | lines. Browsing methods can be associated with URL regexps | |
7712 | (e.g. mailto: URLs) via `browse-url-browser-function'. | |
7713 | ||
7714 | ** Changes in Ediff | |
7715 | ||
7716 | *** Clicking Mouse-2 on a brief command description in Ediff control panel | |
7717 | pops up the Info file for this command. | |
7718 | ||
7719 | *** There is now a variable, ediff-autostore-merges, which controls whether | |
7720 | the result of a merge is saved in a file. By default, this is done only when | |
7721 | merge is done from a session group (eg, when merging files in two different | |
7722 | directories). | |
7723 | ||
7724 | *** Since Emacs 19.31 (this hasn't been announced before), Ediff can compare | |
7725 | and merge groups of files residing in different directories, or revisions of | |
7726 | files in the same directory. | |
7727 | ||
7728 | *** Since Emacs 19.31, Ediff can apply multi-file patches interactively. | |
7729 | The patches must be in the context format or GNU unified format. (The bug | |
7730 | related to the GNU format has now been fixed.) | |
7731 | ||
7732 | ** Changes in Viper | |
7733 | ||
7734 | *** The startup file is now .viper instead of .vip | |
7735 | *** All variable/function names have been changed to start with viper- | |
7736 | instead of vip-. | |
7737 | *** C-\ now simulates the meta-key in all Viper states. | |
7738 | *** C-z in Insert state now escapes to Vi for the duration of the next | |
7739 | Viper command. In Vi and Insert states, C-z behaves as before. | |
7740 | *** C-c \ escapes to Vi for one command if Viper is in Insert or Emacs states. | |
7741 | *** _ is no longer the meta-key in Vi state. | |
7742 | *** The variable viper-insert-state-cursor-color can be used to change cursor | |
7743 | color when Viper is in insert state. | |
7744 | *** If search lands the cursor near the top or the bottom of the window, | |
7745 | Viper pulls the window up or down to expose more context. The variable | |
7746 | viper-adjust-window-after-search controls this behavior. | |
7747 | ||
7748 | ** Etags changes. | |
7749 | ||
7750 | *** In C, C++, Objective C and Java, Etags tags global variables by | |
7751 | default. The resulting tags files are inflated by 30% on average. | |
7752 | Use --no-globals to turn this feature off. Etags can also tag | |
7753 | variables which are members of structure-like constructs, but it does | |
7754 | not by default. Use --members to turn this feature on. | |
7755 | ||
7756 | *** C++ member functions are now recognized as tags. | |
7757 | ||
7758 | *** Java is tagged like C++. In addition, "extends" and "implements" | |
7759 | constructs are tagged. Files are recognised by the extension .java. | |
7760 | ||
7761 | *** Etags can now handle programs written in Postscript. Files are | |
7762 | recognised by the extensions .ps and .pdb (Postscript with C syntax). | |
7763 | In Postscript, tags are lines that start with a slash. | |
7764 | ||
7765 | *** Etags now handles Objective C and Objective C++ code. The usual C and | |
7766 | C++ tags are recognized in these languages; in addition, etags | |
7767 | recognizes special Objective C syntax for classes, class categories, | |
7768 | methods and protocols. | |
7769 | ||
7770 | *** Etags also handles Cobol. Files are recognised by the extension | |
7771 | .cobol. The tagged lines are those containing a word that begins in | |
7772 | column 8 and ends in a full stop, i.e. anything that could be a | |
7773 | paragraph name. | |
7774 | ||
7775 | *** Regexps in Etags now support intervals, as in ed or grep. The syntax of | |
7776 | an interval is \{M,N\}, and it means to match the preceding expression | |
7777 | at least M times and as many as N times. | |
7778 | ||
7779 | ** The format for specifying a custom format for time-stamp to insert | |
7780 | in files has changed slightly. | |
7781 | ||
7782 | With the new enhancements to the functionality of format-time-string, | |
7783 | time-stamp-format will change to be eventually compatible with it. | |
7784 | This conversion is being done in two steps to maintain compatibility | |
7785 | with old time-stamp-format values. | |
7786 | ||
7787 | In the new scheme, alternate case is signified by the number-sign | |
7788 | (`#') modifier, rather than changing the case of the format character. | |
7789 | This feature is as yet incompletely implemented for compatibility | |
7790 | reasons. | |
7791 | ||
7792 | In the old time-stamp-format, all numeric fields defaulted to their | |
7793 | natural width. (With format-time-string, each format has a | |
7794 | fixed-width default.) In this version, you can specify the colon | |
7795 | (`:') modifier to a numeric conversion to mean "give me the historical | |
7796 | time-stamp-format width default." Do not use colon if you are | |
7797 | specifying an explicit width, as in "%02d". | |
7798 | ||
7799 | Numbers are no longer truncated to the requested width, except in the | |
7800 | case of "%02y", which continues to give a two-digit year. Digit | |
7801 | truncation probably wasn't being used for anything else anyway. | |
7802 | ||
7803 | The new formats will work with old versions of Emacs. New formats are | |
7804 | being recommended now to allow time-stamp-format to change in the | |
7805 | future to be compatible with format-time-string. The new forms being | |
7806 | recommended now will continue to work then. | |
7807 | ||
7808 | See the documentation string for the variable time-stamp-format for | |
7809 | details. | |
7810 | ||
7811 | ** There are some additional major modes: | |
7812 | ||
7813 | dcl-mode, for editing VMS DCL files. | |
7814 | m4-mode, for editing files of m4 input. | |
7815 | meta-mode, for editing MetaFont and MetaPost source files. | |
7816 | ||
7817 | ** In Shell mode, the command shell-copy-environment-variable lets you | |
7818 | copy the value of a specified environment variable from the subshell | |
7819 | into Emacs. | |
7820 | ||
7821 | ** New Lisp packages include: | |
7822 | ||
7823 | *** battery.el displays battery status for laptops. | |
7824 | ||
7825 | *** M-x bruce (named after Lenny Bruce) is a program that might | |
7826 | be used for adding some indecent words to your email. | |
7827 | ||
7828 | *** M-x crisp-mode enables an emulation for the CRiSP editor. | |
7829 | ||
7830 | *** M-x dirtrack arranges for better tracking of directory changes | |
7831 | in shell buffers. | |
7832 | ||
7833 | *** The new library elint.el provides for linting of Emacs Lisp code. | |
7834 | See the documentation for `elint-initialize', `elint-current-buffer' | |
7835 | and `elint-defun'. | |
7836 | ||
7837 | *** M-x expand-add-abbrevs defines a special kind of abbrev which is | |
7838 | meant for programming constructs. These abbrevs expand like ordinary | |
7839 | ones, when you type SPC, but only at the end of a line and not within | |
7840 | strings or comments. | |
7841 | ||
7842 | These abbrevs can act as templates: you can define places within an | |
7843 | abbrev for insertion of additional text. Once you expand the abbrev, | |
7844 | you can then use C-x a p and C-x a n to move back and forth to these | |
7845 | insertion points. Thus you can conveniently insert additional text | |
7846 | at these points. | |
7847 | ||
7848 | *** filecache.el remembers the location of files so that you | |
7849 | can visit them by short forms of their names. | |
7850 | ||
7851 | *** find-func.el lets you find the definition of the user-loaded | |
7852 | Emacs Lisp function at point. | |
7853 | ||
7854 | *** M-x handwrite converts text to a "handwritten" picture. | |
7855 | ||
7856 | *** M-x iswitchb-buffer is a command for switching to a buffer, much like | |
7857 | switch-buffer, but it reads the argument in a more helpful way. | |
7858 | ||
7859 | *** M-x landmark implements a neural network for landmark learning. | |
7860 | ||
7861 | *** M-x locate provides a convenient interface to the `locate' program. | |
7862 | ||
7863 | *** M4 mode is a new mode for editing files of m4 input. | |
7864 | ||
7865 | *** mantemp.el creates C++ manual template instantiations | |
7866 | from the GCC error messages which indicate which instantiations are needed. | |
7867 | ||
7868 | *** mouse-copy.el provides a one-click copy and move feature. | |
7869 | You can drag a region with M-mouse-1, and it is automatically | |
7870 | inserted at point. M-Shift-mouse-1 deletes the text from its | |
7871 | original place after inserting the copy. | |
7872 | ||
7873 | *** mouse-drag.el lets you do scrolling by dragging Mouse-2 | |
7874 | on the buffer. | |
7875 | ||
7876 | You click the mouse and move; that distance either translates into the | |
7877 | velocity to scroll (with mouse-drag-throw) or the distance to scroll | |
7878 | (with mouse-drag-drag). Horizontal scrolling is enabled when needed. | |
7879 | ||
7880 | Enable mouse-drag with: | |
7881 | (global-set-key [down-mouse-2] 'mouse-drag-throw) | |
7882 | -or- | |
7883 | (global-set-key [down-mouse-2] 'mouse-drag-drag) | |
7884 | ||
7885 | *** mspools.el is useful for determining which mail folders have | |
7886 | mail waiting to be read in them. It works with procmail. | |
7887 | ||
7888 | *** Octave mode is a major mode for editing files of input for Octave. | |
7889 | It comes with a facility for communicating with an Octave subprocess. | |
7890 | ||
7891 | *** ogonek | |
7892 | ||
7893 | The ogonek package provides functions for changing the coding of | |
7894 | Polish diacritic characters in buffers. Codings known from various | |
7895 | platforms are supported such as ISO8859-2, Mazovia, IBM Latin2, and | |
7896 | TeX. For example, you can change the coding from Mazovia to | |
7897 | ISO8859-2. Another example is a change of coding from ISO8859-2 to | |
7898 | prefix notation (in which `/a' stands for the aogonek character, for | |
7899 | instance) and vice versa. | |
7900 | ||
7901 | To use this package load it using | |
7902 | M-x load-library [enter] ogonek | |
7903 | Then, you may get an explanation by calling one of | |
7904 | M-x ogonek-jak -- in Polish | |
7905 | M-x ogonek-how -- in English | |
7906 | The info specifies the commands and variables provided as well as the | |
7907 | ways of customization in `.emacs'. | |
7908 | ||
7909 | *** Interface to ph. | |
7910 | ||
7911 | Emacs provides a client interface to CCSO Nameservers (ph/qi) | |
7912 | ||
7913 | The CCSO nameserver is used in many universities to provide directory | |
7914 | services about people. ph.el provides a convenient Emacs interface to | |
7915 | these servers. | |
7916 | ||
7917 | *** uce.el is useful for replying to unsolicited commercial email. | |
7918 | ||
7919 | *** vcursor.el implements a "virtual cursor" feature. | |
7920 | You can move the virtual cursor with special commands | |
7921 | while the real cursor does not move. | |
7922 | ||
7923 | *** webjump.el is a "hot list" package which you can set up | |
7924 | for visiting your favorite web sites. | |
7925 | ||
7926 | *** M-x winner-mode is a minor mode which saves window configurations, | |
7927 | so you can move back to other configurations that you have recently used. | |
7928 | ||
7929 | ** movemail change | |
7930 | ||
7931 | Movemail no longer needs to be installed setuid root in order for POP | |
7932 | mail retrieval to function properly. This is because it no longer | |
7933 | supports the RPOP (reserved-port POP) protocol; instead, it uses the | |
7934 | user's POP password to authenticate to the mail server. | |
7935 | ||
7936 | This change was made earlier, but not reported in NEWS before. | |
05197f40 | 7937 | \f |
3787e12e GM |
7938 | * Emacs 20.1 changes for MS-DOS and MS-Windows. |
7939 | ||
7940 | ** Changes in handling MS-DOS/MS-Windows text files. | |
7941 | ||
7942 | Emacs handles three different conventions for representing | |
7943 | end-of-line: CRLF for MSDOS, LF for Unix and GNU, and CR (used on the | |
7944 | Macintosh). Emacs determines which convention is used in a specific | |
7945 | file based on the contents of that file (except for certain special | |
7946 | file names), and when it saves the file, it uses the same convention. | |
7947 | ||
7948 | To save the file and change the end-of-line convention, you can use | |
7949 | C-x RET f (set-buffer-file-coding-system) to specify a different | |
7950 | coding system for the buffer. Then, when you save the file, the newly | |
7951 | specified coding system will take effect. For example, to save with | |
7952 | LF, specify undecided-unix (or some other ...-unix coding system); to | |
7953 | save with CRLF, specify undecided-dos. | |
05197f40 | 7954 | \f |
3787e12e GM |
7955 | * Lisp Changes in Emacs 20.1 |
7956 | ||
7957 | ** Byte-compiled files made with Emacs 20 will, in general, work in | |
7958 | Emacs 19 as well, as long as the source code runs in Emacs 19. And | |
7959 | vice versa: byte-compiled files made with Emacs 19 should also run in | |
7960 | Emacs 20, as long as the program itself works in Emacs 20. | |
7961 | ||
7962 | ** Windows-specific functions and variables have been renamed | |
7963 | to start with w32- instead of win32-. | |
7964 | ||
7965 | In hacker language, calling something a "win" is a form of praise. We | |
7966 | don't want to praise a non-free Microsoft system, so we don't call it | |
7967 | "win". | |
7968 | ||
7969 | ** Basic Lisp changes | |
7970 | ||
7971 | *** A symbol whose name starts with a colon now automatically | |
7972 | evaluates to itself. Therefore such a symbol can be used as a constant. | |
7973 | ||
7974 | *** The defined purpose of `defconst' has been changed. It should now | |
7975 | be used only for values that should not be changed whether by a program | |
7976 | or by the user. | |
7977 | ||
7978 | The actual behavior of defconst has not been changed. | |
7979 | ||
7980 | *** There are new macros `when' and `unless' | |
7981 | ||
7982 | (when CONDITION BODY...) is short for (if CONDITION (progn BODY...)) | |
7983 | (unless CONDITION BODY...) is short for (if CONDITION nil BODY...) | |
7984 | ||
7985 | *** Emacs now defines functions caar, cadr, cdar and cddr with their | |
7986 | usual Lisp meanings. For example, caar returns the car of the car of | |
7987 | its argument. | |
7988 | ||
7989 | *** equal, when comparing strings, now ignores their text properties. | |
7990 | ||
7991 | *** The new function `functionp' tests whether an object is a function. | |
7992 | ||
7993 | *** arrayp now returns t for char-tables and bool-vectors. | |
7994 | ||
7995 | *** Certain primitives which use characters (as integers) now get an | |
7996 | error if the integer is not a valid character code. These primitives | |
7997 | include insert-char, char-to-string, and the %c construct in the | |
7998 | `format' function. | |
7999 | ||
8000 | *** The `require' function now insists on adding a suffix, either .el | |
8001 | or .elc, to the file name. Thus, (require 'foo) will not use a file | |
8002 | whose name is just foo. It insists on foo.el or foo.elc. | |
8003 | ||
8004 | *** The `autoload' function, when the file name does not contain | |
8005 | either a directory name or the suffix .el or .elc, insists on | |
8006 | adding one of these suffixes. | |
8007 | ||
8008 | *** string-to-number now takes an optional second argument BASE | |
8009 | which specifies the base to use when converting an integer. | |
8010 | If BASE is omitted, base 10 is used. | |
8011 | ||
8012 | We have not implemented other radices for floating point numbers, | |
8013 | because that would be much more work and does not seem useful. | |
8014 | ||
8015 | *** substring now handles vectors as well as strings. | |
8016 | ||
8017 | *** The Common Lisp function eql is no longer defined normally. | |
8018 | You must load the `cl' library to define it. | |
8019 | ||
8020 | *** The new macro `with-current-buffer' lets you evaluate an expression | |
8021 | conveniently with a different current buffer. It looks like this: | |
8022 | ||
8023 | (with-current-buffer BUFFER BODY-FORMS...) | |
8024 | ||
8025 | BUFFER is the expression that says which buffer to use. | |
8026 | BODY-FORMS say what to do in that buffer. | |
8027 | ||
8028 | *** The new primitive `save-current-buffer' saves and restores the | |
8029 | choice of current buffer, like `save-excursion', but without saving or | |
8030 | restoring the value of point or the mark. `with-current-buffer' | |
8031 | works using `save-current-buffer'. | |
8032 | ||
8033 | *** The new macro `with-temp-file' lets you do some work in a new buffer and | |
8034 | write the output to a specified file. Like `progn', it returns the value | |
8035 | of the last form. | |
8036 | ||
8037 | *** The new macro `with-temp-buffer' lets you do some work in a new buffer, | |
8038 | which is discarded after use. Like `progn', it returns the value of the | |
8039 | last form. If you wish to return the buffer contents, use (buffer-string) | |
8040 | as the last form. | |
8041 | ||
8042 | *** The new function split-string takes a string, splits it at certain | |
8043 | characters, and returns a list of the substrings in between the | |
8044 | matches. | |
8045 | ||
8046 | For example, (split-string "foo bar lose" " +") returns ("foo" "bar" "lose"). | |
8047 | ||
8048 | *** The new macro with-output-to-string executes some Lisp expressions | |
8049 | with standard-output set up so that all output feeds into a string. | |
8050 | Then it returns that string. | |
8051 | ||
8052 | For example, if the current buffer name is `foo', | |
8053 | ||
8054 | (with-output-to-string | |
8055 | (princ "The buffer is ") | |
8056 | (princ (buffer-name))) | |
8057 | ||
8058 | returns "The buffer is foo". | |
8059 | ||
8060 | ** Non-ASCII characters are now supported, if enable-multibyte-characters | |
8061 | is non-nil. | |
8062 | ||
8063 | These characters have character codes above 256. When inserted in the | |
8064 | buffer or stored in a string, they are represented as multibyte | |
8065 | characters that occupy several buffer positions each. | |
8066 | ||
8067 | *** When enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil, a single character in | |
8068 | a buffer or string can be two or more bytes (as many as four). | |
8069 | ||
8070 | Buffers and strings are still made up of unibyte elements; | |
8071 | character positions and string indices are always measured in bytes. | |
8072 | Therefore, moving forward one character can increase the buffer | |
8073 | position by 2, 3 or 4. The function forward-char moves by whole | |
8074 | characters, and therefore is no longer equivalent to | |
8075 | (lambda (n) (goto-char (+ (point) n))). | |
8076 | ||
8077 | ASCII characters (codes 0 through 127) are still single bytes, always. | |
8078 | Sequences of byte values 128 through 255 are used to represent | |
8079 | non-ASCII characters. These sequences are called "multibyte | |
8080 | characters". | |
8081 | ||
8082 | The first byte of a multibyte character is always in the range 128 | |
8083 | through 159 (octal 0200 through 0237). These values are called | |
8084 | "leading codes". The second and subsequent bytes are always in the | |
8085 | range 160 through 255 (octal 0240 through 0377). The first byte, the | |
8086 | leading code, determines how many bytes long the sequence is. | |
8087 | ||
8088 | *** The function forward-char moves over characters, and therefore | |
8089 | (forward-char 1) may increase point by more than 1 if it moves over a | |
8090 | multibyte character. Likewise, delete-char always deletes a | |
8091 | character, which may be more than one buffer position. | |
8092 | ||
8093 | This means that some Lisp programs, which assume that a character is | |
8094 | always one buffer position, need to be changed. | |
8095 | ||
8096 | However, all ASCII characters are always one buffer position. | |
8097 | ||
8098 | *** The regexp [\200-\377] no longer matches all non-ASCII characters, | |
8099 | because when enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil, these characters | |
8100 | have codes that are not in the range octal 200 to octal 377. However, | |
8101 | the regexp [^\000-\177] does match all non-ASCII characters, | |
8102 | guaranteed. | |
8103 | ||
8104 | *** The function char-boundary-p returns non-nil if position POS is | |
8105 | between two characters in the buffer (not in the middle of a | |
8106 | character). | |
8107 | ||
8108 | When the value is non-nil, it says what kind of character follows POS: | |
8109 | ||
8110 | 0 if POS is at an ASCII character or at the end of range, | |
8111 | 1 if POS is before a 2-byte length multi-byte form, | |
8112 | 2 if POS is at a head of 3-byte length multi-byte form, | |
8113 | 3 if POS is at a head of 4-byte length multi-byte form, | |
8114 | 4 if POS is at a head of multi-byte form of a composite character. | |
8115 | ||
8116 | *** The function char-bytes returns how many bytes the character CHAR uses. | |
8117 | ||
8118 | *** Strings can contain multibyte characters. The function | |
8119 | `length' returns the string length counting bytes, which may be | |
8120 | more than the number of characters. | |
8121 | ||
8122 | You can include a multibyte character in a string constant by writing | |
8123 | it literally. You can also represent it with a hex escape, | |
8124 | \xNNNNNNN..., using as many digits as necessary. Any character which | |
8125 | is not a valid hex digit terminates this construct. If you want to | |
8126 | follow it with a character that is a hex digit, write backslash and | |
8127 | newline in between; that will terminate the hex escape. | |
8128 | ||
8129 | *** The function concat-chars takes arguments which are characters | |
8130 | and returns a string containing those characters. | |
8131 | ||
8132 | *** The function sref access a multibyte character in a string. | |
8133 | (sref STRING INDX) returns the character in STRING at INDEX. INDEX | |
8134 | counts from zero. If INDEX is at a position in the middle of a | |
8135 | character, sref signals an error. | |
8136 | ||
8137 | *** The function chars-in-string returns the number of characters | |
8138 | in a string. This is less than the length of the string, if the | |
8139 | string contains multibyte characters (the length counts bytes). | |
8140 | ||
8141 | *** The function chars-in-region returns the number of characters | |
8142 | in a region from BEG to END. This is less than (- END BEG) if the | |
8143 | region contains multibyte characters (the length counts bytes). | |
8144 | ||
8145 | *** The function string-to-list converts a string to a list of | |
8146 | the characters in it. string-to-vector converts a string | |
8147 | to a vector of the characters in it. | |
8148 | ||
8149 | *** The function store-substring alters part of the contents | |
8150 | of a string. You call it as follows: | |
8151 | ||
8152 | (store-substring STRING IDX OBJ) | |
8153 | ||
8154 | This says to alter STRING, by storing OBJ starting at index IDX in | |
8155 | STRING. OBJ may be either a character or a (smaller) string. | |
8156 | This function really does alter the contents of STRING. | |
8157 | Since it is impossible to change the length of an existing string, | |
8158 | it is an error if OBJ doesn't fit within STRING's actual length. | |
8159 | ||
8160 | *** char-width returns the width (in columns) of the character CHAR, | |
8161 | if it were displayed in the current buffer and the selected window. | |
8162 | ||
8163 | *** string-width returns the width (in columns) of the text in STRING, | |
8164 | if it were displayed in the current buffer and the selected window. | |
8165 | ||
8166 | *** truncate-string-to-width shortens a string, if necessary, | |
8167 | to fit within a certain number of columns. (Of course, it does | |
8168 | not alter the string that you give it; it returns a new string | |
8169 | which contains all or just part of the existing string.) | |
8170 | ||
8171 | (truncate-string-to-width STR END-COLUMN &optional START-COLUMN PADDING) | |
8172 | ||
8173 | This returns the part of STR up to column END-COLUMN. | |
8174 | ||
8175 | The optional argument START-COLUMN specifies the starting column. | |
8176 | If this is non-nil, then the first START-COLUMN columns of the string | |
8177 | are not included in the resulting value. | |
8178 | ||
8179 | The optional argument PADDING, if non-nil, is a padding character to be added | |
8180 | at the beginning and end the resulting string, to extend it to exactly | |
8181 | WIDTH columns. If PADDING is nil, that means do not pad; then, if STRING | |
8182 | is narrower than WIDTH, the value is equal to STRING. | |
8183 | ||
8184 | If PADDING and START-COLUMN are both non-nil, and if there is no clean | |
8185 | place in STRING that corresponds to START-COLUMN (because one | |
8186 | character extends across that column), then the padding character | |
8187 | PADDING is added one or more times at the beginning of the result | |
8188 | string, so that its columns line up as if it really did start at | |
8189 | column START-COLUMN. | |
8190 | ||
8191 | *** When the functions in the list after-change-functions are called, | |
8192 | the third argument is the number of bytes in the pre-change text, not | |
8193 | necessarily the number of characters. It is, in effect, the | |
8194 | difference in buffer position between the beginning and the end of the | |
8195 | changed text, before the change. | |
8196 | ||
8197 | *** The characters Emacs uses are classified in various character | |
8198 | sets, each of which has a name which is a symbol. In general there is | |
8199 | one character set for each script, not for each language. | |
8200 | ||
8201 | **** The function charsetp tests whether an object is a character set name. | |
8202 | ||
8203 | **** The variable charset-list holds a list of character set names. | |
8204 | ||
8205 | **** char-charset, given a character code, returns the name of the character | |
8206 | set that the character belongs to. (The value is a symbol.) | |
8207 | ||
8208 | **** split-char, given a character code, returns a list containing the | |
8209 | name of the character set, followed by one or two byte-values | |
8210 | which identify the character within that character set. | |
8211 | ||
8212 | **** make-char, given a character set name and one or two subsequent | |
8213 | byte-values, constructs a character code. This is roughly the | |
8214 | opposite of split-char. | |
8215 | ||
8216 | **** find-charset-region returns a list of the character sets | |
8217 | of all the characters between BEG and END. | |
8218 | ||
8219 | **** find-charset-string returns a list of the character sets | |
8220 | of all the characters in a string. | |
8221 | ||
8222 | *** Here are the Lisp facilities for working with coding systems | |
8223 | and specifying coding systems. | |
8224 | ||
8225 | **** The function coding-system-list returns a list of all coding | |
8226 | system names (symbols). With optional argument t, it returns a list | |
8227 | of all distinct base coding systems, not including variants. | |
8228 | (Variant coding systems are those like latin-1-dos, latin-1-unix | |
8229 | and latin-1-mac which specify the end-of-line conversion as well | |
8230 | as what to do about code conversion.) | |
8231 | ||
8232 | **** coding-system-p tests a symbol to see if it is a coding system | |
8233 | name. It returns t if so, nil if not. | |
8234 | ||
8235 | **** file-coding-system-alist specifies which coding systems to use | |
8236 | for certain file names. It works like network-coding-system-alist, | |
8237 | except that the PATTERN is matched against the file name. | |
8238 | ||
8239 | Each element has the format (PATTERN . VAL), where PATTERN determines | |
8240 | which file names the element applies to. PATTERN should be a regexp | |
8241 | to match against a file name. | |
8242 | ||
8243 | VAL is a coding system, a cons cell containing two coding systems, or | |
8244 | a function symbol. If VAL is a coding system, it is used for both | |
8245 | decoding what received from the network stream and encoding what sent | |
8246 | to the network stream. If VAL is a cons cell containing two coding | |
8247 | systems, the car specifies the coding system for decoding, and the cdr | |
8248 | specifies the coding system for encoding. | |
8249 | ||
8250 | If VAL is a function symbol, the function must return a coding system | |
8251 | or a cons cell containing two coding systems, which is used as above. | |
8252 | ||
8253 | **** The variable network-coding-system-alist specifies | |
8254 | the coding system to use for network sockets. | |
8255 | ||
8256 | Each element has the format (PATTERN . VAL), where PATTERN determines | |
8257 | which network sockets the element applies to. PATTERN should be | |
8258 | either a port number or a regular expression matching some network | |
8259 | service names. | |
8260 | ||
8261 | VAL is a coding system, a cons cell containing two coding systems, or | |
8262 | a function symbol. If VAL is a coding system, it is used for both | |
8263 | decoding what received from the network stream and encoding what sent | |
8264 | to the network stream. If VAL is a cons cell containing two coding | |
8265 | systems, the car specifies the coding system for decoding, and the cdr | |
8266 | specifies the coding system for encoding. | |
8267 | ||
8268 | If VAL is a function symbol, the function must return a coding system | |
8269 | or a cons cell containing two coding systems, which is used as above. | |
8270 | ||
8271 | **** process-coding-system-alist specifies which coding systems to use | |
8272 | for certain subprocess. It works like network-coding-system-alist, | |
8273 | except that the PATTERN is matched against the program name used to | |
8274 | start the subprocess. | |
8275 | ||
8276 | **** The variable default-process-coding-system specifies the coding | |
8277 | systems to use for subprocess (and net connection) input and output, | |
8278 | when nothing else specifies what to do. The value is a cons cell | |
8279 | (OUTPUT-CODING . INPUT-CODING). OUTPUT-CODING applies to output | |
8280 | to the subprocess, and INPUT-CODING applies to input from it. | |
8281 | ||
8282 | **** The variable coding-system-for-write, if non-nil, specifies the | |
8283 | coding system to use for writing a file, or for output to a synchronous | |
8284 | subprocess. | |
8285 | ||
8286 | It also applies to any asynchronous subprocess or network connection, | |
8287 | but in a different way: the value of coding-system-for-write when you | |
8288 | start the subprocess or connection affects that subprocess or | |
8289 | connection permanently or until overridden. | |
8290 | ||
8291 | The variable coding-system-for-write takes precedence over | |
8292 | file-coding-system-alist, process-coding-system-alist and | |
8293 | network-coding-system-alist, and all other methods of specifying a | |
8294 | coding system for output. But most of the time this variable is nil. | |
8295 | It exists so that Lisp programs can bind it to a specific coding | |
8296 | system for one operation at a time. | |
8297 | ||
8298 | **** coding-system-for-read applies similarly to input from | |
8299 | files, subprocesses or network connections. | |
8300 | ||
8301 | **** The function process-coding-system tells you what | |
8302 | coding systems(s) an existing subprocess is using. | |
8303 | The value is a cons cell, | |
8304 | (DECODING-CODING-SYSTEM . ENCODING-CODING-SYSTEM) | |
8305 | where DECODING-CODING-SYSTEM is used for decoding output from | |
8306 | the subprocess, and ENCODING-CODING-SYSTEM is used for encoding | |
8307 | input to the subprocess. | |
8308 | ||
8309 | **** The function set-process-coding-system can be used to | |
8310 | change the coding systems in use for an existing subprocess. | |
8311 | ||
8312 | ** Emacs has a new facility to help users manage the many | |
8313 | customization options. To make a Lisp program work with this facility, | |
8314 | you need to use the new macros defgroup and defcustom. | |
8315 | ||
8316 | You use defcustom instead of defvar, for defining a user option | |
8317 | variable. The difference is that you specify two additional pieces of | |
8318 | information (usually): the "type" which says what values are | |
8319 | legitimate, and the "group" which specifies the hierarchy for | |
8320 | customization. | |
8321 | ||
8322 | Thus, instead of writing | |
8323 | ||
8324 | (defvar foo-blurgoze nil | |
8325 | "*Non-nil means that foo will act very blurgozely.") | |
8326 | ||
8327 | you would now write this: | |
8328 | ||
8329 | (defcustom foo-blurgoze nil | |
8330 | "*Non-nil means that foo will act very blurgozely." | |
8331 | :type 'boolean | |
8332 | :group foo) | |
8333 | ||
8334 | The type `boolean' means that this variable has only | |
8335 | two meaningful states: nil and non-nil. Other type values | |
8336 | describe other possibilities; see the manual for Custom | |
8337 | for a description of them. | |
8338 | ||
8339 | The "group" argument is used to specify a group which the option | |
8340 | should belong to. You define a new group like this: | |
8341 | ||
8342 | (defgroup ispell nil | |
8343 | "Spell checking using Ispell." | |
8344 | :group 'processes) | |
8345 | ||
8346 | The "group" argument in defgroup specifies the parent group. The root | |
8347 | group is called `emacs'; it should not contain any variables itself, | |
8348 | but only other groups. The immediate subgroups of `emacs' correspond | |
8349 | to the keywords used by C-h p. Under these subgroups come | |
8350 | second-level subgroups that belong to individual packages. | |
8351 | ||
8352 | Each Emacs package should have its own set of groups. A simple | |
8353 | package should have just one group; a more complex package should | |
8354 | have a hierarchy of its own groups. The sole or root group of a | |
8355 | package should be a subgroup of one or more of the "keyword" | |
8356 | first-level subgroups. | |
8357 | ||
8358 | ** New `widget' library for inserting UI components in buffers. | |
8359 | ||
8360 | This library, used by the new custom library, is documented in a | |
8361 | separate manual that accompanies Emacs. | |
8362 | ||
8363 | ** easy-mmode | |
8364 | ||
8365 | The easy-mmode package provides macros and functions that make | |
8366 | developing minor modes easier. Roughly, the programmer has to code | |
8367 | only the functionality of the minor mode. All the rest--toggles, | |
8368 | predicate, and documentation--can be done in one call to the macro | |
8369 | `easy-mmode-define-minor-mode' (see the documentation). See also | |
8370 | `easy-mmode-define-keymap'. | |
8371 | ||
8372 | ** Text property changes | |
8373 | ||
8374 | *** The `intangible' property now works on overlays as well as on a | |
8375 | text property. | |
8376 | ||
8377 | *** The new functions next-char-property-change and | |
8378 | previous-char-property-change scan through the buffer looking for a | |
8379 | place where either a text property or an overlay might change. The | |
8380 | functions take two arguments, POSITION and LIMIT. POSITION is the | |
8381 | starting position for the scan. LIMIT says where to stop the scan. | |
8382 | ||
8383 | If no property change is found before LIMIT, the value is LIMIT. If | |
8384 | LIMIT is nil, scan goes to the beginning or end of the accessible part | |
8385 | of the buffer. If no property change is found, the value is the | |
8386 | position of the beginning or end of the buffer. | |
8387 | ||
8388 | *** In the `local-map' text property or overlay property, the property | |
8389 | value can now be a symbol whose function definition is a keymap. This | |
8390 | is an alternative to using the keymap itself. | |
8391 | ||
8392 | ** Changes in invisibility features | |
8393 | ||
8394 | *** Isearch can now temporarily show parts of the buffer which are | |
8395 | hidden by an overlay with a invisible property, when the search match | |
8396 | is inside that portion of the buffer. To enable this the overlay | |
8397 | should have a isearch-open-invisible property which is a function that | |
8398 | would be called having the overlay as an argument, the function should | |
8399 | make the overlay visible. | |
8400 | ||
8401 | During incremental search the overlays are shown by modifying the | |
8402 | invisible and intangible properties, if beside this more actions are | |
8403 | needed the overlay should have a isearch-open-invisible-temporary | |
8404 | which is a function. The function is called with 2 arguments: one is | |
8405 | the overlay and the second is nil when it should show the overlay and | |
8406 | t when it should hide it. | |
8407 | ||
8408 | *** add-to-invisibility-spec, remove-from-invisibility-spec | |
8409 | ||
8410 | Modes that use overlays to hide portions of a buffer should set the | |
8411 | invisible property of the overlay to the mode's name (or another symbol) | |
8412 | and modify the `buffer-invisibility-spec' to include that symbol. | |
8413 | Use `add-to-invisibility-spec' and `remove-from-invisibility-spec' to | |
8414 | manipulate the `buffer-invisibility-spec'. | |
8415 | Here is an example of how to do this: | |
8416 | ||
8417 | ;; If we want to display an ellipsis: | |
8418 | (add-to-invisibility-spec '(my-symbol . t)) | |
8419 | ;; If you don't want ellipsis: | |
8420 | (add-to-invisibility-spec 'my-symbol) | |
8421 | ||
8422 | ... | |
8423 | (overlay-put (make-overlay beginning end) 'invisible 'my-symbol) | |
8424 | ||
8425 | ... | |
8426 | ;; When done with the overlays: | |
8427 | (remove-from-invisibility-spec '(my-symbol . t)) | |
8428 | ;; Or respectively: | |
8429 | (remove-from-invisibility-spec 'my-symbol) | |
8430 | ||
8431 | ** Changes in syntax parsing. | |
8432 | ||
8433 | *** The syntax-directed buffer-scan functions (such as | |
8434 | `parse-partial-sexp', `forward-word' and similar functions) can now | |
8435 | obey syntax information specified by text properties, if the variable | |
8436 | `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is non-nil. | |
8437 | ||
8438 | If the value of `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is nil, the behavior | |
8439 | is as before: the syntax-table of the current buffer is always | |
8440 | used to determine the syntax of the character at the position. | |
8441 | ||
8442 | When `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is non-nil, the syntax of a | |
8443 | character in the buffer is calculated thus: | |
8444 | ||
8445 | a) if the `syntax-table' text-property of that character | |
8446 | is a cons, this cons becomes the syntax-type; | |
8447 | ||
8448 | Valid values of `syntax-table' text-property are: nil, a valid | |
8449 | syntax-table, and a valid syntax-table element, i.e., | |
8450 | a cons cell of the form (SYNTAX-CODE . MATCHING-CHAR). | |
8451 | ||
8452 | b) if the character's `syntax-table' text-property | |
8453 | is a syntax table, this syntax table is used | |
8454 | (instead of the syntax-table of the current buffer) to | |
8455 | determine the syntax type of the character. | |
8456 | ||
8457 | c) otherwise the syntax-type is determined by the syntax-table | |
8458 | of the current buffer. | |
8459 | ||
8460 | *** The meaning of \s in regular expressions is also affected by the | |
8461 | value of `parse-sexp-lookup-properties'. The details are the same as | |
8462 | for the syntax-directed buffer-scan functions. | |
8463 | ||
8464 | *** There are two new syntax-codes, `!' and `|' (numeric values 14 | |
8465 | and 15). A character with a code `!' starts a comment which is ended | |
8466 | only by another character with the same code (unless quoted). A | |
8467 | character with a code `|' starts a string which is ended only by | |
8468 | another character with the same code (unless quoted). | |
8469 | ||
8470 | These codes are mainly meant for use as values of the `syntax-table' | |
8471 | text property. | |
8472 | ||
8473 | *** The function `parse-partial-sexp' has new semantics for the sixth | |
8474 | arg COMMENTSTOP. If it is `syntax-table', parse stops after the start | |
8475 | of a comment or a string, or after end of a comment or a string. | |
8476 | ||
8477 | *** The state-list which the return value from `parse-partial-sexp' | |
8478 | (and can also be used as an argument) now has an optional ninth | |
8479 | element: the character address of the start of last comment or string; | |
8480 | nil if none. The fourth and eighth elements have special values if the | |
8481 | string/comment is started by a "!" or "|" syntax-code. | |
8482 | ||
8483 | *** Since new features of `parse-partial-sexp' allow a complete | |
8484 | syntactic parsing, `font-lock' no longer supports | |
8485 | `font-lock-comment-start-regexp'. | |
8486 | ||
8487 | ** Changes in face features | |
8488 | ||
8489 | *** The face functions are now unconditionally defined in Emacs, even | |
8490 | if it does not support displaying on a device that supports faces. | |
8491 | ||
8492 | *** The function face-documentation returns the documentation string | |
8493 | of a face (or nil if it doesn't have one). | |
8494 | ||
8495 | *** The function face-bold-p returns t if a face should be bold. | |
8496 | set-face-bold-p sets that flag. | |
8497 | ||
8498 | *** The function face-italic-p returns t if a face should be italic. | |
8499 | set-face-italic-p sets that flag. | |
8500 | ||
8501 | *** You can now specify foreground and background colors for text | |
8502 | by adding elements of the form (foreground-color . COLOR-NAME) | |
8503 | and (background-color . COLOR-NAME) to the list of faces in | |
8504 | the `face' property (either the character's text property or an | |
8505 | overlay property). | |
8506 | ||
8507 | This means that you no longer need to create named faces to use | |
8508 | arbitrary colors in a Lisp package. | |
8509 | ||
8510 | ** Changes in file-handling functions | |
8511 | ||
8512 | *** File-access primitive functions no longer discard an extra redundant | |
8513 | directory name from the beginning of the file name. In other words, | |
8514 | they no longer do anything special with // or /~. That conversion | |
8515 | is now done only in substitute-in-file-name. | |
8516 | ||
8517 | This makes it possible for a Lisp program to open a file whose name | |
8518 | begins with ~. | |
8519 | ||
8520 | *** If copy-file is unable to set the date of the output file, | |
8521 | it now signals an error with the condition file-date-error. | |
8522 | ||
8523 | *** The inode number returned by file-attributes may be an integer (if | |
8524 | the number fits in a Lisp integer) or a list of integers. | |
8525 | ||
8526 | *** insert-file-contents can now read from a special file, | |
8527 | as long as the arguments VISIT and REPLACE are nil. | |
8528 | ||
8529 | *** The RAWFILE arg to find-file-noselect, if non-nil, now suppresses | |
8530 | character code conversion as well as other things. | |
8531 | ||
8532 | Meanwhile, this feature does work with remote file names | |
8533 | (formerly it did not). | |
8534 | ||
8535 | *** Lisp packages which create temporary files should use the TMPDIR | |
8536 | environment variable to decide which directory to put them in. | |
8537 | ||
8538 | *** interpreter-mode-alist elements now specify regexps | |
8539 | instead of constant strings. | |
8540 | ||
8541 | *** expand-file-name no longer treats `//' or `/~' specially. It used | |
8542 | to delete all the text of a file name up through the first slash of | |
8543 | any `//' or `/~' sequence. Now it passes them straight through. | |
8544 | ||
8545 | substitute-in-file-name continues to treat those sequences specially, | |
8546 | in the same way as before. | |
8547 | ||
8548 | *** The variable `format-alist' is more general now. | |
8549 | The FROM-FN and TO-FN in a format definition can now be strings | |
8550 | which specify shell commands to use as filters to perform conversion. | |
8551 | ||
8552 | *** The new function access-file tries to open a file, and signals an | |
8553 | error if that fails. If the open succeeds, access-file does nothing | |
8554 | else, and returns nil. | |
8555 | ||
8556 | *** The function insert-directory now signals an error if the specified | |
8557 | directory cannot be listed. | |
8558 | ||
8559 | ** Changes in minibuffer input | |
8560 | ||
8561 | *** The functions read-buffer, read-variable, read-command, read-string | |
8562 | read-file-name, read-from-minibuffer and completing-read now take an | |
8563 | additional argument which specifies the default value. If this | |
8564 | argument is non-nil, it should be a string; that string is used in two | |
8565 | ways: | |
8566 | ||
8567 | It is returned if the user enters empty input. | |
8568 | It is available through the history command M-n. | |
8569 | ||
8570 | *** The functions read-string, read-from-minibuffer, | |
8571 | read-no-blanks-input and completing-read now take an additional | |
8572 | argument INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD. If this is non-nil, then the | |
8573 | minibuffer inherits the current input method and the setting of | |
8574 | enable-multibyte-characters from the previously current buffer. | |
8575 | ||
8576 | In an interactive spec, you can use M instead of s to read an | |
8577 | argument in this way. | |
8578 | ||
8579 | *** All minibuffer input functions discard text properties | |
8580 | from the text you enter in the minibuffer, unless the variable | |
8581 | minibuffer-allow-text-properties is non-nil. | |
8582 | ||
8583 | ** Echo area features | |
8584 | ||
8585 | *** Clearing the echo area now runs the normal hook | |
8586 | echo-area-clear-hook. Note that the echo area can be used while the | |
8587 | minibuffer is active; in that case, the minibuffer is still active | |
8588 | after the echo area is cleared. | |
8589 | ||
8590 | *** The function current-message returns the message currently displayed | |
8591 | in the echo area, or nil if there is none. | |
8592 | ||
8593 | ** Keyboard input features | |
8594 | ||
8595 | *** tty-erase-char is a new variable that reports which character was | |
8596 | set up as the terminal's erase character when time Emacs was started. | |
8597 | ||
8598 | *** num-nonmacro-input-events is the total number of input events | |
8599 | received so far from the terminal. It does not count those generated | |
8600 | by keyboard macros. | |
8601 | ||
8602 | ** Frame-related changes | |
8603 | ||
8604 | *** make-frame runs the normal hook before-make-frame-hook just before | |
8605 | creating a frame, and just after creating a frame it runs the abnormal | |
8606 | hook after-make-frame-functions with the new frame as arg. | |
8607 | ||
8608 | *** The new hook window-configuration-change-hook is now run every time | |
8609 | the window configuration has changed. The frame whose configuration | |
8610 | has changed is the selected frame when the hook is run. | |
8611 | ||
8612 | *** Each frame now independently records the order for recently | |
8613 | selected buffers, in its buffer-list frame parameter, so that the | |
8614 | value of other-buffer is now based on the buffers recently displayed | |
8615 | in the selected frame. | |
8616 | ||
8617 | *** The value of the frame parameter vertical-scroll-bars | |
8618 | is now `left', `right' or nil. A non-nil value specifies | |
8619 | which side of the window to put the scroll bars on. | |
8620 | ||
8621 | ** X Windows features | |
8622 | ||
8623 | *** You can examine X resources for other applications by binding | |
8624 | x-resource-class around a call to x-get-resource. The usual value of | |
8625 | x-resource-class is "Emacs", which is the correct value for Emacs. | |
8626 | ||
8627 | *** In menus, checkboxes and radio buttons now actually work. | |
8628 | The menu displays the current status of the box or button. | |
8629 | ||
8630 | *** The function x-list-fonts now takes an optional fourth argument | |
8631 | MAXIMUM which sets a limit on how many matching fonts to return. | |
8632 | A smaller value of MAXIMUM makes the function faster. | |
8633 | ||
8634 | If the only question is whether *any* font matches the pattern, | |
8635 | it is good to supply 1 for this argument. | |
8636 | ||
8637 | ** Subprocess features | |
8638 | ||
8639 | *** A reminder: it is no longer necessary for subprocess filter | |
8640 | functions and sentinels to do save-match-data, because Emacs does this | |
8641 | automatically. | |
8642 | ||
8643 | *** The new function shell-command-to-string executes a shell command | |
8644 | and returns the output from the command as a string. | |
8645 | ||
8646 | *** The new function process-contact returns t for a child process, | |
8647 | and (HOSTNAME SERVICE) for a net connection. | |
8648 | ||
8649 | ** An error in running pre-command-hook or post-command-hook | |
8650 | does clear the variable to nil. The documentation was wrong before. | |
8651 | ||
8652 | ** In define-key-after, if AFTER is t, the new binding now always goes | |
8653 | at the end of the keymap. If the keymap is a menu, this means it | |
8654 | goes after the other menu items. | |
8655 | ||
8656 | ** If you have a program that makes several changes in the same area | |
8657 | of the buffer, you can use the macro combine-after-change-calls | |
8658 | around that Lisp code to make it faster when after-change hooks | |
8659 | are in use. | |
8660 | ||
8661 | The macro arranges to call the after-change functions just once for a | |
8662 | series of several changes--if that seems safe. | |
8663 | ||
8664 | Don't alter the variables after-change-functions and | |
8665 | after-change-function within the body of a combine-after-change-calls | |
8666 | form. | |
8667 | ||
8668 | ** If you define an abbrev (with define-abbrev) whose EXPANSION | |
8669 | is not a string, then the abbrev does not expand in the usual sense, | |
8670 | but its hook is still run. | |
8671 | ||
8672 | ** Normally, the Lisp debugger is not used (even if you have enabled it) | |
8673 | for errors that are handled by condition-case. | |
8674 | ||
8675 | If you set debug-on-signal to a non-nil value, then the debugger is called | |
8676 | regardless of whether there is a handler for the condition. This is | |
8677 | useful for debugging problems that happen inside of a condition-case. | |
8678 | ||
8679 | This mode of operation seems to be unreliable in other ways. Errors that | |
8680 | are normal and ought to be handled, perhaps in timers or process | |
8681 | filters, will instead invoke the debugger. So don't say you weren't | |
8682 | warned. | |
8683 | ||
8684 | ** The new variable ring-bell-function lets you specify your own | |
8685 | way for Emacs to "ring the bell". | |
8686 | ||
8687 | ** If run-at-time's TIME argument is t, the action is repeated at | |
8688 | integral multiples of REPEAT from the epoch; this is useful for | |
8689 | functions like display-time. | |
8690 | ||
8691 | ** You can use the function locate-library to find the precise file | |
8692 | name of a Lisp library. This isn't new, but wasn't documented before. | |
8693 | ||
8694 | ** Commands for entering view mode have new optional arguments that | |
8695 | can be used from Lisp. Low-level entrance to and exit from view mode | |
8696 | is done by functions view-mode-enter and view-mode-exit. | |
8697 | ||
8698 | ** batch-byte-compile-file now makes Emacs return a nonzero status code | |
8699 | if there is an error in compilation. | |
8700 | ||
8701 | ** pop-to-buffer, switch-to-buffer-other-window and | |
8702 | switch-to-buffer-other-frame now accept an additional optional | |
8703 | argument NORECORD, much like switch-to-buffer. If it is non-nil, | |
8704 | they don't put the buffer at the front of the buffer list. | |
8705 | ||
8706 | ** If your .emacs file leaves the *scratch* buffer non-empty, | |
8707 | Emacs does not display the startup message, so as to avoid changing | |
8708 | the *scratch* buffer. | |
8709 | ||
8710 | ** The new function regexp-opt returns an efficient regexp to match a string. | |
8711 | The arguments are STRINGS and (optionally) PAREN. This function can be used | |
8712 | where regexp matching or searching is intensively used and speed is important, | |
8713 | e.g., in Font Lock mode. | |
8714 | ||
8715 | ** The variable buffer-display-count is local to each buffer, | |
8716 | and is incremented each time the buffer is displayed in a window. | |
8717 | It starts at 0 when the buffer is created. | |
8718 | ||
8719 | ** The new function compose-mail starts composing a mail message | |
8720 | using the user's chosen mail composition agent (specified with the | |
8721 | variable mail-user-agent). It has variants compose-mail-other-window | |
8722 | and compose-mail-other-frame. | |
8723 | ||
8724 | ** The `user-full-name' function now takes an optional parameter which | |
8725 | can either be a number (the UID) or a string (the login name). The | |
8726 | full name of the specified user will be returned. | |
8727 | ||
8728 | ** Lisp packages that load files of customizations, or any other sort | |
8729 | of user profile, should obey the variable init-file-user in deciding | |
8730 | where to find it. They should load the profile of the user name found | |
8731 | in that variable. If init-file-user is nil, meaning that the -q | |
8732 | option was used, then Lisp packages should not load the customization | |
8733 | files at all. | |
8734 | ||
8735 | ** format-time-string now allows you to specify the field width | |
8736 | and type of padding. This works as in printf: you write the field | |
8737 | width as digits in the middle of a %-construct. If you start | |
8738 | the field width with 0, it means to pad with zeros. | |
8739 | ||
8740 | For example, %S normally specifies the number of seconds since the | |
8741 | minute; %03S means to pad this with zeros to 3 positions, %_3S to pad | |
8742 | with spaces to 3 positions. Plain %3S pads with zeros, because that | |
8743 | is how %S normally pads to two positions. | |
8744 | ||
8745 | ** thing-at-point now supports a new kind of "thing": url. | |
8746 | ||
8747 | ** imenu.el changes. | |
8748 | ||
8749 | You can now specify a function to be run when selecting an | |
8750 | item from menu created by imenu. | |
8751 | ||
8752 | An example of using this feature: if we define imenu items for the | |
8753 | #include directives in a C file, we can open the included file when we | |
8754 | select one of those items. | |
05197f40 | 8755 | \f |
3787e12e | 8756 | * For older news, see the file ONEWS |
a933dad1 DL |
8757 | |
8758 | ---------------------------------------------------------------------- | |
8759 | Copyright information: | |
8760 | ||
75d80cc6 | 8761 | Copyright (C) 1999, 2000, 2001 Free Software Foundation, Inc. |
a933dad1 DL |
8762 | |
8763 | Permission is granted to anyone to make or distribute verbatim copies | |
8764 | of this document as received, in any medium, provided that the | |
8765 | copyright notice and this permission notice are preserved, | |
8766 | thus giving the recipient permission to redistribute in turn. | |
8767 | ||
8768 | Permission is granted to distribute modified versions | |
8769 | of this document, or of portions of it, | |
8770 | under the above conditions, provided also that they | |
8771 | carry prominent notices stating who last changed them. | |
05197f40 | 8772 | \f |
a933dad1 DL |
8773 | Local variables: |
8774 | mode: outline | |
8775 | paragraph-separate: "[ \f]*$" | |
8776 | end: |